Home

TSM and TTB - ACTIVE Solutions Web Portal

1. Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 215 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe 9 1 3 Overlaying Data on Deprivation Areas Overlaying our data over a deprivation map will show us the relationship between incidents or household locations and the areas of deprivation Go to the Database Tab and select the database In this example we are using Learner Data Click on Activity to get to the Query Screen Writer Select the data you require in this example have selected all 16 18 year olds studying Foundations for Learning and Life Click Execute to run the query The number tells you how many learners you have selected Click on the pencil to draw the dots on the map Ei hel 3 Ps e sd Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 216 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to o Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 This is an example of a distribution map below College Key Sites the green crosses have been overlaid on top of the learners SS ee or Ee ew fee 688 8 SE Sr OE et eb eS l Oe Ete SS ewe Oe rem Se Below is an example of the same distribution map incorporating the areas of deprivation The learners and colleges have been overlaid on top of the deprived areas T rs as Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 217 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Febru
2. Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 2 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 185 2 1 Copy and paste into MS PowerPoint 185 2 2 Create a CSV file and re import a sub set of the original data 139 2 3 Tag data with ref areas easting and northing 185 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 170 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 Introduction Exports and prints of the maps and data to hardcopy or external documents or files can be achieved via the Print Toolbox Tab The Print toolbox can be used to e print the map and the various keys legends e print the activity query criteria and notes e export to MS Word o the map and the various keys legends o the activity query criteria and notes o the activity list o the comparison data in list format o the current census table e export to Excel o the episode bands and counts the activity list the comparison data in list format the current census table O O 1 1 Print Toolbox Active TSM will output to any printer for which the correct drivers are loaded on the PC Data can also be exported to Notepad MS Excel and MS Word or by selecting one of the export buttons on the Print Tab see section below TIP Some of the print files constructed by Active TSM especially maps containing detailed geographical features and both thematic and point information may
3. e Underneath the colour palette click on the value next to Blue and a scroll bar will appear allowing the Blue colour value to be changed e Click within the scroll bar and drag it to the right changing the Red value to 255 noticing the colour change to blue e Now repeat for the Green value resulting in the coloured square changing to turquoise e Click on the Upd update button e To remove all changes and revert to the colour set present when you loaded the configuration program press Prev e To return to the default colour set press the Def button then Upd Upd Prev Det Help Ext Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 299 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 2 3 Setting Map Fill Colours Click on the Map Fill Colours button to list the values within your system 3 of the 4 icons top right e Click on the Other Woodlands line for example to highlight the whole line including the Red Green and Blue colour values Colour Configurator _ _ Map layers Map features _ __ Colour values Fill colors Red Green Blue Water_Lakes 0 165 198 r Settlements Large 243 227 178 Colour settings Settlements Small 23 T227 1 9776 Other Buildings 255 204 153 Other Property Land 255 255 204 Other Pathways 204 204 2304 Other_Roads 204 204 204 Other Roadside Natural 204 255 204 Other Roadside Manma
4. AM 6100 t 70 999 am M 7100 in 80 999 om E 8100 in 90 999 Lom EA 91 00 in 99 999 You can set the Lower Interval Upper values as well as the Number of Bands max 16 e Just click in the appropriate box to type the new value and hit the Enter key e Then click the Equals button below to re calculate WP aarp iets SN perii a Ai i Ft 1 rs wt h FEA AL N RA he wA i k Ve a i This adds similar functionality to the Compare tab making it easier to control the way that statistics are displayed as shaded maps Bands can be turned on or off using the check boxes to the right of each band number This will change the associated colours on the map when you redraw it Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 269 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 6 7 Printing the Calc And Theme Banding Key It is possible to export the Calculation amp Thematic Banding Key into Word from the Print toolbox making reports richer and easier to understand Boundary Calc amp Theme Banding Key 6 8 Show Hide Results Sheet This button toggles the display of the Results sheet which lists the results in a tabular form which may also be exported to Excel eT u j aj Apad Daing pr erent eee T 18 Dae T bet ae eet P PER ib era _ip_it_et_4 _ii_te_ar PRS SS EDO SS EAS ESSA SAS CASEI ONS Se Se A m PA j
5. Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 358 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 4 Isochrones Pressing these buttons displays map layers relating to left to right below Isochrone Roads Ilsochrone Outlines When Isochrones are created they will appear on the map However if these buttons are turned off they will not be displayed after refreshing the map It is recommended that these buttons be left on permanently 5 5 Key Sites Extreme left below Key Sites When this button is clicked on the Key Sites from the Active TSM program will be displayed on the map assuming there is a tick in the check box beside the name Key sites can be used as the start point origin of a travel time boundary within the program Click the down arrow to the right for a list of key site types N B There must be a link to Active TSM in the Active TTB ini file in the integration section pointing to the file PROVIDER INI in the Active directory e g line reads Provider_INl c Program Files Active provider ini TIP The program allows you to right click on the drop down list of Key Site databases and e Select all key sites i e turn them all on e De select all key sites in the list e Generate isochrones around every site when ticked N B You need to be on the Drivetime Tools tab to use the last option Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 359 of 389 A
6. Only one boundary file can be selected as the current boundary set and this has the following effects The boundary set s hierarchy and light bulb display switches are made available for modification The boundary set becomes the subject of the Calculation amp thematic tab see below When the snap to feature is used during boundary outline editing then only the current boundary set is considered for snapping to see below ANS TIP The Current Boundary Set and the relevant light bulb panel changes automatically as you click on any of its items in the boundary tree structure Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 254 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 3 2 Hierarchy and Display Switches Light Bulbs This second panel down shows the OVERRIDE settings for the current boundary set and serves two purposes 1991 Census Boundaries _ Display V Outline Fill Stats Name Area County Cc 10 218 5 OL O 0 MS C1A1S 2185 0 Ae auni t 8 non font Oe etal Nude 1 The hierarchy levels and their names are displayed in the left hand column and these may be created edited and deleted 2 The remaining portion of the grid is dedicated to the display switches and override values Use the Light bulb icons to switch on off all first bulb or elements other bulbs of each level a J g Use the left click to toggle the display switches on off and to ch
7. e Hover over the word New then click on Boundary beneath current group and a new Boundary Outline will be created in the Tree Structure as follows The Right Icon of a group indicates that this is a group i e able to have lower levels and will have two red dots to indicate whether it has lower levels or not and also a blue dot to indicate that it may have an Outline The Right Icon of the lowest level of the boundary set if it is an outline is a red filled boundary e g Ward Boundary structure Calculation amp thematic a e 1991 Census Boundaries H E 1996 HA Boundaries Ede New boundary set 1 BP New Top Level group Pia solihull b 1 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 263 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 5 6 The Centroid When a new group and or outline is created the software will display the centroid of the group and or outline in the centre of the screen using the following image EH e This symbol can be moved by dragging and dropping it to any location on the map It could even be outside of the boundary line if appropriate to the map you want to create 5 Create Boundary Outline Draw e Right click on the Group Outline for which you wish to draw a boundary and the pop up window will appear Hilfe 1991 Census Boundaries lL fef 1996 HA Boundaries n PiE Trent ef 9 Anglia and Oxford E Piga West Midlands PAE
8. incident Number Addresasl E N Fisk Specal Call l ime CallDate D nt Aros Code amp Dose Easting amp Northing Select items for export Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 183 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 9 Printing from other parts of TSM Prints are also available from e The Print Tab e Activity List Window in the Activity Tab e Comparison Figures table in the Compare Tab Each of these tools enables instant access to printed material without the need to configure the print file Click on any of these buttons and Active will send a default page layout to print Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 184 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 Step By Step Frequently Used Functions 2 1 Copy and paste into MS PowerPoint e Right click on the map e Select the Copy option e Open a PowerPoint presentation e Right click and paste the map into a slide e Click on the image to activate the re sizing frame e Click and drag the corner of the map to resize it to fit the slide without distorting the image 2 2 Create a CSV file and re import a sub set of the original data e Run and activity query on some specific items from one or more fields e Click Execute e Click the pencil at the top of the toolbox to draw these records as dots on the map e Goto
9. No Data is available on the Activity toolbox and so no Data is displayed on the map No Show Data card is displayed on the Compare toolbox and so no data is being displayed on the map No Data is available on the Activity toolbox and so no Data is displayed on the map No Show Data card is displayed on the Compare toolbox and so no data is being displayed on the map No Base Data card is displayed on the Compare toolbox or the base data is for census data No Data is available on the Data toolbox and so no Data is displayed on the map No Show Data card is displayed on the Compare toolbox and so no data is being displayed on the map No Base Data card is displayed on the Compare toolbox 1 6 MS Excel Export www activeinformatics com Page 180 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato This feature allows you to export data to MS Excel Version 5 or later 1 6 1 Options To display the options which can be exported click on the Print Tab button and then click on the Excel Export button the following window will be displayed Items to export Activity fst l Compare table Select fields to export cute i In order to export data you must either e Display some Activity dots on the Map or e Open a Census table e Compare dot data or Census Data in the Compare Toolbox If the Activity List is selected then the drop down window
10. Statistics Mode i Statistical banding Show over Base Lower 0 0 00 Show counts only C Interval 113 Defaults Chiadina C vla Upper 79 1 79 2 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 229 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 biaia dake 12 7 Statistical Banding The statistical banding panel shows from and to range values seven or eight bands by default with a colour for each band This is the key to the thematic map setting out the range of values which each colour represents 12 7 1 Increase the Number of Bands Statistical banding Lower 0 1 Interval 144 Upper 21S 2116 UM o am hH to 2819r am Esz to 4229r Lal 3 to 5639r am b64 to 7049r E am F05 to 8459r a B46 to 9869r al Iba to 1127 9 am f128 to 1268 9 __ Aol H269 to 1409 9r_ Mi f410 to 1550 9r_ _ fal H551 to 1691 9r___ 13l he92 to 1832 9 _ 1al Mhea to 1973 9 _ sl h74 to 2114 9 Hel e115 and over e To increase the number of bands thereby decreasing the interval and changing the from and to value of each band click any of the numbers in squares down the left hand side 1 to 16 e Click the yellow redraw pencil to refresh the display e Similarly to decrease the number of bands click on a lower number and redraw to refresh the display 12 7 2 Turn the Histogram On or Off e Click on the white bars to t
11. 2 4 Stage 4 Selecting Search Fields Select a combination of up to 16 List L fields and up to 16 Range R fields in order to perform searches on the database There is room for up to 27 fields to appear on the Graphical Query Writer if you use the Wizard to build it Click Select All if you need every search field Alternatively hold down the CTRL key and click a field to deselect it In the example below we have deselected the IncidentNumber field because we don t need to look for individual records but larger patterns and trends in bigger groups of records instead Click Next Database Design Wizard Stage 4 Select Fields to Include on Query Writer max of 27 fields allowed L List amp R Range 01 R IncidentNumber 02 L IncidentType 03 L IncidentDescription 04 R CallDate 05 R Calllime 06 R AssignDate O07 R AssignTime 08 R MobileDate 09 R Mobile Time 10 R VehicleAvailableDate 11 R VehicleAvailable Time 12 L Callsign 13 L Vehicle Type 14 R Response sec 15 L IncidentTypeCode Select All Clear List 14 of 15 lt lt Prev Next gt gt Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 63 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe 2 5 Previewing the Data Finally the program switches to the Database tab and previews the data file in 100 records slices There is no need to select the file again as TSM reme
12. Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 179 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 The Census Data Table Comparison Table and Activity List are not framed when they are written to Word All other items are framed This allows data items to be easily moved around the document and overlapped The keys Site Key Area Key Show Data Key Data Key can be placed on top of the map for instance 1 5 18 Colour By default all tables are coloured On monochrome printers these colours will usually be printed as shades of grey Colouring tables can be switched off by clearing the Use Colour selecting box on the Options tab 1 5 19 Greyed Out Fields This section describes the reasons for fields not being available and therefore greyed out on the dialog box shown above Area Key Census Data Table Site Key Compare Table Activity List Activity Key Show Data Key Activity Criteria Show Data Criteria Base Data Criteria Data Notes Show Data Notes Base Data Notes Areas are not being displayed on the map therefore the Area Groups check box is not selected No Census Data Table has been selected in the Reference Data toolbox No sites are displayed on the map none of the site buttons are pressed No comparison is being made on the Compare toolbox No Data is available on the Activity toolbox and so no Data is displayed on the map
13. Sum of all lowest boundary values e g wards Sum of all lowest group values e g districts All values calculated for all items regardless whether they are displayed or not Only displayed values calculated for displayed items ONLY Single counts only values calculated for the first boundary the dot falls into if there are overlaps Allow multiple counts values calculated for ALL boundaries the dot falls into regardless of overlaps this may result in a dot being counted more than once 6 2 Modify by In all cases the value dot count may be further modified using the modified by options at the bottom of the panel This function allows the value to be scaled as required e g you may wish to multiply Dataset 1 by 100 as part of a percentage calculation like so DATASET1 100 DATASET2 When a single dataset is used for the calculation then the results are displayed at the granularity of the level chosen for that dataset e g Ward lf 2 datasets are used then the lower of the 2 specified levels is used as the answer granularity e g if a calculation is in the form Ward County then the answers are presented at Ward level 6 3 Result Formula Calculations may be performed on either dataset 1 2 or a combination of the two This is controlled by the selection made in the Result Formula box at the bottom left of the toolbox Dataset 1 Dataset 2 When 2 datasets are involved in the calculation then various
14. TIP Ifan Output Area is selected by mistake it will appear to be part of the wrong area To correct this de select it using the single pick tool choose the right locality from Area Definitions then pick the area once more e Continue in this way until all the Catchments have been created e To make sure nothing has been lost accidentally move to the top of the Hierarchy list within the Area Definitions panel and click on All Output Areas to make sure there are no gaps in the area required e f so the output area may be found in the Unused Areas panel at the bottom e If everything is present correct then click on OK button and the definition will be saved with the title Test Area Area Definition Design Area definition name Text Edit Structure of area hierarchy All Output Areas Catchment Output Areas Area definitions Catchment 1 Abbey 47UDFMO0001 Abbey 47UDFMO00 Abbey 47UDFMO003 Abbey 47UDFMO004 Abbey 47UDFMO005 Abbey 47UDFMO006 Unused areas Aggborough and Spennells 4fUGFUO001 Aggborough and Spennells 47UGFU0002 Aggborough and Spennells 47UGFU0D003 Aggborough and Spennells 4fUGFU0004 Aggborough and Spennells 47UGFU0005 Aggborough and Spennells 47UGFU0006 Aggborough and Spennells 47UGFU0007 Aggborough and Spennells 47UGFU0008 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 194 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing
15. Total Solution Mapping User Manual TSM Version 9 3 February 2015 Q Active ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Document Control Confidentiality Statement This document contains information confidential and proprietary to Active Informatics Limited It shall not be disclosed in whole or part by the recipient to any third party or to any employees other than those who have a need to know such information The document shall not be duplicated in part or in whole or used by the recipient for any purpose other than to evaluate Active Informatics Limited s products and services Copyright Notice Copyright 2015 Active Informatics Ltd All rights reserved Registered Address Network House Basing View Basingstoke RG21 4HG Registered in England No 6720040 Revision History 01 04 2013 Ed Rackstraw Initial drafting 29 04 2013 Ed Rackstraw Updates following review 06 06 2013 Marie Mapstone Inclusion of TTB manual 01 02 20145 Marie Mapstone Update version number The versions numbered 1a 1b are draft status and therefore can be changed without formal change control Once a document has been formally approved and issued it is version numbered Issue 1 and subsequent releases will be consecutively numbered following formal change control The version number appears in the header of every page Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 2 of 389
16. When you start up TSM initially and click on the Activity Toolbox it will ask you to select a database to work with see the message below In order to do this ActiveProvider le th N ea Please select a database file first e Click OK this takes you to the Database Toolbox automatically e Select a Database Type from the top tight hand panel e Select a Database from the list of Databases Available bottom panel e Either double click on the file name or click the Activity Toolbox the 3 one from the top the blank Activity Toolbox is displayed below right together with the Graphical Query Writer to its left Bh Active Tone ppm 9135 Rel Aves r 2004 Cenu Worb Semon z IIOL MAISE Sd incidant cipmgram flewinctiDetai smsusIONWARN Tout IND 2 gt S Ee CalClone CallT ime Assiynibaw Assign Tirma mnm My fen bute Blanks M tichente Mank W neiule Blanks W include Blanba a Fram O1oiqet f rien bt oo on l From f DOVOLIT f From 60 90 08 To Ji te Das j SSM ti Bsa Mirinas linbiln ime Veda joh vads totes Attu Voi bed ralnbin T ras W iociusde iant Ml rie tontes Manis F inchuje Pianka S Inctude Banks From AO Frome RE Fre GURNIONT From anaes Te E Jae Te E ns Te E EPA Te DAA Piria 2 MA Fewegprset onl marr Incidunt Type ere love haber ert berme tiptoe sia War j Total Wow Library DIE ale aoc mme From Nn Cheney fire t Fates Marm Goo
17. a oat _ _ SP RE IRIR A SIRIA Hal IE RIRIRIZIRIRIRIRIR zi SS SR FES a r i in ins ieee gt F a in row wl sj me This window is used to display the results of a boundary statistics calculation TIP Click on any column heading to return to the top of the table Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 270 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 6 9 Results Sheet Tools Options are provided above the results sheet to modify the display and to export the data to Excel described below from left to right mu e Bs 1 The first two buttons are used to select whether data is shown for all boundaries are displayed in the table or only those that are switched on EE 2 The second two buttons are used to select whether the source values should be shown in the table with or without the result of any formulas that have been applied 3 The last button far right enables all of the displayed results to be exported to MS Excel if available on your PC K 6 10 Clear Dataset Cards You can clear all Dataset cards meaning that many queries can be used in one session 1 Right Click on the Dataset and click Yes to clear the card Boundary structure Calculation amp thematic Dataset 1 A tivity ircles E Co gt Le an x fall or na gt Yes Mo lt a gt Do you want bo clear this card Confidential ww
18. e To identify this dataset an appropriate title should be given to the Reference Card by right clicking the title to the Card which defaults as Reference Data e This will launch the Card Edit dialog box into which you can type a Title Description and Notes as required e Once the card edit is complete click OK to update the Card title contents The object of visiting the Reference Toolbox is to collect data that will be statistically analysed in the Compare Toolbox although you can establish figures from the spreadsheet for use elsewhere e To enable this once a dataset such as that which has just been achieved is derived from the Census spreadsheets the Reference Card must be dragged and dropped to the card stack in the same way as an Activity Query Card see Chapter 5 Point Map Manipulation e Do this by clicking with the left mouse button on the title of the Reference Card and whilst holding the button down drag this to a card within the Card Stack To continue to collect the Census data needed to achieve the gender age profiling objective make a further selection Census 2011 Output Area statistics Display Counts by All Areas Salm O Selected Areas A over 65s New Library Census 2011 Output Area statistics _ 03 030102 p Clear Set H03 030103 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 209 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TIP If you drag
19. et Awe Eg a Wards Cerne zi amz 14520 A PE PLA me l iZ L Ea bi Hes ay Led pimile eo er Digla Harin Doy F Acimty Pamay rectes W Setfomarts Text MFW a Sere Wanka f Betendery ates Water kenes Rolronca Aves F Mion Ged M Sreete Oihar batare Aree goupa E M 3 EP vis P 7 a j 7 r Tid he ee lhe EE 7 i si A A TALDE D E DS eT TE TY TU i Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 240 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 12 12 Display Statistics Button The Statistics button enables you to create a table from the point data query that has been dragged from the card stack to the show data section of the Comparison tab e Click on the statistics button in the upper border of the compare to reveal the comparison figures table which is a spreadsheet version of the statistical banding Comparison Figures 613 Black Dam 1515 Brighton Hill 1168 Farleigh Wallop 2291 Eempshoti 799 North Waltham 1547 South Ham 1023 Upion Grey 1347 Viahles 1580 Westside T A a h Lee h m 12 13 Copy Comparison Figures Table to Clipboard We ve added a new option to copy the table of comparison figures to clipboard enabling you to paste it into another document easily without any lengthy export routines The comparison figures table has the following columns from left to right Base By This column lists the
20. rE 29 024 kml lei 0000 amit 09055 E nears 0 000 mis pam The Measurement Tools are located in the panel at the top of the Map Toolbox Contained are four tools two buttons and a scroll bar to change the number and radii of Concentric circles and two Distance Indicators 3 2 Concentric Circles based on straight line distances e Clicking the buttons to the right of the values can alter the number of circles upper box value and the distance between them or radii of the circles the lower box value e Click on the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the values of the number of circles or distance between each one The maximum number of circles in each set is 50 and the maximum radii are 10 miles or km between each ring Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 38 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e The measurement can be either km kilometres or mls Miles and is changed by left clicking 3 2 1 Draw Circles e In order to draw a set of circles on the map click on the Draw Circles tool which will stay pressed in and when the cursor is returned to the Map Display The cursor changes to a cross symbol e Position the cursor at a point in the map display that is to be the centre of the concentric circles left click and circles are displayed The Draw Circles tool remains pressed in and the cursor remains as a position cursor allowing mo
21. 140 140 141 142 142 143 143 143 143 144 Page 115 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 1 Data And Display Analysis 1 1 Introduction Active TSM has the ability to plot dot data on the map and to perform comparisons on that data The data used is derived from historical records of events frequently called Activities Almost any source of data can be used the prime requirement being that each Activity record has a locator field which is used to position the data on the map for plotting the dots and to identify the area in which the dot falls for statistical analysis 1 2 Select which dots to display First we need to run a query on some data e Goto the Database Tab e Select a Database Type in the topmost box e Double click a file name in the Databases Available box at the bottom e On the Query Writer that appears make selections from the lists in order to write a specific query e f required set from and to ranges for fields like Date e Go to the Colour By panel at the bottom right of the Query Writer This lists all the Field Names available within the various search boxes above e Select a field name from the Colour box e g Incident Type as per the example below e Click the Execute button below Colour By to run the query Once a query has been executed see chapter 4 the Activity Toolbox s
22. 3 QUICK HELP AND STATUS DISPLAY 53 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 48 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife On clicking the help menu left hand question mark button 4 options become available 1 Help Contents 2 Search for Help On 3 Context Help 4 1 1 Help Contents Selecting this item launches the Active help system starting at the help contents page below This contains clickable hyperlinks so that you can access specific information about the main components of the Total Solution Mapping TSM system tes te Awe men Qrtom tht Danm jds Pey Qha vrup ey ts t Acre Total Sotusion Mepeieg Help Contean Mae Thagh thee bel tonareri the Were Acterty weed ts repeeeert eee ectvdee bria of corre eet popas eee ode scpeaprudts t gt peor petai Hap Heitar pohare ani 90er commols Mie issi sad corimis aalsbie is the man arcos jacbdng si of Pe tocldaees LUI TE Cee ais oy UI SADa MACU b bili Jul shase lect ey Totes tame MASSES DUCT LIERE arrose s uote hexitlary Toststormee ee arciv thet occai apea to See roti of tte man wandra u Geer e coms etre trie pna rene a recent lt ri us Ad ry Seredry windosm and memage bowers The popap theag mri popat bcoss fut se rsemtrres used io Hogias muim pergi fer mew r rresaon 4 Hp N i os OM a bad St SOLS Betty ATAN eG bi lg 2485 sa sib S68 SM ORGS AP AGEL
23. 9 1 23 om Exe 1 2 Screen Resolution The native resolution for Active is 1280x1024 It is also possible to run TSM at lower resolutions e g 1280x768 on widescreen laptops or at higher resolutions on large monitors e g 1900 x 1050 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 20 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato to ifa 1 3 The TSM Interface When TSM opens you will notice several features on the window described in more detail in the accompanying chapters 1 The Map Toolbar top left above the map The Card Stack to save data queries top right The Map Window left The Toolboxes that enable you to import analyse and export data right i Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 21 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 1 4 Toolbox Tabs The Toolbox Tabs such as the Map Tab below include a variety of functions to enable you to import analyse and export your data Detailed explanations are available in the following chapters but for now there follows a brief description of each one 1 Map tab Find places create circles round key sites view key site attributes and add north arrow and scale bar to map 2 Database tab Shows all databases loaded in TSM You MUST select the database before you go to the Activity tab 3 Activity tab Query the data from the database you have just selecte
24. ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato TSM User Guide Part 1 Map Functions TSM USER GUIDE PART 1 MAP FUNCTIONS 3 1 GETTING STARTED 20 1 1 Starting TSM 20 1 2 Screen Resolution 20 1 3 The TSM Interface 21 1 4 Toolbox Tabs 22 2 MAP DISPLAY 23 2 1 Map Toolbar 23 2 2 Vector Layers 24 2 3 Key Sites 25 2 4 Refresh Map Button 25 2 5 Motorway Junctions and Railway Stations 26 2 6 Zoom amp Pan 27 2 7 Labels 29 2 8 Refresh Map 34 2 9 Copy 34 2 10 Sessions 34 2 11 Tools Launch Button 36 2 12 National Grid Layer 36 2 13 Raster Mapping 37 3 MAP TOOLBOX 38 3 1 Measurement Tools 38 3 2 Concentric Circles 38 3 3 Scale 40 3 4 North Point 41 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 3 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 5 Advanced search find 3 6 Datum Position 3 7 Distance Between 2 Points 3 8 Grid Reference Easting Northing 3 9 Longitude Latitude 3 10 Key Site Database Display 4 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 4 1 Zoom 4 2 Pan 4 3 Label Street 4 4 Vector Layers 4 5 Raster Maps 4 6 Search Facility FIND TSM USER GUIDE PART 2 ONLINE HELP 1 HELP MENU 1 1 Help Contents 1 2 Search for Help on 1 3 Context Help 1 4 About 2 CONTEXT SENSITIVE HELP 3 QUICK HELP AND STATUS DISPLAY TSM USER GUIDE PART 3 DB DESIGN 1 DB DESIGN TOOLBOX 1 1 Designing Databases 1 2 How should the data be formatted 1 3 Data Clean
25. In this example below we have sorted the layers in descending order option 6 so that the item with the highest number of records UwFS FADA is represented by the red dots These will be drawn first on the map and other smaller clusters of dots yellow then green etc that represent the less popular items will be drawn subsequently mr Sizing me Fixed Standard HE Poly Total Activity by c program 15791848 UwF S FADA 12638003 FDR1 Fire 936208 Secondary Fire 53352x Spec Serv Emergency 36992x False Alarm Good Intent 32290 False Alarm Malicious 20430x Overborder Attended 3398 Chimney Fire 1184 Spate Civil Disturb Condt Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 109 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 3 Keeping Dot Colours Static You may need to keep the dot colours connected to the descriptions even after sorting if they represent something specific e g when using emergency classification colours red amber green etc or depicting lifestyle data and you wish to match the dot colours to the official lifestyle classification colours e Todo this right click on any of the item descriptions e Select option Keep Colour with Description This setting will keep the dot colours in the same order from top to bottom regardless of the sort order of the descriptions In the example in the first image below below the red dot has been configured to
26. JAR Jom to prois f oinin next AA Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 104 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 5 Editing band values There are several ways to expand or combine the bands to suit your requirements by using the tools above the bands themselves e Join to previous adds the highlighted band to the one before e Join to next adds the highlighted band to the next one e Split into two divides the band in half e Default bands sets the banding back to the starting values before editing took place e You can also alter Date Month and Time bands to create specific from and to values using the up down switches as per the example below similar to the buttons on the range boxes on the Query Writer e _Inall cases click OK before executing the query e The example below will result in nine bands each covering six months of each year plus a separate band for blank dates in the data Current Band Jointonext Split into two ie a rs lt i jajjaj Default bands si 12004 S060 mMer mie 01 07 2001 31 12 2001 01 01 2002 30 06 2002 04 07 2002 31 12 2002 01 01 2003 30 06 2003 01 07 2003 31 12 2003 01 01 2004 30 06 2004 01 07 2004 31 12 2004 No Data of bands max 64 4 OK Cancel N B If a date field is filtered by day of week say only activity for Mon Tues amp Wed and the banding is pe
27. Lower and Upper Values 231 2 8 Turning Bands Off And On 232 2 9 Clear Show and Base Data Cards 232 2 10 Map Colours 232 2 10 1 User defined Colour Schemes 233 2 10 2 Use first N Colours 234 2 10 3 Invert Map Colours Button 234 2 11 Education Mapping 235 2 11 1 Penetration maps 235 2 11 2 Market Share Maps 237 2 11 3 Targeting Learners 238 2 12 Display Statistics Button 241 2 13 Copy Comparison Figures Table to Clipboard 241 3 AUTO GRID 242 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 219 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 1 Creating a Hotspot Map with Auto grid 242 4 CONTINUOUS SURFACE MAPPING 244 4 1 Creating a Hotspot Map with CSM 244 4 2 How CSM Works 245 4 2 1 The Method 245 4 2 2 Setting the Bandwidth 245 4 2 3 Band Interval uses Mean Cell Value 246 4 2 4 Editing the Statistical Bands 246 4 2 5 Increase the Number of Bands 246 4 2 6 Changing the Interval Lower and Upper Values 247 5 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 248 5 1 Setting stats band values 248 5 2 Percentage comparisons 248 5 3 Hot spots Continuous Surface Mapping 248 5 4 Working out Population Density 249 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 220 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto si Introduction The Compare toolbox enables you to count data into areas such as Census Wards It also allows comparison between any two sets of data that have previously been saved on the card stack in orde
28. M Naa Ord Streets Ohe hiye O Anes orice Database Designa Wizard Stage 3 Set Field Definitions za f gt gt Page ioti File Field Dris Type Tew Sample D Mon Tate ra Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 68 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato e Stage 4 Select the fields that you want to load into the system e Click on Next and TSM moves to the Database Tab automatically e Click on Generate e Select the geography level to load at if unsure do both e Status Good Number of records loaded into TSM e Status Bad You will always have one bad record your row headings anymore and you need to check the data e Status Unknown Locators Records that can t be loaded into TSM either incorrect postcode or not in your map area lt erngiece Bera AO enna WARD Prete Crewe Go crate he sea Cetwbete Apgeret bi eee date Current reserd Caveat asi gata VUsineen Leeann Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 69 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 3 Database Import 3 1 Importing Data after Using the Wizard e Click the Generate button to start the import process e A pop up appears asking you to select the geography relevant to your data This function tags each record automatically with a Ward code Output Area OA Super Output Are
29. Northing for each record Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 182 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 1 7 Export to CSV File The option to export data to CSV file enables you to export more than 65 536 records in CSV format for analysis in MS Access for example When you select this export option a pop up appears enabling you to select e Activity list fields leave blank to export all fields see section 1 6 1 above e Reference Area Code and Description see section 1 6 2 above e Geographic Locators see section 1 6 3 above Items to export mi Ssiect fields to export Debvery Postcode Aim Type Sector Sutyect Tier 1 Sector Sutyect Tier 2 Nome Postcode Age Mode OF Attendance LEARNING_AIM Rel Area Code amp Desc Geographic Locators Select items for export 1 8 Export Eastings amp Northings When you export data into Excel or a CSV file you can add the Easting and Northing grid reference of the record as well which is especially useful if you originally used a postcode to plot it on the map A grid reference is a more precise locator than a postcode Whereas a postcode positions a property to within 100 metres of the first property in the range a grid reference positions data on a specific point E mport to Meceosott E acel Items te export CT Compare table f Cane table Allari Select lields to export C Selecteit arans
30. Parte ie peteta 04 2003 14 iS 4 13 08 2002 14 se y A sy wai j a S rd 5 A hen idl 01 2 P2002 2 7002 ih38 Bt 2002 ca 32 dbs ies purp as ty 42 5161 200 71 18 41 0452 2002 71 04 35 Qa 7 uo 2 officer Paoro ADO satu inhore Re TORT tear AD ficer Sery Emergency Sery teergency Sere Leer cers eA paieti e4 ec Serv Geergerxy HBO 21 34 Qi siZ tee 2y 7734022 false Alarm Good intent Ery 390933 02 2 10 354012 Falce Alira Good Iment 376234 19003 02 10 2ee1 20 45 i 02 30 2001 20 14 57 0 3008 120 15 59 og 10 3001 20 22 08 Sats Serv Emergency i5520 192287 24 2002 16 08 18 258 m 7002 16 14 9 is 2002 28 01 2002 SRA Sery Emergency 305528 393287 28 POO2 16 06118 26 01 eat 4 10 37 2002 286 03 2002 34 otticer Siw serv teer gonty 382152 347864 O3 02 D001 03 36 39 03 nyt 2001 03 38 2008 03 40 37 03 02 2001 03 44 oo 515 Serv Erergernty 391153 18788 01 J001 03 36 2001 O M 2005 01 40 49 0 faa fl oO oa 37 5853 Sery Erergercy 9384653 391236 03 POOL 10 44 2 2001 10 52 2001 10759 33 03 02 sery crergeny 993996 385741 05 Jt 08 78 2001 08 32 2008 O8 37 5 05 02 Sey brer gerk 995056 145741 04 Poet 06 76 a2 2001 Oki 71 O2 2005 06533 03 045 n27 ol J 234 60 22 tr s6 23 34 48 32 117 36 2 747 23 04 24 23 04 oa 2002 2007 2002 3 014 1 04 304
31. Upon selecting this option a disclaimer appears stating that This function finds the nearest Postcode Centroid This is because Active uses Ordnance Survey Codepoint postcode locations that centre postcodes on groups of housing rather than on specific properties so labels and postcode located data may appear relative to the range of properties e g 250 to 279 Abbey Road for a particular postcode not a particular street address If you click OK the label is created with default properties white background black text Arial font bold size 8 The label pin joins the map where the postcode centroid is located Locating postcodes accurately can assist when plotting Key Sites and Dot data Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 33 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 2 8 Refresh Map When you right click any part of the map and select the Refresh Map option this carries out effectively the same procedure as the Refresh Map Button see above 2 9 Copy When you right click any part of the map and select the Copy option this places exactly what can be seen on the map at that time onto the clipboard ready to be pasted into any other Microsoft package e g Word or PowerPoint 2 10Sessions You can change sessions by double clicking on an existing session name in the list e To create a new session name double click the item lt new gt and type
32. csv X Browse Folders N B To use the file within ACTIVE TSM use the DB Design Wizard See Chapter 3 to create a database design and import the newly matched data 3 10 Viewing the Reject File If records have been rejected the program gives you the opportunity to view a TXT file containing these records e If you answer Yes the program opens the TXT file in Notepad e f you answer No the program closes and returns to TSM Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 353 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Travel Time Boundaries ACTIVE bringing Goto Contents TSM USER GUIDE TRAVEL TIME BOUNDARIES 1 INTRODUCTION 2 MAP DETAIL PANEL 2 1 Features 2 2 County and District Borders 2 3 Importing Boundaries 2 4 Isochrones 2 5 Key Sites 2 6 Pins 2 7 Manipulating the Map 2 8 Distances Points 3 MAP FEATURES 3 1 Road Properties 3 2 Point Properties 3 2 1 Add A Point 3 3 Road Filter 3 4 Road Selection 4 SESSIONS 5 DRIVETIME RULES 5 1 Core road speed files 5 2 Variance files 5 3 Override rules 6 DRIVETIME TOOLS Confidential www activeinformatics com 354 356 357 357 357 358 359 359 360 360 360 361 361 362 362 364 364 365 366 367 370 373 375 Page 354 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual bringing Goto February 2015 6 1 Drivetime Tools Panel 375 6 2 New Isochrone
33. programs are resident in C Program Files Active folder on your PC Active Configuration Change the map colours place names and postcodes to suit your needs Active Alias Convert numerical codes into text descriptions Active Indices Generate tables of information for use with census comparison Active Key Sites Create unique map symbols for use with Key Site databases Active Data Config Allows you to prepare a file for input into the system Active Address Generator Enables you to create a list of street addresses from postcodes Active Lifestyle Match Allows you to match your data with lifestyle characteristics 2 12 National Grid Layer The National Grid map layer can be displayed as grid lines on the map denoting 100 kilometre grid squares or tiles e Click on the National Grid layer above the map under Activity and Statistics e Redraw the map the pencil button e The National Grid lines are now displayed on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 36 of 389 o Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to 2 13 Raster Mapping Ordnance Survey OS Raster files make the maps more detailed and can be displayed in colour or greyscale on their own or in combination with the traditional Vector mapping see above e Click the Raster radio button to display the raster map see examples below e Zoom in closer to see more detail e Switch o
34. tules in rule set Motorways A roads B roads minor Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 367 of 389 ACTIVE bein gang doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Enter a name for this rule in the rule properties panel e g Motorways rule properties adjustment type absolute speed adjustment value T mph used by ts rk a ee ee e Select the adjustment type by left clicking the value and drag the mouse up or down It can be one of four items impassable absolute speed decrease increase ee e To set the adjustment value if required for absolute speed decrease or increase left click the value and drag the mouse up or down N B Impassable requires no adjustment because it simulates closing roads Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 368 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Now click on the File Save button to save the changes made N B If the File Save button is not clicked and another file option is selected the following message is displayed as a warning ACTIVE Journeyman E4 This action will cause the loss of your curent edits Press OK to continue and lose the edits Press Cancel to abort the current operation By clicking on OK all the edits to this file will be lost By clicking Cancel the operation is abandoned allowing the edits to be saved before moving
35. 03 2002 412996 24 03 2002 4176 24 03 2002 412996 24 03 2002 412996 24 03 2002 aire 24 03 2002 412996 24 03 2002 998427 13 08 2002 398427 15 04 2002 398520 23 04 2002 995520 23 04 2002 398520 23 04 2002 398520 23 04 2002 398520 23 04 2002 398520 23 04 2002 3035 02 10 2001 390833 02 10 2005 293287 28 01 2002 998287 28 03 2002 387884 03 02 2001 387886 03 02 2001 991236 03 02 2001 385741 05 02 2005 1003 07 1003 07 1003 07 1003 07 10 03 07 1441p 1344 00 21 34 47 23 2447 21 1447 z1 34 47 214447 zL14 47 13 88 2023 33 1608 15 1608 18 0336 39 0330 39 1044 57 0828 23 04 01 2001 22 01 2001 22 04 2003 30 05 2003 30 05 2003 35 05 2003 20 07 2001 27 07 2001 27 07 2001 27 07 2001 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 24 08 2002 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 24 08 2002 24 03 2002 13 0a 2002 13 04 2002 23 04 2002 2304 2002 23 04 2002 23 04 2002 23 04 2002 23 04 2002 02 20 2001 02 20 2001 25 01 2002 78 01 2002 03 02 2001 03 02 2001 03 02 2001 05 02 2001 14 24 30 16 23 19 1957 14 12 34 32 12 30 23 1211 32 20 17 05 2371 30 2521 30 23 71 30 1004 37 1008 21 1908 21 1004 21 1098 21 1029 20 1009 41 1090 21 1345 30 1405 54 21 23 55 2141 01 21 34 40 21 17 38 214 48 21 17 58 20 14 57 20 14 57 10 14 03 1620 37 03 38 44 03 38 34 10 52 50 08 32 00 oa 01 2001 22 01 2003 23 08 2003 90 05 2003 30 05 2003 30 05 2003 20 07 2003 27 07 2001 27 07 2001 27 07 2003 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 24 03 2
36. 11 DISTANCES GENERATOR 12 EXPORT TRAVEL TIME BOUNDARIES 12 1 Export To A New Boundary Set 12 2 Export to An Existing Boundary Set 13 ROAD SPEED GUIDE 14 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 14 1 First Set Up a Closed Road Rule 14 2 Next Set Up the Parameters 14 3 Then Build the Isochrones 14 4 Finally Export the Travel Time Boundaries Into TSM Confidential www activeinformatics com bringing Goto 366 367 370 373 375 375 376 377 378 379 380 380 382 382 382 383 385 386 386 387 388 388 388 388 388 Page 19 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 1 Getting Started 1 1 Starting TSM To start the program e Double click the Active TSM Desktop icon or double click on Provider exe in Windows Explorer e Click OK to select the default geography option 2001 Census Wards e Select No when prompted to open the default session see section 2 1 below Older systems map have 2001 Census OAs as an alternative slightly more detailed geography so choose this instead ACTIVE Total Solution TSM total solution mapping ww BCIvesal Co Uk Please select the Reference Area Set for the system to use oot Consus Wards 5 Note that certain aspects of the system e g Sessions imported Data Reference Data amp Libraries and Area Groups will be specific to the selected Reference Area Set Version
37. 12 1 Turning boundaries on off e Go to the Boundary tab e Right click in the Boundary Structure tab e Select Load Boundaries e Click a boundary set from the pop up list e Click Load then OK e Right click on the Boundary Set name in Boundary Structure e Select Set all below On e Redraw the map e Click the left hand box next to the Boundary Set name in Boundary Structure to toggle the whole set on off three red dots will appear e Click the left hand box next to each boundary item in the Boundary Structure to grey out and turn off an individual boundary e g Ward e Click the left hand box next to a Ward once more to turn it back on a blue dot will appear e Alternatively click the left hand box next to a District or County 3 times to turn it back on a blue dot and three red dots will appear 12 2 Export data through boundaries e Run an Activity query e Click the pencil to draw the records as dots on the map e Go to the Boundary tab e Right click in the Boundary Structure tab e Select Load Boundaries e Click a boundary set from the pop up list e Click Load then OK e Right click on the Boundary Set name in Boundary Structure e Turn off the light bulbs for all but the level you wish to tag your data with e g just leave Ward bulbs on e Select option Export Activity Data e A spreadsheet will be created typically in the Census20010OA folder named after the boundary set and also date and ti
38. 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato e Stage 2 Select the Name field for labelling purposes which is mandatory and any address fields below middle It is possible to combine 2 of these into one line if necessary e g Town and County Click Next Key Site Import Wizard Stage 20f5 Select Key Site Name and Address Fields Name iStation Address Line 1 Streat Address Line District Address Line J i ITovwn Address Line 4 County Please note is possible fo combine 2 fields of data into one tmabase beki if required mandatory Sek lt lt Prev Next gt gt e Stage 3 Select the Locator fields e g Postcode or Easting and Northing below right Click Next Key Site import Wizard Stage 3 of 5 Select Locator Field s Postcode Easting Northing Easting E asting Northing Northing lt lt Prev Next gt gt Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 150 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato e Stage 4 Select any user defined fields below left to represent additional data auxiliary fields Click Next Key Site import Wizard Stage 40f5 Select User Defined Fields Field Legend Caption Hays Bays EvostingPumps E xishngPurnges Crewarg z zi z z z a HH lt lt Prey Next gt gt e Stage 5 Type a name for the Key Site Database
39. 90 cn From F lof paa Tl hope a Le et Ae erie oo Ma Poly Tootsi Wew Lib 4 sesteesser Sexesaus s a l EESGESEEEE SC Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 83 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 6 Importing Data Manually Once the database and query template has been designed using the wizard the data can be imported manually You can also import files independently of the wizard process like so e Click on the Database tab e Click on the appropriate Database Type e Click the white Create New File button in the top right corner to turn it on Database Types AA AAD Business data AB ABD ILR Data PC PCD Postcodes PS PSD Postcodes SSU AC ACD Training Database Databases Available lcAp rogram files act D ata Census 2001 WARD Press Select to choose the CSV or TXT file containing the data you wish to import Highlight the file name in the Windows Explorer pop up Click the Open button preview the records if required as detailed in section 2 5 Click the Generate button to begin the import process as detailed in section 3 1 Click OK to import the data Click the white Create New File button again in the top right corner to turn it OFF Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 84 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 7 Step by Step freque
40. AND DISPLAY ANALYSIS 1 1 Introduction 1 2 Select which dots to display Confidential www activeinformatics com bringing Goto 96 96 97 99 100 100 102 102 102 105 106 106 107 108 108 109 110 111 112 112 112 113 114 116 116 116 Page 7 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 1 3 Remove all dots 117 1 4 Show all dots 117 1 5 Toggle the dot map on or off 117 2 SAVE QUERIES 118 2 1 Edit query card details 118 2 2 Save queries to the card stack 118 2 3 Delete query cards 119 2 4 Save queries to the database library 120 2 5 Retrieve a query from the database library 120 2 6 Delete a query from the database library 121 3 DOT SIZE AND SORTING 122 3 1 Why change the dot size 122 3 2 Fixed Standard Size 122 3 3 Size by Geo group 123 3 4 Label record counts 124 3 5 Size by value 125 4 DATA QUERY TIPS 126 4 1 Fire Data Queries 126 4 2 Education Data Queries 130 5 MERGE DOT MAPS 134 5 1 Saving the dot image 134 5 2 Merging the dot image 134 6 SELECTING DATA 137 6 1 Irregular polygon 137 6 2 Inverting a Polygon 138 6 3 Naming the polygon 138 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 8 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 6 4 Create a sub set of the original data 6 5 Removing the polygon from the map 6 6 Display a saved polygon 6 7 Delete a polygon 7 ACTIVITY RECORD LIST 7 1 Copy activity record list to c
41. Attended 93620 Secondary Fire 118451 Spate Civil Disturb Condt 533524 Spec Serv Emergency 1579180x UwF S FADA Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 The Total value represents the total number of records within the database that match the criteria of the query 2 Numbers for each list item denote the number of records in the query that match that item 3 The coloured dots have been allocated by the software to each list item to apply a colour theme and will be reproduced on the map 4 The check boxes indicate which items are to be displayed on the map and can be turned on and off as required by left clicking 5 The descriptions represent the list items from the Field Names by which the query answer is given TIP The dot colours can be changed using ACTIVE Colour Configuration tool but you must execute the query again in order to apply the colour changes Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 108 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 4 2 Changing the Order of Entries It is possible to change the order of entries and therefore the dot colours they represent by right clicking any item in the list then select the appropriate option listed below The options available are Move Layer Up Move Layer Down Move Layer To Top Move Layer To Bottom Sort Layers Ascending Sort Layers Descending Sort Layers A Z Sort Layers Z A a ee
42. Cleansing Occasionally data exported from MIS systems can contain missing or extra cells that can result in some records being rejected when you import them into TSM Cleansing the data to remove missing or extra cells is quick and easy to do in MS Excel prior to importing the file The example below shows how to replace blanks with a space Open up the CSV file in Excel Highlight the whole file by left clicking on the grey cell top left On the Edit menu click Replace or hit the CTRL H keys simultaneously on the keyboard Leave Find what blank In Replace with type a space Click Replace All Click Close pissin E li Find Replace Find what Replace with Options gt gt Replace All Replace Find All Close SSS SE e Highlight a few consecutive blank columns beyond the data in the CSV file by dragging and dropping then click Delete to remove these columns which may contain extra spaces e Highlight a few consecutive blank rows under the data and delete them too e Save and close the CSV file before importing it into TSM via the wizard on DB Design see below Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 59 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 Database Design Wizard The Database Design Wizard helps you build activity databases quickly from scratch This will enable you to not only check the integrit
43. Ea veer T nationa Gid T Eveni T Other features SE Aros groupe Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 201 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 Districts and Wards Area Group When you load the system and select 2001 Reference OAs output areas the list of Area Groups includes LADs sometimes called DISTRICTS AND WARDS This area group enables you to count both Reference and activity data into districts wards and output areas 40 to 100 households each using the Compare function When you switch on the Reference Areas layer and zoom in below 1km the Output Area OA name is displayed accompanied by the name of the Reference Ward in which it is located and therefore more identifiable Text Fill Reference Areas N B To see this you need to load ACTIVE with the 2001 Reference OAs reference area option when you start the program Romford Town DARGROOI itytarrcs OOAMGMIOODS Hytarics OOAM GOCE Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 202 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 6 Step By Step Frequently Used Functions 6 1 How to create an area group e Load the CATCHMENT Boundaries and Switch on their Outlines amp Name light bulbs to help you with this exercise Go to the Areas tab and switch on the Generic Definition area group Click on the Area D
44. HH eE Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 373 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto To create a new Override rules file do the following e Click on the new file button e Now enter a name in the file properties panel with comments if appropriate The File Save button now becomes active and it is possible to save this file e Click on the new rule sets button in the Rule sets panel N B SWITCH OFF THE CHECK BOXES FOR DATE DAY AND TIME SPECIFIC e Enter a name for this rule in the rule set properties panel e g Roadworks on A61 as in the example above e Set the dates days of the week and time of each day that this rule will affect by entering a tick in the appropriate box Set the times by clicking on the box and holding the mouse button down then drag it up or down to increase or decrease the value e Now click on the add a new rule button e Enter a name for this rule in the rule properties panel e Select the adjustment type by left clicking the value and drag the mouse up or down It can be one of four items 1 impassable 2 absolute speed 3 decrease 4 increase e To set the adjustment value if required for absolute speed decrease or increase left click the value and drag the mouse up or down e Now click on the File Save button to save the changes made Confidential www activeinformatics c
45. Id Fill in the rest of the boxes as follows e Import width This must be set to O zero see above e Field Id E is displayed automatically but can be overwritten if required e Full name Easting is displayed automatically but can be overwritten if required e Click OK to save the field definition and input the Northings field type Please Note You must specify BOTH Eastings and Northings as field definitions if your locator is this type in the file you are importing Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 78 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 7 Date Fields Date fields can be represented by a variety of formats to match what is in your data Click the New button to the right of the field definitions check box If you select the appropriate date format from the pick list e g dd mm yyyy the following will then be displayed Field Definition Field Type dd mmiyyyy Import width Field Id Full name Call Date Fill in the rest of the boxes as follows e Import width This must be set to 0 zero see above e Field Id e g AC e Fullname e g Call date e Click OK to save the field definition and continue 4 8 Time fields Time fields can also be represented by a variety of formats to match what is in your data Click the New button to the right of the field definitions check box If
46. Importing Data into Tables Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 To import a TXT file containing a table of codes and descriptions like the example below Code Description 301 gastroenterology 361 nephrology 370 oncology 800 radiotherapy e Create a TXT file as above with column headings Code and Description and the data underneath e Click Add next to Table and type in a name in the box that appears underneath e Click Update Database below Table Manipulation cee et U pdate C i Database ie e Click on the new table in the list above left to highlight it e Click Import Table Maniputabon Tabe as Delete Code Eda Delete brport Update Canca Dstshease e Select the TXT file e Click Update database The table is ready to use for converting data see example below gastroenterology nephrology oncology radiotherapy Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 317 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 2 2 Creating Tables Manually These commands enable you to create and edit conversion tables If there is no table selected from the Table List panel then only the Table Add button will be enabled allowing a new table to be added to the database manually If a table is highlighted then all the other commands will be enabled N B When a command is selected the Update Database and C
47. Northing The records will include all buildings as well as plots of land that may also have a UPRN associated with them e First open the Wizard NLPGadmin exe and click NEXT TSM total solution mapping This utility program allows a NLPG in CSV format to be imported mi the ACTIVE NLPG database ETTE ae Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 331 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Q ACTIVE bringing dato to fe e Click Select File browse to find the CSV file containing the NLPG data and click Open The number of records to be processed will be displayed Then click NEXT Please select the data file containing the NLPG data to process lt Previous We e Click Process to extract the records from the CSV file Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 332 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to ifa e When finished the import wizard will say Processing completed Click EXIT to finish Processing completed e Finally the import wizard will ask you if you want to import another file Click YES of you wish to do so or click NO to exit the program Do you want to process another file w Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 333 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 Using the UPRN as a Locator in TSM Once the NLPG table h
48. Ose cw OSALO 34 12 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 322 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to Ifa Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 3 Field Selection To select a field to be converted e Click on the field name within the Fields in File panel top left e Drag and drop the field down to the Selection Fields panel below 1r Tables AdmessionMethodCodes Ext Sex ee TSM Ea test p total solution mapping Table Manipulation ae Ant tte fe Je i A B Ea Quick Help Resis oicomesnSSSSS Program Status Diag Feld and T able Names hom bats to Selection boxes Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 323 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ie 3 4 Table Selection To select a table in order to convert the data field selected in the previous step e Click the table name within the Tables panel top second left e Drag and drop the table down to the Selection Tables panel below bottom panel second left Tables TSM Be Help teat total solution mapping Cot tad EN One trio Code Quick Help Renco SCST 3 XEHTC lt CS Program Status Ekk CONVERT to create ren convened ie Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 324 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 5 Con
49. Select the Filter type from the drop down list at the top e g Text Comparison e Select the function from the drop down list top left e g The options are 1 Greater than gt 2 Greater or equal to gt 3 Equals 4 Less than or equal to lt 5 Less than lt 6 Not equal to lt gt e Inthe box next to the function under the filter type key in the Comparison value e g HU e N B You can use wildcard characters such as asterisk and question marks to apply a more general filter In this example we are looking for all key sites in the postcode area HU therefore only key sites with postcodes that start HU will be displayed e Click Test amp set on the right This displays the expression next to the field we are filtering e g Locator HU e Click OK to save the filter then left click the Key Site button again to redraw the map Field filters OK Filter type Text comparison Ca nce HU Clear all Pd Pd Pd Pd Pe Z HU lear O O Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 162 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 2 Disable a filter To disable filtering temporarily e Right click on a Key Site symbol button above the map e Select Disable site filter e Left click the Key Site button again to redraw the map and reveal all the Key Site symbols 5 3 Clear a filter To clear
50. Set Panel parameters 376 6 3 Creating Isochrones 377 6 4 Set Isochrones Times 378 6 5 Placing a Pin in the Map 379 6 6 Generating Isochrones Manually 380 6 7 Generating Isochrones Automatically Using Key Sites 380 7 DRIVETIME TRACKBACK 382 7 1 Selected pin 382 7 2 Mouse click 382 8 DISTANCES GENERATOR 383 9 EXPORT TRAVEL TIME BOUNDARIES 385 9 1 Export To A New Boundary Set 386 9 2 Export to An Existing Boundary Set 386 10 ROAD SPEED GUIDE 387 11 DRIVETIME RULE SCREEN GRABS ERROR BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED 12 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 388 12 1 First Set Up a Closed Road Rule 388 12 2 Next Set Up the Parameters 388 12 3 Then Build the Isochrones 388 12 4 Finally Export the Travel Time Boundaries Into TSM 388 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 355 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 introduction Understanding the capability of a person to travel by whatever means and between any start and end point is critical to developing and planning any business or service You can either analyse from an origin based approach how many people can and cannot get to this location conveniently or a destination based approach how many people can I reach in a given time from a fixed location Travel Time Boundaries has been developed by ACTIVE in conjunction with partners in the public and private sector to enable accurate and innovative studies of the t
51. Show Data specific activities is a proportion of Base Data Total activities 12 1 Base Data card The Base Data card generally contains the total by which the Show Data is divided and the percentage is calculated for each area e g Ward For example if the Show Data value for a particular ward is 3 and the Base Data value is 4 the percentage will be 75 i e 3 4 75 12 2 Base Area Setting The Base area is set to the lowest smallest level of the hierarchy e g Ward by default but can be adjusted using the pick list to the right Setting this value tells TSM to calculate statistics for a particular type of geography For example if you set this to Wards the data in Show Data for a single ward will be divided by the Total for that ward from the Base Data Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 224 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 12 3 Show over base Mode Statistics Mode Statistical banding Show over Base Lower 0 00 0 00 Show counts only C Interval 6 66 Shading Style Upper 99 90 100 00 O Shades of one colour Lil o o to 6 659r al 6 66 to 13 3191 f Shade from white ta al 13 32 to 19 9791 Colour Eo ec E LE r F Shaded to black all 183 30 to 39 9591 7M 189 96 to 46 619r Colour spectrum al 6 6 to 53 2791 F Vivid shades Lall 53 28 to 59 9391 fol 69 94 to 66 599r Pastel shades Hal
52. TIP The more layers that are switched on the more time the Map Display will need to be redrawn each time the map Refresh button is clicked Work with minimum layers until you need to add extra detail behind your data to put it in context Ideally switch on extra map layers only when you zoom in The Map display can be further developed by the display of the layer containing secondary routes 1 Todo this lick on the Secondary Routes and Streets check boxes to place an X in them and then click the Refresh button the yellow pencil above 2 Individual elements of the road and rail network can be turned on or off by right clicking the Primary or Secondary Routes layers above the map The Street layer can be configured to appear at a specific map zoom To do this simply Right click the word Streets above the map and set a new zoom value e g 10 km Below is a vector map of Basingstoke showing streets with red Local Government Ward outlines displayed on top TIP Right click anywhere on the map and select Refresh map instead to redraw the image Large and Small Urban area Fill can be turned on and off by right clicking the Settlements layer Also individual types of water body or woodland feature can be turned on or off by right clicking the Water or Other features layers above the map Once all the layers have been checked on the Map Display becomes very rich and colourful with considerable detail Confidential www activei
53. Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato TSM User Guide Part 13 Active Configuration Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 297 2 COLOUR CONFIGURATION 298 2 1 Setting Dot Colours 298 2 2 Setting Map Line Colours 299 2 3 Setting Map Fill Colours 300 2 4 Setting Shading Compare Colours 301 3 PLACENAME CONFIGURATION 302 3 1 Adding Placenames 303 3 2 Deleting Placenames 303 4 POSTCODE CONFIGURATION 304 4 1 Adding Postcodes 304 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 296 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 1 Introduction Active Configuration allows the change of Colours e g Dots from Activity Query Map Display Layers and the User Definable Colours of the Compare Toolbox Place names positioning and spelling and Postcode positioning To launch the Active Configuration utility e First click on the Tools button top left of TSM e Select the 1 option Active Config that appears in the panel on the right of TSM ACTIVE Cont Allows the change of Colours e g Point Dots from Activity Query Map Display Layers and the User Definable Colours of the Compare Toolbox Place names positioning and spellings and Postcode positioning e A pop up window then appears offering options to configure TSM colours placenames and postcodes see below ACTIVE Configuration TSM total solution mapping Colour Configuratio
54. Update Lifestyle reference data and click Next Lifestyle Match Petom data date matching Update Litestyle reference date Thes wizard wil maich Lifestyle dota to each record in the Chosett atindly dataset The Aeetyle Guta can siso be upeated e Click the type of Lifestyle data to update either Household or Postcode depending on the data you are importing In this example we are using Household Lifestyle data Select Lifestyle data to update Havsshd ites yie dete T Postcode Ldestyle data This wad wil maich Lifestyle data to each record im the chosen actnty dataset The Lifestye data can also be updated lt lt Previous Next gt gt e Click Next Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 343 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato to le e Click Select File and choose the file you wish to import and then click Open Open Litestyte fre ear a Program Fies HWE Data Name Oste modtes Type QQ IMD 2067 far DCLG 4 deres O Recerthy Changed 4g index of Depeweton agland 2910 RAN i Terem Puce _ Mebineton t ME Orettoy muabdisabons matched TXT IN Coad tosd ct BE 4 Moss W cw ae SS ocak 2M1 Geo Heefonianiorce p a 14 Moss HH 2008 cry Ef frin 4 Mesak HH ALO cw D Publ Pop_est_by_spe_ hin 2004 tet Posteodesf10 O44 bt Pomc oget0ll G33 bt GIA Hereford OC coe A STATIONS cw Fae qe bys 2011 00I Mern
55. User Polygons ch Cs ee sal o e Hover over the word New then click on Create boundary outline e Then move the mouse to the map where it will change to a black cross New Boundary group beneath current Delete Boundary beneath current group Rename Create boundary outline Make user poly N B Be aware that the zoom functions still work at this point and can be used at any time during the process That is when initially selected to create outline Zoom In Zoom Out or Pan may be selected If so right click to turn this off and start drawing the boundary Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 264 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto Please Note When creating a boundary outline or an island for an existing boundary then the outline should be drawn ANTI CLOCKWISE When creating a hole within a boundary it should be created CLOCKWISE This directional creation is to make sure the boundary area is calculated correctly in square hectares e At any point in the process right click and the following window will appear below As can be seen from the window it is possible to Cancel Outline Delete the Previous Point Close Outline finish or set the Alignment Mode e When Cancel Outline is clicked the Outline is deleted after answering YES to the question Are you sure you want to delete the outline e To cancel the last point input click on Previous
56. ahg gr ww HE Y Po TO BAA alt 25358 ETNNAA Sas TESTE Pz Hoe Yeap S000 py rrm ppan Year 2000 covrgkewe ope retatec eases piante peter te the innn marea acion doe below p 3 Lyervarns There se o ee concepts m ACTIVE Tonal Seletion Mapping aa meat thew Gen Sep hopar te prosi a et cow Aiat Geecrptes The doers tapers cove fene corcepts Sty SSeS TIP Our UK Help line is staffed during office hours Mon Fri 9am to 5 30pm GMT Call 44 0 1256 464 749 for assistance North America call 866 883 3375 toll free Email helpdesk activeinformatics com Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 49 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ifa 1 2 Search for Help on Selecting this item launches the standard help search dialogue box middle right enabling you to search for help topics by keyword or phrase Help Topics ActiveProvider Help Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for boundary 2 lick the index entry you want and then click Display Boundanes Toolbox rounder results Calculate statistics Calculation Card Activity Card Area Hectares Card base data Card Reference Card show data Card properties dialog Card stack Census queries Census query library Census table export Census tables Circles Clipboard copy map Display Print Cancel TIP If you press the F1 key at any time the relev
57. an interval but this and the lower and upper values can all be adjusted by left clicking on the boxes and keying in new values then press the Return key on the keyboard atatistical banding Lower 45 7 457 Inierval 0 7 Upper 562 56 1 e Redraw to apply any changes you have made to the map TIP You can select target areas by right clicking on a single colour in the statistical banding This makes it even easier to select multiple areas e g the top most red wards automatically without having to search for them on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 231 of 389 February 2015 bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE 12 8 Turning Bands Off And On Statistical banding Lower O oo Interval 500 Upper pet 12177 Li Gb a999 S EdE Eo al E to 200997 La Eino io 3499 9 ___ Lal _ E500 io 39999 Lalm foon io 44999 Lol E500 io 49999 maji _ E000 io 54999 naM 5500 io 59999 13 M _ 6000 to 64999 Lali 6500 io 69999 us F000 io 74999 el F500 and over It is possible to turn statistical bands off and on manually to display the data you need to see and eliminate that which is not required This means that your maps will be much clearer and easier to understand e Simply check or clear the box or boxes relating to the bands you want to show or remove from the display e Refresh the map to show the changes 12 9 Clear Sho
58. any of the abbreviations so that either Days of Week Month of Year or Time of Day appear click Clear then OK see below e Alternatively click New on the Activity Tab to clear down the whole query if you want to start afresh Filter CallDate _ Date field Jan Feb Select Marl a range of months Apr and or EREE Jun a range of weekdays raat Aug sep Ook Dec TI _ Sun ton Tue Hed Thu Fri Sat From Me Data Mondays To No Data Wednesday TIP To select Saturday and Sunday only click on Saturday and drag the mouse around the top of the grid to select Sunday Similarly to select December and January only select December and drag the mouse around the side of the grid to select January Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 99 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 Colour By 3 1 Applying a Colour Theme It is possible to break down a query into separate list items numbers dates or times If we choose the default and colour by lt none gt the results of the query the total number of records based on the selections we have made on the Query Writer will all be presented as separate red dots on the map In the example below this equates to 503 852 records in total X Poly Total Activity c program 50385200 Activity However if we want to break the query down into categories we can sel
59. area groups in which the base no Is calculated e g all Wards sum of selected wards or individual ward names Base No This column lists the total number of counts for the base data file i e The total population for each base area Show By This lists the area group names in which the show count is calculated Show Count This column lists the count for the show data file i e The total aged over 65 for each area group discreetly set in the display areas by panel top right hand corner of the screen Show This column expresses the show count as a percentage of the Base No To print the comparison figures table click the print button in the top right hand corner of the panel and presupposing there is a correctly configured printer plotter connected to active a text file will be printed Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 241 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto The auto grid checkbox allows you to switch between area mode and grid mode calculations and display In area mode calculations are performed and displayed according to the areas defined by the currenily selected area definition and with reference to the show and base granularity levels Grid mode comparisons completely ignore any area definition and perform calculations on an automatically generated regular grid If the auto grid mode is enabled and results are displayed on the map then if the mouse pointer moves over a non zero cell then the count va
60. arrow will appear Left click and the shape will be completed and filled with cross hatching e Rename the polygon by clicking on the default name e g Loc_02 in the box next to the Irregular Polygon tool e Overtype the name and hit Enter on the keyboard to save it e Click the Activity Record List button left of the binoculars to view the records trapped by the polygon e Click the Activity Record List button again to return to the map e Double click the Irregular Polygon tool to remove the polygon from the display Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 143 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 8 4 Merging activity dot queries Select a range of dates for the last calendar year and press Execute Save this query it in the Card Stack View the new query on the map and size by Geo group Save this query as LastYear aep2 using the Save Activity dot file button top left Select a range of dates for the current calendar year and press Execute Bring back LastYear aep2 using the Merge Activity dot file button and size by Geo Group Redraw the map The current year s data is shown as red dots The merged data LastYear aep2 is displayed as black dots Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 144 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Part 6 Key Sites Contents
61. axl Tobe dhere Ow maune Check ocreeve three araors of mary eeutere ge Qittreted ter chowre wf fw nen opeope ceneble the mru tc he nyt wai barcbed wih s cick oww ae using limi Gta eyaten bas Shes Levee cep the before mers amena where Aite TED hra oth Bb bah Felterery prcdees md mive hiers can be mirad Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 52 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to o Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 Quick Help And Status Display This panel is used for the following purposes 1 When the mouse pointer moves over any window or control that is part of the Active application this panel will display a short help message describing the object beneath the mouse pointer 2 When a time consuming task is in progress for example drawing a polygon around some data this panel displays a message describing what is going Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 53 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 When performing a multi stage map function e g to finish drawing a polygon this panel will display help messages describing the current stage and what to do next Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 54 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto TSM User Guide Part 3 DB Design Contents TSM USER GUIDE PART 3 DB DESIGN 55 1 DB DESIGN TOOLBO
62. can be imported from or exported to flat files TXT or CSV format The files should contain the Name and Postcode or Easting and Northing as a minimum 1 1 Key Sites Toolbox SANN Buttons KS A a a a a Symbol Defined site types Stations 2011 Stations11 GBOAaGQGiacgecgncag Ss 0ee0ee0000 er Ok KKK KK KH eral Be 1 1 1 Key Site Tools The seven buttons at the top of the Toolbox area reading from left to right to help you to 1 Key site type design manually 2 Symbol and button allocation 3 Key sites wizard 4 Edit site databases 5 Import site databases 6 Export site databases 7 Launch symbol design utility 1 2 3 4 9 6 7 Bie Ano ok Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 147 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 1 1 2 Site Display Buttons The second panel below has 10 further key site display buttons which are directly related to the display buttons in the top left corner above the map 1 1 3 List of Defined Key Site Types The next panel down has the list of Defined site types with their accompanying symbol002C in the box to the left when selected Defined site types Stations Now2012 1 1 4 List of available symbols The bottom panel contains the list of symbols icons available to represent Key Sites on the map N B You can create as many key site databases as you wish and store th
63. date and time stamped CSV file created earlier Click the Open button at the bottom of the Windows Explorer panel Click the Generate button top middle Click OK Click the Generate new database files button again so that it pops out is turned off In the Databases Available panel below double click on the new file Over Border Incidents see example below This reveals the query writer screen for the new database file Database Types AA AAD Business data AB ABD ILR Data IN IND Incidents AD ADD Lifestyle Data AE AED Mobilisatians PC PCD Postcodes PS PSD Postcodes SSU Databases Available e rogram files act Data Census 001WARD ncidents IND Over Border Incidents INDO Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 139 of 389 February 2015 bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE 6 5 Removing the polygon from the map To remove the polygon from the Map Display but not delete it e Double click on the irregular polygon tool below left e The button pops out and the name in the display changes back to lt none gt see below 6 6 Display a saved polygon To display a saved polygon e Left Click on the white box containing the word lt none gt and chose the desired polygon name e Double click on the polygon name from the list and it will appear on the map 6 7 Delete a polygon To delete any existing polygons through the system simply e Left Click on the white box cont
64. drop to change the size larger or smaller e The range boxes of numbers dates and times can be minimised to fit five across the page yet still maintain a decent text size e Personally would keep the range boxes together and arrange the text description list boxes ina logical order based on how often you are likely to use them N B Make sure you DON T cover up the Colour By box bottom right Click the Save button on the extreme right hand side Click Yes to overwrite the database type when asked Click on the Activity tab 3rd one down to view the new box sizes and positions Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 85 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 7 4 Delete Database Files and DB Types 7 4 1 Files Go to the Database tab Click on the Database type from the box at the top Select the file you want to delete from the bottom box Databases Available Right click on the file name and select OK to delete the file N B You may have to open TSM using the other Reference Areas e g Deprivation to delete any other data you have tagged 7 4 2 Types e Go to the DB Design tab e Select the database type that you want to change the top box e Click the Delete button to the right e Click OK Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 86 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Pa
65. filtering completely Right click on a Key Site symbol button above the map Select the Site display properties option The properties panel opens as above Click the Clear all button at the bottom of the field boxes Click OK Left click the Key Site button again to redraw the map and reveal all the Key Site symbols TIP Key Site filters can be saved as part of a session and retrieved when required Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 163 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 6 Key Site Pie Charts The Pies option is available on any of the 12 user defined fields containing numbers e g numbers of resources or percentage values 6 1 Displaying values as pie charts To activate the pie chart function e Right click on a Key Site symbol button above the map e Select the Site display properties option The properties panel opens as above e Select to put a cross x in the box relating to one or more fields on which you want the pies to apply to in this example we have selected three consecutive years values Field filters Filter cio norn E C a a e Teme set agg Pie single field against largest E value in sites Field s to pie lt x lt i lt x Clear all Clear all N B If you select only ONE field two further options are available above a Largest each pie segme
66. for the filter e g RG21 or 2 Click Test and Set Click OK Left click on the Key Site Symbol to turn on the filtered set of site locations Right click on a Key Site Symbol to Disable site filter Alternatively right click and select Site Display Properties Click the Clear all button to remove the filter N B Key Site Filters can be saved with sessions and re used 7 3 Creating pie charts Right click on a Key Site Symbol top left of the map below the exit button Select Site Display Properties Left click on one or more of the check boxes at the bottom right of the Whole Number fields Click OK Left click on the Key Site Symbol to turn on the site locations displayed as pie segments N B Using just one field will show each pie chart as a proportion of the largest value for that field and the largest value as a whole pie Using more than one value will show each segment as a proportion of the total of field values for each individual site added together Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 167 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 7 4 Import BMP JPEG or transparent GIF Go to the Key Sites tab Select the Site Symbol Design Utility button top right Click the Import Image button top left 2nd row 4th button on the right Select a Bitmap JPEG or GIF image file from your PC or network Click File top left Click Save As Type in a new name the program sav
67. g Speed Limits general background rules 2 Variance files e g Effects of Rush Hour day and time specific 3 Override rules files e g Effects of Congestion Blue Lights date day and time specific Drivetime tools Drivetime rules Map features Drivetime rules road speed file selection File type Core road speed files Mame Heaps Speed Limits i xE 10 August 2012 17 07 rule sets Heaps BC x fea Sun H Mon w Tue Wed v H Thu from 08 30 00 FE H 09 29 59 rules in rule set k Motorways A roads B roads Streets aaue vae H 700 mph 3 used by this rule 0 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 366 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 8 1 Core road speed files road speed tile selection File type Core road speed files Hame 29 May 2003 13 58 e Click on the new file button top right of the panel e Now enter a name in the file properties panel with comments if appropriate e The File Save button now becomes active and it is possible to save this file a e Click on the add a new rule set button in the rule sets box e Enter a name for this rule in the rule set properties panel e g Speed Limits see example below e Now click on the new rule button in the rules box rule set properties enabled date specie L Ma HHHH Ma 2003
68. highlight it e Click the Import site database button 3 from the right Sle A d BB is Buttons EH A e a E o A Symbol Defined site types Colleges Headquarters Hospitals Schools Stations Symbols Available Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 159 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e On the next screen click the Select Import Source file button top left e Set the file type to look for to All Files e Select the CSV or TXT file you wish to import A preview of the first 20 records appears right e Click Start Import button bottom left This will cause another window to be displayed see below e Click on the Yes button to overwrite the file and refresh the existing data EO Stations site DB All imported sites will be appended to the end of the current DB This may lead to a duplication of sites if the import file contains sites that are already in the site DB You have the option to delete all current sites before performing the import Select Yes to delete existing sites then continue with the import Select No to continue the import with all sites appended Select Cancel to abort the import Yes No Cancel TIP If appending a few extra records to an existing site database click the No button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 160 of 389 February
69. in anew name maximum of 50 characters e Press the Enter key on the keyboard to save the new name TIP Up to 99 polygons with default names e g Loc_99 can be saved but TSM will warn you if you reach this limit However you can rename them to save them permanently and there is no limit to re named polygons see above Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 138 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 6 4 Create a sub set of the original data In order to work with a smaller set of specific data e g relevant to one particular year category or location it is possible to extract part of a larger database and create a smaller sub database To do this Use a polygon to select some data as above Alternatively run and activity query on some specific items from one or more fields e g Over Border Incidents Click Execute Click the pencil at the top of the toolbox to draw these records as dots on the map Go to the Print toolbox Click the Notepad icon Click OK to export all the records to a date and time stamped CSV file created typically in folder c program files active census20010A Save this file as Over Border Incidents CSV Go to the Database tab Click the Generate new database files white button top right Click the Select button top middle In the Windows Explorer panel that appears go to the c program files active census20010OA folder Select the
70. it is possible to save this file e Click on the new rule sets button in the Rule sets panel e Enter a name for this rule in the rule set properties panel e g Morning Rush Hour as in the example above e Set the days of the week and time of each day that this rule will be effective by entering a tick in the appropriate box Set the times by clicking on the box and holding the mouse button down and dragging up or down to increase or decrease the value e Now click on the add a new rule button e Enter a name for this rule in the rule properties panel e Select the adjustment type by left clicking the value and drag the mouse up or down It can be one of four items impassable absolute speed decrease increase Pon e To set the adjustment value if required for absolute speed decrease or increase left click the value and drag the mouse up or down e Now click on the File Save button to save the changes made Please Note If the File Save button is not clicked and another file option is selected the following message is displayed as a warning ACTIVE TTB This action will cause the loss of your current edits Press OK to continue and lose the edits Press Cancel to abort the current operation e By clicking on OK all the edits to this file will be lost e By clicking Cancel the operation is abandoned allowing the edits to be saved before moving on Confidential www acti
71. like the example below Specialty Contract Postcode DOR Sex Age Admission Method Category Length Stay 140 MEM BB2 4HU P21 F 93 37 21 10 1 140 AEG BL3 3SZ P23 F 32 29 24 10 3 140 MEM BB11 5EU P21 M 30 24 81 10 2 100 TEBO BB2 6NE P21 F 20 98 22 10 4 The text file MUST have the extension CSV If it has a TXT extension rename it in Windows Explorer to lt filename gt CSV Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 321 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual CTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to life 3 2 File Selection This command allows the file to be selected from the normal select file window and then to select the fields to be converted from the list displayed The default path to find the file is C Program Files Active Data e Click on the Select File button top left under the Fields in File panel CMDSCOUNTER PROVIDERHOSPITAL ADMISSIONDATE DISCHARGEDATE PATIENTCLASS SEX POSTCODE EPISODENUMBER REGPRACTCODE SPECIALITY AGE Cancel e Find the CSV file you want to convert and double click the name or left click the name and click Open ices te E aaa b n Program file ACTIVE gt Ote iii sat PO yee J ki tarme Date modhhes D CotunIIL WARD C6OL M13 1618 E ys 1012 2812 160 D Rejent RLL eT actresataces TEAL 28h 1642 EQ engiaed MG 2NS Population Estes OZ LLATL MHAD ear cute 5 6 mutchedt cry 31 07 2008 0240 index of Deprivation Eguna 200 02 LL 20L2 ead P Pratrode DL
72. no longer appear on the map TIP Add a line Display_NodeMultiplier 20 to increase the size of the nodes You can adjust the value 20 by editing it to a size appropriate to your map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 26 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 2 6 Zoom amp Pan To focus on a particular part of the map in the Map Display use the zoom tools which are grouped together above the map to the right of the map size indicator shown below left CCUM 2 6 1 Zoom in To display part of the entire map in the Map Display in greater detail 1 If you click on the Zoom in tool which will stay pressed in and return the cursor to the Map Display the default cursor has changed to a position cursor 2 Next place the cross approximately at any corner of the area you wish to select left click and hold the mouse button down Notice that the cursor has changed to the direction cursor indicating that the cursor may now move in any direction 3 As the cursor is moved in any direction diagonally a Zoom Box will be displayed over the map see example below showing the area that will be included within the new Map Display and the greatest dimension of the rectangle being displayed in both km kilometres and mls miles in the Map Size Indicator 4 When the rectangle or square zoom box has captured the area of interest release the mouse button and a
73. on e The roads associated with this rule can be selected by using the appropriate tool as explained earlier and when the number is entered into the box they can be associated with this rule by clicking the PLUS sign to add to the rule e N B Roads can also be removed from the rule clicking the MINUS sign road sections current selection used by this rule Pn HI Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 369 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 8 2 Variance files As can be seen by the example the Variance file can be set up in exactly the same manner as the Core road speeds files except that they can be Day and Time specific useful for modelling rush hours N B The from value cannot be greater than the to value and so a range covering a period before and after midnight is not possible at present e g 23 30 to 0030 so two blocks of time before and after midnight should be made up using two different rule sets Drivetime maintenance tule sets Morning 1 Hour 2 Evening Rush Hour Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 370 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto To create a new Variance file do the following e Click on the new file button extreme left e Now enter a name in the file properties panel with comments if appropriate The File Save button now becomes active and
74. opens as above Click the Clear all button at the bottom of the pie chart field boxes bottom right Click OK Left click the Key Site button again to redraw the map and reveal all the Key Site symbols TIP Key Site pie chart filters can be saved as part of a session and retrieved when required Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 166 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 7 Step By Step Frequently Used Functions 7 1 Add anew record Go to the Site Edit tab Select the name of the database you want to add the record to from the Defined Site Types list Alternatively click the appropriate icon from the set of 10 above the Defined Site Types list Click on the Edit Site Database button middle of the 5 buttons on the top row of the Site Edit tab Click the New button at the bottom of the next screen Input at least the Name and a Locator Postcode Easting and Northing these are mandatory fields Click Append 7 2 Filtering Go to the Map tab Right click on a Key Site Symbol top left of the map below the exit button Select Site Display Properties Select the blank box next to field you want to filter e g Postcode or Number of Pumps Select the Filter Type at the top e g Text or Numeric Comparison Select the Expression below this to the left from the drop down list e g In the box to the right of the Expression input the search criteria
75. penne Panay verdes W Settersents Text MFW E Sanaa M Betewdery ouas Wate teanews Rotonda Aass Mater Ged M Sreets O Cte teateree T Aree quae l Blac Cont Surtece Map 3 iaa Fangs 1h It W Base area Wwb SSO omne Statistics Mode ypj Satisteal banding Seen ove Dns h Shore tumeda miy Shading Style M Shades of one coios Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 237 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe 12 11 3 Targeting Learners The maps that have been created so far show where your learners are located and identify areas where you have high or low market share and penetration Within TSM postcodes that are within areas can be obtained and using the Address Generator utility the full addresses can be extracted and used for a direct marketing campaign To do this e Identify the wards that you want to target e Using the Pick a single area button circled in red click the areas you want to target e The areas will appear hatched as on the map 7 er P 0 hi Raw aa N 53 Pe ees 1 FS sg oo SS ie ee ea ee eee a ee T5 a i a She BISQUOUA ial fe AA 2g My puu coon ANERE O S J Acimty W Pamay eetas W Settersarts Wages E cinis Betendery cutest Wate enews Rolronca Aes F Mon Ged Soeete O Cte tateree Aree qreeume Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 238 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total So
76. redrawn scaled to the longest side of the box you drew Alternatively move the slider under the zoom tools to step in and out of the map in stages around the map centre 4 2 Pan e Left click and hold the mouse on the map e Drag the map in the direction you want it to move a dotted line shows the proposed direction of the map e Let go of the mouse and the map is redrawn e Alternatively turn off the Pan Map tool and hover over the map edges e Click on the arrow that appears to move the map in that direction by 50 percent of its current size 4 3 Label Street e Turn onthe Streets check box and redraw the map you may have to zoom in below 20 km to see the streets appear Zoom in to show the desired street in more detail Right click on the street select the Label Street option Adjust the label properties font colour zoom etc using the panel that appears on the top right of the map e Click OK to fix your label on the map 4 4 Vector Layers e Click on the check boxes to turn on the vector layers e g Secondary Routes and Other Features e Right click each layer name to turn on off individual elements e g A roads and Woodland e Redraw the map to see the changes 4 5 Raster Maps e Zoom in below 40km map size e Turn on the Raster layer radio button below the map size indicator to the left of Activity and Statistics layers e Zoom in closer to see extra detail e Run an Activity dot query and displa
77. refresh indicating that it has been updated The changes will take effect on the maps next time the system is started up on the PC e Toremove all changes and revert to the colour set present when you loaded the configuration program press Prev previous e To return to the default colour set press the Def default button then Upd a Ee e l H i Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 298 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 2 Setting Map Line Colours Click on the Map Line Colours button to list the values within your system 2 of the 4 icons top right e Click on the Coastline item for example to highlight the whole line including the Red Green and Blue colour values Colour Configuration Map layers Map features Colour values Line Red Green Blue Coastline Ea za Ea Other_Nat_Parks 255 255 2355 Other_Woodlands 255 255 255 Colour settings Water_Rivers 165 198 Water Canals 165 198 ee Water Lakes 255 255 Baa _ a Water Foreshore 255 Ean E Roads 0 Minor Roads 128 Street 192 Red 0 Sec Narrow Railways 0 Sec_Ferries 128 Sec Footpaths 0 Green o Motorways 65 N Roads Pri Railways Blue 0 af Settlements_Large Settlements _Small Street_Private Rd Street Pedestrian Census_Outlines Upd Prev Def Help Exit Other_Buildings fl isa sal
78. rename this item e type the new name Catchment and click OK Area Definition Design Area definition name Text Edit Structure of area hierarchy All Output Areas Catchment Output Areas Area definitions All Output Areas Level_1 Unused areas Abbey 47UDFMO0001 Abbey 47UDFMO0002 Abbey 47UDFM0003 bey 47UDFM0004 bey 47UDFMO0005 bey 47UDFMO0006 bey 47UDFMOO007 bey 47UDFMO0008 TIP This can be changed at any time by selecting it and performing the process above Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 191 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Gato 2 4 Area Definitions This has now set the new logical hierarchy of the new area group being designed To set the physical area the Area Definitions panel which contains the names of the Output Areas must also have added the number of levels Catchments required e Inthe Area Definitions panel click on All Output Areas Area definitions All Output Areas Catchment 1 Broadclyst 18UBGR0001 Broadclyst 1SUBGRO002 Broadclyst 1SUBGRO003 Broadclyst 1SUBGRO004 Broadclyst 1SUBGRO005 4 1 e Then click on the insert level green arrow button The new name e g Catchment will be inserted between All Output Areas and Level_1 e g e As can be seen there are three Catchment lines present these have been added by clicking the Insert Area Level green arrow button 3 times e Click on
79. software may abort with an error message reading from the input file or it will just give the Total records and No Match records to be the same The Lifestyle Match program now allows files to be processed that have no spaces in the postcode e g RG21 4HG This will prevent you from having to reformat the input file first Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 349 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing Goto 3 6 Grid Search Tolerance Select the square size which will be put around the grid co ordinate found in the input file used to locate the closest postcode e Grid Search will put a grid of the selected size around the Grid Reference point and search for the nearest Postcode within this grid e The Larger the grid size e g for data located in rural areas the more accurate but slower the search and subsequent insertion of Lifestyle data SL TIPE Total Sobotee Mapptey Lirsipir Dele teen E Select Grid Search Tolerance Pleate oriec he mamrce oho sree you wan to seach note that sebectsg none wil be mech gu cher fian Stim tus oss natap Postcode in used 44 the Locator e Click Next to proceed Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 350 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 7 Lifestyle Data Selection There are two sorts of data to be added to the input file namely Group and Type of Lifestyle please see t
80. that is outside the polygon see Section 6 below You can do the same with single boundaries e g wards or travel time boundaries 6 Setall below On 7 Setall below Off 8 Export to MID MIF file e If the right mouse click occurs in a completely blank space in this panel then the option to create a completely new boundary set is available see Section 5 below Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 257 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 4 Individual Properties To enable the individual properties of a boundary if set to override values Jigai Census Boundaries Display Outline Fil pV S Old S OBIS OMS VS Old S District or ward y ge BBB L 7 rT ial i e Select the appropriate Boundary Set from the drop down list at the very top of the tool box e g 1991 Census Boundaries e Click on the box under Outline and select lt Individual gt e Click on the box under Fill and select lt Individual gt lt Individual gt Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 258 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 4 1 Property Grid This grid shows the property values for the boundary item currently selected in the boundary structure display Firstly in the middle panel boundary structure open up the structure for boundary set and select the boundary item you wish to change This will o
81. the Boundary Structure Panel and the following Pop up Window will appear e Click on the Boundary set button and a new Set will be added to the bottom of the Tree Structure already in the Middle Panel Also this name New boundary set will appear in the Top Panel along with a Top Level beside all the standard properties associated with this level This Top Level is the Group immediately below the Set known as the Top Level Group N B A Boundary Set cannot have a boundary directly below it in the tree structure there has to be an intervening group Also this set level cannot have an outline associated with it TIP when you create a new boundary set the system invites you to edit the name automatically This makes it easier to select and name the correct boundary set New boundary set Display V Outline Fill Stats Name Area EE Top Level New level y 4 ni Pef 1996 HA Boundaries PWH User Polygons E PWF lsoChrones El Clee New boundary set Pag New Top Level group Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 261 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 1 Renaming a Boundary Set e Alternatively Right clicking on the New boundary set in the middle panel will bring up a new window as follows e Click on Rename and type in new name followed by the Return Key The new name is entered in the Top Panel as well New Append new level D
82. the boundaries will be loaded for you if you checked the Load Boundary box Boundary Import Wizard 1 Select l MIE file Select File Selected CData chg Boundaries MID MIF File Exports 2006 Local Government Boundaries 20070516 152017 MIF 2 Select Column for Individual Boundary Hames 3 Enter Bodndary 2006 Wards Set Name 4 Load Boundary M Load Boundary once processed Process Cancel Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 275 of 389 February 2015 bringing dato 10Boundary Grid Set This provides an extra vehicle for data analysis though the Calculation and Thematic function similar to Auto grid analysis but with all the features of boundaries described above You can generate a regular square based grid in order to analyse data in the boundary tab based on your own configuration using parameters like the example below Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE Right click in a white space in the Boundary Structure panel Select New then Boundary Grid Set Set the Grid cell size e g 1km Set the Map extent Full map zoom current zoom user specified region in Eastings and Northings Adjust origin or grid bottom left corner to the National Grid or copy an existing Auto grid see the Compare Tab Leave Save Boundary as Permanent File ticked unless you are just practicing Click OK Click Close to return to the Boundary Tab where your new boundary grid is
83. the cells e Check this by running the cursor over the cells as above TIP Right click on any grid square and choose Grid counts to label it with its cell value Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 243 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato to ifa Continuous Surface Mapping The Continuous Surface Mapping CSM feature is a development of the Auto grid function that generates a continuous surface of information from activity dot data Continuous surface maps are used to aggregate data within a specified search radius with the aim of creating a smooth surface to represent the density of the data across the map or in other words a hotspot map The purpose of such a map is to identify the location intensity and extent of the hotspots in a visually attractive manner so as to identify areas suitable for further and more detailed analysis These maps illustrate where concentrations of learners or patients live or where fire or ambulance incidents take place The red areas equal areas of high concentration and the blue areas equal low areas of concentration 14 1 Creating a Hotspot Map with CSM To Create a CSM Map Create an Activity dot query and store it in the Card Stack Go to the Compare tab Drag and drop the Activity data card into the Show Data panel Tick the Continuous Surface Mapping feature Select a Grid Cell Size from the drop down list top righ
84. to ifa 1 5 Importing New Data e First select option import data from a new file e Click Next to continue Select ether enport a new fle or wew delete data that has already been imported e Select the Reference Area Set e g 2001 Census OAs The table s you create will only be accessible when you choose this set when you start Active TSM Select the Reference Area Sat for which the data is te De enpored Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 309 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato to ife e Click Next e Click the Select File button e Select the file using Windows Explorer and click Open e Click Next e Select the Geographic Reference Field e g the column containing the Super Output Area codes e Click Next Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 310 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Select the column s containing the data options are also available on this screen to set the number of decimal places used and to retain the original values in the data e Click Next i i i PEPS Select the heids which contain the data to be imponed Hold down the ShN key and use the mouse to select adjacent Selde or hold down the Ctrl key and use the mouse to select mutige indvidual felds Ewe e Select the Row Title column or if you don t have one you can skip this step and the program w
85. werurtl ha processing has Conpiend then ove he tie ai Free eet TIP At any time during the process the CANCEL button can be clicked and the program will clear all settings even if the program is converting the input file at this moment CANCEL also enables you to quit the program once you have saved your new file ready to import into an ACTIVE database The results are displayed as follows e No Match records mean that no postcode grid reference has been found e Unknown Locator means that a postcode grid reference within the map has been found but is not within the Mosaic database e Records failing with both of these issues are written to an Reject file which is stored in the Reject directory Typically C Program Files ACTIVE Data Census2001WARD Reject with the same file name as the input file but the extension LSE TIP If you have a lot of rejected records try running the match program again but this time increase the Grid Search Tolerance up to 500 meters see 3 6 above Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 352 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 3 9 Saving the Extract File e Save the file when prompted but take care to give it a different name to the input file as per the example below Ji Program Files ACTIVE Data gt 4g seen OO Filename matched lifestyle data 200313 X Save as type Lifestyle CSV T ext Files bct
86. you select the appropriate time format from the pick list e g hh mm ss 24hr the following will then be displayed Field Definition Field Type hh mm ss 24hr Import width Field Id onorate CS Fill in the rest of the boxes as follows e Import width This must be set to 0 zero see above e Field Id e g AD e Fullname e g Call time e Click OK to save the field definition and continue Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 79 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 9 Onor After Function Time fields can be linked to dates to enable a Time of Week filter for more details on this function see the Chapter 4 Graphical Query Writer To do this you need to type the abbreviation for Call Date AC in the On or After box for the Time field When you colour the query by Time and set the Banding Method to Time of Week this enables you to choose bands representing mornings or afternoons defaulting to 00 00 00 to 11 59 59 and 12 00 00 to 23 59 59 for each day of the week TIP Using field definition dd mm yyyy for dates will prevent year being represented as 1901 instead of 2001 when you import the data This is because the system will pick up the year portion of the date regardless of how many characters have been keyed in 01 or 2001 Alternatively you could format the date column in excel to ma
87. 002 24 01 2002 24 03 2002 20 02 2002 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 13 04 2002 13 04 2007 23 04 2002 23 04 2002 23 04 2002 23 04 2002 23 04 2002 23 04 2002 62 10 2001 02 10 2001 28 01 2002 28 01 2002 03 02 2001 03 02 2003 03 02 2003 05 02 2001 12 33 23 L213 1 42 12 11 52 20 13 05 23 34 20 23 20 42 23 24 26 10 10 25 1009 52 10 08 42 1039 36 e 10 10 44 H0 10 55 10 16 15 1347 35 14 06 30 21 23 49 2714021 21 37 11 21 19 21 21 13 30 20 15 58 20 15 59 22 01 2001 23 04 2003 30 05 2003 30 05 2003 59 05 2003 20 07 2001 27 07 2001 27 07 2001 27 07 2001 24 03 2002 24 03 2000 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 24 03 2002 Li oa 2002 13 04 2002 23 04 2002 2 04 2002 23 04 2002 23 08 2002 23 04 2002 23 04 2002 02 10 2001 02 10 2001 23 01 2002 28 01 2002 03 02 2001 O02 2001 03 02 2008 os 02 2001 04 1 2001 Extra commas should also be removed from the data using Find and Replace as this will confuse the import program into thinking there are extra fields unless they fall between a set of double quotes e g 3 Yew Tree House no commas or 3 Yew Tree House double quotes 1 2 4 Maximum number of rows per file The maximum number of rows from a single file that can be imported into a database is one million records Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 58 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 1 3 Data
88. 1 3 Binoculars Button map toggle Clicking the binoculars top right repeatedly enables you to toggle between the map and the Query Writer quickly so that you can make refinements to the selections on the current query based on what appears on the map Alternatively you could start afresh with a completely new query by toggling back from the map to the Query Writer 1 4 Pencil Button redraw The yellow pencil button on the Activity toolbox enables you to redraw the map based on cosmetic changes you have made to the current query such as changing the order of the colours that represent the results Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 90 of 389 February 2015 bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE 2 Query Writer The Query Writer is a graphical interface between you and the database that enables you to ask questions of the data at the click of your mouse The Query Writer is designed by yourself to make searching through the data easier see example below The design may be adjusted or completely revised in the Query Screen Design option when you edit a database template see Chapter 3 incidents c program files actiDate Census200TWARD Test IND CallDate CaliTime AssiqnDote Assign Time Include Blanks X inchide Blanks i Include Blanks X Include Blanks From GON From G0 00 00 From C1200 From 00 00 00 To 31122004 To 23 59 59 To 311122004 To 23
89. 1 Datasets 6 2 Modify by 6 3 Result Formula 6 4 Calculate Confidential www activeinformatics com 252 253 254 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 262 262 263 263 264 264 267 267 268 268 268 Page 250 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 6 5 Displaying the Stats on the Map 6 6 Band Values 6 7 Printing the Calc And Theme Banding Key 6 8 Show Hide Results Sheet 6 9 Results Sheet Tools 6 10 Clear Dataset Cards 7 MAKE USER POLY 8 SAVE BOUNDARY SETTINGS 9 EXPORTS AND BOUNDARY SETS 9 1 Export Activity Data to a CSV File 9 2 Export Boundaries To Mid Mif Files 9 3 Import a Mid Mif Boundary File 10 BOUNDARY GRID SET 11 CONVERT BOUNDARIES INTO REFERENCE AREAS 12 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 12 1 Turning boundaries on off 12 2 Export data through boundaries 12 3 Calculation and Thematic 12 4 Import MID MIF 12 5 Create new boundary 12 6 Create new Reference Area from a boundary Confidential www activeinformatics com ACTIVE bringing Goto 269 269 270 270 271 271 272 273 274 274 274 275 276 277 278 278 278 278 279 279 279 Page 251 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 Introduction The Boundaries Toolbox provides many facilities for creating modifying displaying and performing analysis upon various structured locations These structures m
90. 1 INTRODUCTION 147 1 1 Key Sites Toolbox 147 1 1 1 Key Site Tools 147 1 1 2 Site Display Buttons 148 1 1 3 List of Defined Key Site Types 148 1 1 4 List of available symbols 148 2 KEY SITE IMPORT 149 2 1 Typical data fields 149 2 2 Key Sites Import Wizard 149 3 CREATE KEY SITES MANUALLY 152 3 1 Name the database 152 3 2 Add a key site record 153 3 3 Assign a symbol 154 3 4 Display the key site on the map 155 4 EDIT KEY SITE DETAILS 156 4 1 Edit records 156 4 2 Change a Key Site Icon 157 4 3 Remove a Key Site Button 158 4 4 Export Key Site Data 158 4 5 Refresh Database with new data 159 5 KEY SITE FILTER 162 5 1 Filtering sites on the display 162 5 2 Disable a filter 163 5 3 Clear a filter 163 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 145 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 6 KEY SITE PIE CHARTS 164 6 1 Displaying values as pie charts 164 6 2 Hide pie charts 166 6 3 Remove pie charts 166 7 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 167 7 1 1 Adda new record 167 7 2 2 filtering 167 7 3 3 Creating pie charts 167 7 4 4 Import BMP JPEG or transparent GIF 168 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 146 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 1 Introduction The purpose of this Toolbox is to create and edit all Key Site point of interest information related to your organisation This can be performed manually or the data
91. 13 12 255 88 88 Green o f 13 255 65 65 l4 255 30 is 255 0 0 Blue 128 e Now click on the second blue rectangle within the Colour Palette and notice that the highlighted line has changed to represent this shade of blue e Now click on the Red value under the colour palette and notice that the scroll bars have appeared allowing the Red value to be changed e Click within the scroll bar and drag it upwards changing the Red value to 150 noticing the colour change to mauve e Click on the Upd update button e To remove all changes and revert to the colour set present when you loaded the configuration program press Prev e To return to the default colour set press the Def button then Upd e Press Exit to quit Def Help Exit Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 301 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 3 Placename Configuration Exit from Colour Configuration Left click on Placename Configuration to select it and click on the Execute button underneath Select the map layer e g Settlements N B You can also change the water feature map text Type in the place name you wish to amend edit or delete and click Find Place Names Select map layer Settlements C Water Features TSM Enter placename Sutton A total solution mapping Find Active Informatics Map Extents E
92. 2 6 66 to 13 3198 i Shade from white to al 13 32 to 19 9796 w 019 98 to 26 6391 aaa elele am P6 64 to 33 2991 Shaded to black all IE 3 30 to 39 959 i 189 96 to 46 6196 Colour spectrum Tal 46 62 to 53 7791 a Vivid shades oll 153 278 to 59 9390 C Pastel shades ig to 66 5991 i 66 60 to 73 259r Mai 73 26 to 79 9196 Mal 79 9 to 86 579r O Shrink to fit bands Mal 66 58 to 93 7390 Use first N colours 5 93 24 to 99 8991 hel mM Bos 90 and over C User defined colours Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 234 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 12 11 Education Mapping A better understanding of your current markets in education will help you to target your marketing better saving money through reducing wastage Understanding key barriers to recruitment will help you to minimise and manage their impact on future recruitment 12 11 1 Penetration maps Penetration maps show your learners as a proportion of all 16 18 year olds using the 2001 Census data within the system This gives an indication of a colleges catchment area as you can see if your penetration reduces the closer you get to other colleges To do this Open TSM using the 2001 Census Wards OAs option Create a learner query for 16 18 year old learners from the current academic year See Chapter 4 Graphical Query Writer Click on the Reference tab this takes you to the cens
93. 2002 73138556 5194 os 2002 21 4 20 s36 117 688 n 7007 33 04 i zi 21 16 51 2001 2 20 71 47 511 iara Salvag P Purp Officer at rum Pu ype DEN VOTI rg i ASSIENURe Jal Paws lapie wat 751012 Spec Sere emergency 74011 Spec Sary Emergency 31344032 Spec Serv Emergency 13390031 Spec Serv Emergency 13390031 Spec Sere Emergency 133150031 Spec Sere Emengericy 14654011 Fatsa Alarm Good inten 3330012 False Alarm Good inten 9196012 Faise Alarm Good inten 43336012 False Alarm Good inten 14907021 Spec Serv Emergency 14907021 Spec Sers Emergency 14907021 Spec Serv Emergency 14907021 Spec Sere Lmergency 14907021 Spec Serv Emergency 18907021 Spec Serv Emergency 14907021 Spec Serv Emergency 14907021 Spec Serv Emergency 63300227 Spec Serv Emengency 6330022 Spec Sarv Emergency 10809022 Spec Serv Emergency 10809022 Spec Sery Emergency 10809022 Spec Serv Emergency 16809022 Spec Serv Emengency 16805022 Spec Serv Emergency 10805022 Spec Serv Emergency 67754012 False Qlarin Good inter 67754012 Fatse Alarm Good inten 3479022 Spec Serv Emergency 5475072 Spec Sery Emergency 7336012 Spec Sarv Emergency 7330012 Spec Sery Emerganty 7377012 Spec Serv Emergency TIPOO1LZ Spec Serv Emergency 1 2 3 Extra commas 398389 04 01 2001 390008 22 01 2001 396199 23 04 2003 393805 30 05 2003 393805 30 05 2003 395805 30 05 2003 385482 20 07 2005 411389 27 07 2001 411389 27 07 2001 411389 37 07 2001 127996 24 03 2002 412996 24
94. 2015 bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE The system tells you where any rejected records are written to typically C program Files Active Census20010A Reject in a message similar to the one below Site DB Import p Rejected Bad records have been written to the file C Program P Files ACTINVE data Census20010A Reject stations2012 KSR N B The reject file is named after your input file e g stations2012 KSR the extension KSR stands for Key Site Rejects To look at the reject file you will need to locate it using Windows Explorer and open it in MS Notepad or a similar program In this way it is easier to identify and correct poor quality key site data in the source file before re importing e Click OK to continue The system tells you that the import is complete e Click OK to continue once more Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 161 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 5 Key Site Filter 5 1 Filtering sites on the display You can choose which Key Sites you want to display on the map by applying a filter to one or more of the fields To apply a filter e Right click on a Key Site symbol button above the map e Select the Site display properties option The properties panel opens an example of which is shown below e Select the field to filter by clicking the white box next to the title e g Locator e
95. 242 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ifa Please Note The grid mode does not perform comparison calculations of two datasets only the show data card is read Furthermore the facility only works for datasets that contain point data e g activity data and cannot deal with the other types of datasets i e census data and areas This is because the location of census data is static while point data is variable e With such data in the show data section you can check on the auto grid feature x and select from the drop down menu that appears the size of squares ranging from 100 metres to 50 kilometres This is known as the grid cell size e When the equals button after choosing a grid cell size or redraw button after colour band changes are then pressed the query data is counted into the selected square area and coloured by the density of points in each one 4 kilometre 218 The data is converted into hot spots i e The range colours represents different amounts of data within the specified area The shading style and statistical banding can also be manipulated as shown earlier e Run the mouse over the squares to see the number of points in each displayed in the cell value box e Try altering the grid cell size up or down and click equals e You should see the red square the highest number of points per grid cell move as you alter the size of
96. 3 1 File Format 3 2 File Selection 3 3 Field Selection 3 4 Table Selection 3 5 Converting a File 3 6 Saving the converted file 4 HELP AND EXIT 4 1 Quick Help amp Program Status 4 2 Online Help 4 3 Exit Confidential www activeinformatics com 316 317 317 318 318 319 320 320 321 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 327 327 327 Page 315 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 Introduction Active Alias enables you convert codes in your data into text descriptions Prior to converting files you will need to build a database of tables containing codes and descriptions either manually or by importing files When you run the conversion routine the codes found in any data file will be replaced by the text descriptions e g numbers 1 and 2 will be converted into Male and Female To launch the Active Alias utility e First click on the Tools button top left of TSM x e Select the option Active Alias that appears in the panel on the right of TSM ACTIVE Alias Allows the User to build a database of tables containing a Code field and a Text field The codes when found in a text file will be replaced by the textual representation e g change numbers 1 and 2 or M and F into Male and Female Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 316 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato 2 Setting up the Conversion Tables 21
97. 327 327 327 328 329 330 330 331 334 336 337 338 340 341 342 343 346 346 Page 17 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 2 What Will Be Added 3 3 Starting the Matching Process 3 4 Selecting the Input File 3 5 Locator Field 3 6 Grid Search Tolerance 3 7 Lifestyle Data Selection 3 8 Processing the Data 3 9 Saving the Extract File 3 10 Viewing the Reject File TSM USER GUIDE TRAVEL TIME BOUNDARIES 4 INTRODUCTION 5 MAP DETAIL PANEL 5 1 Features 5 2 County and District Borders 5 3 Importing Boundaries 5 4 Isochrones 5 5 Key Sites 5 6 Pins 5 7 Manipulating the Map 5 8 Distances Points 6 MAP FEATURES 6 1 Road Properties 6 2 Point Properties 6 3 Road Filter 6 4 Road Selection 7 SESSIONS Confidential www activeinformatics com ek 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 353 354 356 357 357 357 358 359 359 360 360 360 361 361 362 364 364 365 Page 18 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 8 DRIVETIME RULES 8 1 Core road speed files 8 2 Variance files 8 3 Override rules 9 DRIVETIME TOOLS 9 1 Drivetime Tools Panel 9 2 New Isochrone Set Panel parameters 9 3 Creating Isochrones 9 4 Set Isochrones Times 9 5 Placing a Pin in the Map 9 6 Generating Isochrones Manually 9 7 Generating Ilsochrones Automatically Using Key Sites 10 DRIVETIME TRACKBACK 10 1 Selected pin 10 2 Mouse click
98. 4 Isochrones with an interval of 30 seconds between them from 4 up to 10 minutes have been selected To change the figures click up down buttons to the right of the values or drag up or down and the number will be increased or decreased Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 378 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Q 9 5 Placing a Pin in the Map e Now go to the map and zoom into the area required if necessary and then right click on the map at the appropriate point where the Isochrone should start e Select New Pin used to generate Isochrones and another window will appear with options of where to site the pin fod 6 OE 446210N Un named minor road ADS Other specify e Select where the PIN should be placed to start generating the Isochrone and the software will insert a pin as follows M F a a a m Ee OF Pee ee q ee nd a i NM Rodha A h zd P ft a F Pi We e lf Other is selected the following window is displayed left Locate by Postcode ie L Sheet Easing Northing Sheet amp grid reference C o Natonal grid reference i Cancel Tj e This allows the position of the pin to be determined by a Full Postcode Sheet and Grid Reference relative to the Sheet Co ordinates normally up to 4 digits Easting and 4 digits Northing or by full National Grid Reference 6 digits Easting and 6 digits Northing Confidential w
99. 59 59 MobileDete Mobile Time VehicleAvailableDate VehicleAvailable ime Include Blanks x Include Blanks M include Blanks include Blanks From 01 01 2001 From 00 00 00 From OV01200T From Toj DROM lol 35858 To i JAZO To Heaponse sec Incident lype oro IncidemtDescription mej om 2h rie False Alarm Good mest To 6750 ate oe Overborder Attended Spec Serv Emergency ge rst Vehicle lype id gEEEELEEESESEEEEEEES 2 1 Search Boxes The Query Writer contains boxes with headings representing the fields found within the data Each panel could contain a list of text entries in alphabetical order e g category names a list of numbers in ascending order e g a Sequence of separate ages or a range of numbers lowest and highest values are shown e g numbers of resources a range dates or times e g incident date time Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 91 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato These lists and ranges have been automatically generated as a result choosing a particular database When an alternative database is selected from the Database Toolbox see section 1 1 then the Query Writer may look significantly different depending on how it was designed 2 2 Selection Lists Where the data field is in text format and represents several unique descriptions an alphabetical list is formed It is possible to select one or more
100. 66 60 to 73 259r MaA F3 26 to 79 949r Malm 179 97 to 86 579r O Shrink to fit bands fal 66 58 to 93 239r Use first N colours Hal ij93 24 to 99 8997 ell 99 90 and over User defined colours Using the Show over base option as above top means that the Show Data information is divided by the Base Data information and a percentage is calculated for each area e g Ward The banding above shows percentages and by clicking on the redraw tool the thematic map will be updated up dated accordingly see example above TIP To toggle the thematic map on and off check and uncheck the Statistics layer box above the map as below Natonal Gord Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 225 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 12 4 Display areas by as A Auto grid J Cont Surface Map Show data a Files _LTC Data Census2001WARD Base data all C Program Files LTC Data Census2001WARD Base area District summed Statistics Mode K Statistical banding Show over Base h Lower 0 0 0 0 Show counts only Interval 143 Defaults Shading Style Upper 85 8 400 0 Shades of one colour Above the card stack is a further setting that allows you to control the way the data is displayed on the map and results For example if you want to work out the number of specific activities as a proportion of
101. 89 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 3 4 Label record counts Each dot can have a label associated with it in order to specify how many records it represents e Right click on the dot zoom in first if this helps e A pop up appears with several labelling options see below Refresh map Copy Activity counts by value Label area Label site Add text label Label list Label primary route Label secondary route Label street Label railway station Label M Way jn Label nearest postcode Label nearest feature Find Select option Activity counts third from the top The label properties panel appears on the top right corner of TSM Edit the label text if required Click OK on label properties to accept the label and display it on the map see example below For more information on labels in TSM please see chapter 1 Yo sey rs 45 of Activity wna ae a 4 y pa TIP These labels are part of the Label list and can be hidden or modified in the same way as all other labels but if the session is closed they are not saved unless the session is saved see chapter 1 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 124 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 3 5 Size by value lt is also possible to set the size of the dots based on a range fiel
102. 9 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 14 2 6 Changing the Interval Lower and Upper Values In the upper portion of a statistical banding section there is a lower and upper value given the former being the lower percentage found and the latter being the highest across the whole of the area which is populated with census not just those areas selected The difference between these two values is the total range of the values separated below TSM has calculated an interval but this and the lower and upper values can all be adjusted by left clicking on the the boxes and keying in new values then press the Return key on the keyboard In the example below we have reduced the interval value to 500 resulting in 16 equal bands of 500 and an Upper value of 7500 Statistical banding Lower 0 1 Interval 500 Upper 7500 14872 La Mo to 499 97 Lam 71500 to 999 97 L3 _ 11000 to 1499 97 __ La i500 to 1999 97 5M 2000 to 2499 9r_ Lej 2500 to 2999 9r_ LT _ B000 to 3499 9r__ La _ B500 to 3999 9r_ La 4000 to 4499 9r_ 110 _ 4500 to 4999 9r_ 1 _ 5000 to 5499 9r_ 12 _ 5500 to 5999 9r_ 13 6000 to 6499 9r_ ia _ 6500 to 6999 97 _ 15 _ 7000 to 7499 9 __ ne 7 7500 andover N B Redraw using the pencil to apply any changes you have made to the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 247 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3
103. 9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Goto 2 12 Filtering Dates and Times Date and time range criteria may have special filtering applied allowing the selection of records for certain months of years and or days of the week e To seta date filter right click on any date field The following window will appear Filter CallDate Date field _ Sun Mon Tue Hedl Thu Frisa Fa O A O S ET eb re a range of months and or a range of weekdays _ Sun Hon Tue Hed Thu Fri lsat From No Dats Mo Data To No Data Mo Data Clear e To select a sequence of days click and drag the mouse across one or more days of the week on the top row N B You must select a one day or a Sequence and you cannot select Monday and Wednesday and miss out Tuesday for example In the example below Monday Tuesday and Wednesday have been selected in sequence therefore the results will only relate to activities that happen on those weekdays and no others Filter CallDate Date field Sun Mon Tue Hed Thu Fri Sab Jan Select a range of months and or a range of weekdays el _ Sun ton Tue Med Thu Fri Sat From No Data Monday To No Data Wednesday Clear Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 97 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato e Selecting a one month or a sequence of months can be done using the same method described above e Toc
104. ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 3 Area Selection Tools You can select some or all of the areas in order to interrogate the reference or activity data on the map To the right of the Polygon Title Box note four Area Group tools that are reading from left to right Pick Multiple Areas whose centroid is inside a polygon Pick Unpick single areas single pick Reverse Picked areas Clear All Selected areas 1 2 3 4 TIP You can now select target areas by right clicking on a single colour in the statistical banding This makes it even easier to select multiple areas e g the top most red Output Areas automatically without having to search for them on the map To manually select a group of adjacent areas e Click once on the Pick Multiple Areas tool which will remain depressed and when the cursor is returned to the map notice that it has changed to the position pointer e Draw a polygon to pass through or around all those areas which are to be included in the group then e After closing the polygon it will have a light mesh hatching across it If this represents the extent of area required then pass over the following 3 points e To refine the selection made so far click once on the Single Pick tool and return to the Map Display e Thecursor is now the information pointer T and either point to areas that were previously selected which are not now wanted and click once to remove the cross hatching e Alternatively po
105. CTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 5 6 Pins Second left below Pins This button displays the pins which have a tick in the check box on the map The map pins can be used as the start point origin of a travel time boundary within the program Click the down arrow to the right for a list of pins 5 7 Manipulating the Map From left to right below Zoom in Previous zoom Pan Map Cancel Zoom These map movement buttons work in the same manner as the Active TSM program TIP When zooming in and out the map size is indicated in the Status line at the bottom of the map on the left hand side From left to right below Map size Toggle miles and kilometres Distance measurement 5 8 Distances Points From left to right below Distance measurement Select point features e The Distance button works in the same manner as in Active TSM that is the distance is a straight line distance between two points Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 360 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 6 MAP FEATURES Map feature properties 6 1 Road Properties e This is the panel written to when the Individual Road Selection button above is used The above example has selected a section of road which is the A629 The road name has been input manually and by selecting to be displayed the road number and name will be displayed be
106. Database Print Title Training Database Prev Next gt gt Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 61 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 2 3 Stage 3 Field Definition Your database can contain up to 27 fields 64 if additional fields are added manually to the design make sure that one type of Locator is specified at this point Postcode or Easting amp Northing fields as in the example below In the top right corner there are buttons to help you navigate to the next page of 15 fields and view their formats Click Next Database Design Wizard Stage 3 Set Field Definitions a gt Page 1 of 2 Field Field Data Type Text Sample Width Data ID AA incidentNumber Whole number 751012 AB IncidentType Tet S50 spec Serv Er AD Easting Eastings metres 376394 AE Northing Northings metres 396309 AF CallDate dd mm yyyy 0401 2001 AG CallTime hh mm ss 24hr 14 22 56 AH AssignDate dd mmyyyy pao12007 Al AssignTime hh mm ss 24hr AJ MobileDate dd mm yyyy 04 01 2001 AK MobileTime hh mm ss 24hr VehicleAvailableDati dd mmiyyyy 04 01 2004 JAM VehicleAvailableTim hh mm ss 24hr Prev Next gt gt Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 62 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015
107. F S FADA e Use the vertical scroll bar which may appear on long lists to move up or down the items A horizontal scroll bar may appear when the descriptions are wider than the box in which they appear In the example below only the first 16 items in the Vehicle Type list are visible unless we use the vertical scroll bar to view the 14 items below Officer ADO VehicleType 0 30 Lighting Unit Miscellaneous Mobile Catering Unit Officer ACFO Officer ADO N B If no specific selections are made from a field list the query writer assumes that all the selections are required The query writer will automatically choose the entire list of items for you and highlight them all blue if you don t choose anything specific Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 94 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 2 7 More than one field per list box It is possible to add up to four related fields to a selection list box manually see Chapter 3 Within each panel Field Name selections will be represented by radio buttons if you configure the database in this way In this example from another database see below the Classification panel contains more than one field that refer to the same thing in this case Classification and Class Code lf there is more than one field available in a list box any one of the available Field Names can be selected by left clicki
108. FH FRE ALARN a4 eet 7 treetn Sweetee Tarde J bee FE ALABA Rooi 1w Do TD Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 141 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 7 1 Copy activity record list to clipboard The clipboard is a section of memory where your computer stores copied data At the top right hand corner of the Activity Record List is a Copy to Clipboard button see below enabling you to copy and paste the records from the table into another document or application easily e g MS Word or Notepad When you click this button a progress bar appears at the top right hand corner of TSM to inform you when the data has been copied to the clipboard 7 2 Print activity records It is also possible to print the contents of the Activity Record List to any printer you have access to via your PC However unless you have less than 10 records in the table we would strongly advise against this as the process is not only time consuming but also uses a lot of paper owing to the fact that it only prints 3 records per A4 sheet It might be more cost effective to use the print and export options outlined in Chapter Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 142 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 8 Step By Step Frequently Used Functions 8 1 Re size dots Run an Activity dot query Click the Sizing button right of red
109. FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 7 1 Standard Data Clean Up Methods CSV files 7 2 Multiple Locators 7 3 Resize And Move Boxes On The Query Writer 7 4 Delete Database Files and DB Types TSM USER GUIDE PART 4 GRAPHICAL QUERY WRITER 1 ACTIVITY TOOLBOX 1 1 Selecting a database 1 2 Activity Toolbox Functions 1 3 Binoculars Button map toggle 1 4 Pencil Button redraw Z QUERY WRITER 2 1 Search Boxes 2 2 Selection Lists 2 3 Count Box 2 4 Select All Button 2 5 Clear All Button 2 6 Selecting List Entries 2 7 More than one field per list box 2 8 Range Boxes 2 9 Setting Date Ranges Confidential www activeinformatics com bringing Goto 81 81 81 83 84 85 85 85 85 86 87 89 89 90 90 90 91 91 92 92 92 93 93 95 95 96 Page 6 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 10 Setting Time Ranges 2 11 Include Blanks 2 12 Filtering Dates and Times 2 13 Clearing a Filter 3 COLOUR BY 3 1 Applying a Colour Theme 3 2 When No Selections are Made 3 3 Setting Range Field Bands 3 4 Date Bandings 3 5 Editing band values 3 6 Time bandings 3 7 Number bandings 3 8 Time of Week Bands 4 QUERY RESULT 4 1 Execute Query 4 2 Changing the Order of Entries 4 3 Keeping Dot Colours Static 4 4 New query button 5 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 5 1 Date time filters 5 2 Setting bands 5 3 Sorting colour by query TSM USER GUIDE PART 5 MAP DESIGN 1 DATA
110. GROOOS 7 Broadelyst 18UBGROO008 C Broadelyst 18UBGRO007 C Broadelyst 18UBGROO08 C Broadelyst 18UBGROO09 C eroadclyst 18UBGROO10 e Click once again on any or all of the Area Groups to see listed in alphabetical order the areas contained within each Area Group and to note by those that have a black cross X in the Check Box which ones are selected e When the Area Directory is in this state e g not all the districts switched on there is an easy means of switching them all off and on rather than going through and manually checking each box That is to right click All Output Areas and click on Switch all ON e To reinstate individual areas which were subtracted earlier simply pick them and left click on the Area Selection Add Button 4 1 Atomic Area e To identify where a particular Atomic area sits on the map find its name in the Area Directory and click once on the check box to remove the cross from the Check Box see below e Note which Atomic area on the screen has been taken off thereafter clicking again to reinstate that Atomic area in the Map Display Display areas by Output Areas Selected gt E E All Output Areas Broadclyst 18UBGROOO4 Broadclyst 18UBGR0002 Broadclyst 18UBGRO003 Broadelyst 18UBGR0004 f Broadclyst 18UBGR0006 Broadelyst 18UBGR0007 Broadclyst 18UBGR0008 Broadclyst 18UBGR0009 Broadelyst 18UBGR0010 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 199 of 389 ACTI
111. LA Other Boundaries Eef User Polygons P ef IsoChrones PE Office Pa iSq Pubs Sg 10min The Swallow Andover elf Sy 10min Woodland Inn Headley ll Gy T m from Nine Saxons Basingstoke SS WHAEA estaurants rl Sy SUrming from Ke Tandoor Alton rel fe Sy SUming tram Mcdonalds Newbury lf Sy SUming from Redford Tandoor Basingstoke Sq Sports grounds f g 15min from Uk Chasers Riding Course Andover The left hand display switches in the tree structure can be used in the following 4 ways 1 both parent and child OFF e g no districts or wards displayed at all 2 parent ON but child OFF e g districts are displayed but wards are not 3 parent OFF but child ON e g wards are displayed but districts are not 4 both parent and child ON e g both districts and wards displayed Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 256 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 4 Pop Up Menus e Use the right click to access the menu options e lfa user created boundary is highlighted then a right mouse click will activate a pop up menu allowing you to add a new boundary child underneath the item add an island hole to the group boundary outline or delete the current item rename the current item make a user polygon that fills the group boundary outline oe Ss You can also Invert poly so it is easy to count the activity
112. Le Sampie Records to 102 Cae jj r eneon Status Preas Generate to create the saw Database Append to add date Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 67 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 2 8 Importing Ambulance Mobilisation Data Example The following steps take you through importing a typical set of mobilisation data in order to produce some mobilisation analysis subsequently see Chapter 4 e Click on the DB design tab e Click the Wizard button e Stage 1 Select the CSV or TXT file that you want to load into TSM e Click on Next e Stage 2 Under General Title give the database a name e g Mobilisations e This automatically fills the Print Title e Click on Next e Stage 3 The Easting and Northing data fields need to be Data Type Easting locator and Northing locator see below e Data fields that contain just numbers area Data Type Whole Number e Data fields that contain just text are Data Type Text e An exception to this may be lists of numbers where several non sequential entries need to be selected e g different Priority or Chief Complaint numbers see below Data Type Text e Data fields that contain numbers and text are Data Type Text e Click on Next o Reo m ae ee Dinpiny arene by Wiardte gt e t Ac w Pray en SE Setierrerce ot wre Onis Ooni maisai Water asiast Detrarce Sowas
113. Level_1 in this panel and click the Delete Area Level red arrow button once to remove this item TIP Ifthe Catchments are being built in alphabetical order it may be better to start at the end and work backwards as the system will remove any levels which are empty Or continue building the Area until complete before saving Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 192 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Gato 2 5 Rename Definitions e Inthe Area Definition panel click the first Catchment s text and e Right click to rename this item before typing the name Catchment 1 e Click OK This process should be repeated for any other Catchments you need to create for this Area Group Area Definition Design Area definition name Text Edit Structure of area hierarchy All Output Areas Catchment Output Areas Area definitions All Output Areas Catchment 1 Unused areas Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 193 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 6 Define the Area e Click on Catchments 1 within the Area Definition panel highlighting the text e Now using the Pick Multiple Areas extreme left hand tool draw a polygon around the area for this Catchment e When the polygon is closed the system will select all the Output Areas whose centre falls within this polygon
114. NC PERSON e Stage 1 Select the data file you want to import into TSM e Stage 2 Give your database design a 2 digit Database Type ID e g NL and a General Title e g NLPG Located Data Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 334 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing Gato e Stage 3 The program reads the whole file and works out the format for each column e Set the NLPG field to be the locator using the drop down format list e Set any Easting Northing or Postcode fields to TEXT using the drop down format list Database Design Wizard Stage 3 Set Field Definitions lt lt gt gt Page 1 of 1 Field Field Data Type Text Sample ID Width Data AA Incident No Whole number AB Incident Type Text 50 Spec Ser Er Incident Sub Type Text 50 Spec Serv Er AD UPRN ee 10001239701 AE Easting Text 50 376394 Northing Text f50 398389 IAG Date dd mm yyyy 04 01 2001 AH Time hh mm ss 24hr 14 29 56 Al Initial Type a Prey Next gt gt e Stage 4 Select the fields to include on the Query Writer screen up to 27 fields in a combination of up to 16 lists of descriptions or up to 16 ranges of dates times whole numbers or monetary values e Stage 5 Click YES to save the database design e Then confirm the name of the selected file and import it into TSM see manual chapter 3 Database Design Confidential www activeinformati
115. NDICES 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Import a New File or View Data 1 2 View Existing Data Tables 1 3 File Format 1 4 Data Restrictions 1 5 Importing New Data 1 6 Deleting Data 1 7 Using the Data with TSM TSM USER GUIDE PART 15 ACTIVE ALIAS 1 INTRODUCTION 2 SETTING UP THE CONVERSION TABLES 2 1 Importing Data into Tables 2 2 Creating Tables Manually 3 CONVERTING FILES USING THE TABLES 3 1 File Format Confidential www activeinformatics com ACTIVE bringing doto 298 298 299 300 301 302 303 303 304 304 305 306 306 306 308 308 309 314 314 315 316 317 317 318 321 321 Page 16 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 2 File Selection 3 3 Field Selection 3 4 Table Selection 3 5 Converting a File 3 6 Saving the converted file 4 HELP AND EXIT 4 1 Quick Help amp Program Status 4 2 Online Help 4 3 Exit TSM USER GUIDE PART 16 ACTIVE NLPG 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 NLPG Data Format 1 2 Settings in the Provider ini File 2 NLPGIMPORT 3 USING THE UPRN AS A LOCATOR IN TSM TSM USER GUIDE PART 17 ACTIVE ADDRESS GENERATOR 1 INTRODUCTION 2 MATCHING DATA WITH STREET ADDRESSES 3 SAVING THE FILE TSM USER GUIDE PART 18 ACTIVE LIFESTYLE DATA 1 INTRODUCTION 2 UPDATING THE LIFESTYLE DATABASE 3 TAGGING YOUR OWN DATA 3 1 Input File Format Confidential www activeinformatics com ACTIVE bringing Goto 322 323 324 327
116. Next and the first data table is displayed e Click Next Table to view more tables e Click Prev Table to go back to previously viewed tables j i Cick Prev Tadig or Next Table buttons to wew available taties Gick Delito to parmanentiy remove the current table e Click Delete followed by Yes to remove a table from TSM see 1 6 below e Click Exit to quit e Answer Yes to the question Do you want to process another file to continue or No to quit the program Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 307 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 1 3 File Format Any file you wish to import must be in the following format 1 First row should contain Column Headings 2 Second and subsequent rows should contain the data e g OA Names or Codes Data1 Data2 etc IMPORTANT Numbers should be represented without commas in data especially if you are using a CSV format file e g 1024 NOT 1 024 Format the appropriate columns in the CSV file so that the numbers have the Use 1000 separator unchecked 1 4 Data Restrictions The data should not be delimited by quotes and therefore no commas should be used in the titles of Rows or Columns N B Indices allows blank records in the data replacing them with zeroes Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 308 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato
117. S Excel Export 1 7 Export to CSV File 1 8 Export Eastings amp Northings Confidential www activeinformatics com Q bringing Goto 158 158 159 162 162 163 163 164 164 166 166 167 167 167 167 168 169 171 171 171 172 173 174 180 183 183 Page 10 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 9 Printing from other parts of TSM Z STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 2 1 Copy and paste into MS PowerPoint m 2 2 Create a CSV file and re import a sub set of the original data 2 3 Tag data with ref areas easting and northing TSM USER GUIDE PART 8 AREA GROUPS 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 What are Area Groups 2 CREATING AREA GROUPS 2 1 Select a definition 2 2 Area Definition Name 2 3 Structure of Area Hierarchy 2 4 Area Definitions 2 5 Rename Definitions 2 6 Define the Area 2 7 Alternative Area Selection Methods 2 8 Saving Area Definitions 2 9 Copy Area Groups 2 10 Reset the Map 2 11 Area Groups Check Box 3 AREA SELECTION TOOLS 4 AREA DIRECTORY 4 1 Atomic Area 4 2 Area Selection List 4 3 Switch All On Off 5 DISTRICTS AND WARDS AREA GROUP Confidential www activeinformatics com ACTIVE bringing Goto 184 185 185 185 185 186 188 188 189 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 195 196 196 197 198 199 199 200 200 202 Page 11 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 6 STEP BY STEP FREQ
118. STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 15 1 Setting stats band values 15 2 Percentage comparisons 15 3 Hot spots Continuous Surface Mapping 15 4 Working out Population Density TSM USER GUIDE PART 11 BOUNDARIES 1 INTRODUCTION 2 LOADING BOUNDARIES 3 DEFAULT PROPERTIES 3 1 Current Boundary Set 3 2 Hierarchy and Display Switches Light Bulbs 3 3 Boundary Structure and Display Switches Confidential www activeinformatics com bringing Goto 228 229 230 232 232 232 235 241 241 242 242 244 244 245 248 248 248 248 249 250 252 253 254 254 255 256 Page 13 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 4 Pop Up Menus 257 4 INDIVIDUAL PROPERTIES 258 4 1 Property Grid 259 4 2 Tochange the font 260 5 CREATE A NEW BOUNDARY SET 261 5 1 Renaming a Boundary Set 262 5 2 Rename Level 262 5 3 Create New Level 262 5 4 Create a Boundary Group 263 5 5 Create a Boundary Beneath the Current Group 263 5 6 The Centroid 264 5 7 Create Boundary Outline Draw 264 6 CALCULATION AND THEMATIC 267 6 1 Datasets 267 6 2 Modify by 268 6 3 Result Formula 268 6 4 Calculate 268 6 5 Displaying the Stats on the Map 269 6 6 Band Values 269 6 7 Printing the Calc And Theme Banding Key 270 6 8 Show Hide Results Sheet 270 6 9 Results Sheet Tools 271 6 10 Clear Dataset Cards 271 7 MAKE USER POLY 272 8 SAVE BOUNDARY SETTINGS 273 9 EXPORTS AND BOUNDARY SETS 274 Con
119. Selected area counts e Select using multiple area polygon tool above Text and Fill the cluster of Output Areas that best fit your target area e Alternatively if you have created a hotspot map in Compare right click on the band colours to select all areas in that band e Click on the double arrows in the top right of the card stack to reveal the Area Directory Right click and Switch ALL the Output Areas off to leave the ones you ve selected filled with hatching Click the Plus button left to add back in the Output Areas you selected above Click the equals button Go to the Reference Tab Select CAS Table 1 Age by Sex and Resident Type The All People cell top left represents the total population On the right hand side of the Reference Tab select Display counts by selected areas The All People cell top left now represents the population of the Area Group Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 203 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Part 9 Reference Areas and Census Data Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 205 2 CENSUS CATEGORIES 206 2 1 Census Tables 207 2 2 Data Selection 208 2 2 1 Separating the Cells 209 2 2 2 Edit Card Details 209 2 2 3 Clear Cell Set 210 2 2 4 Select Reference Data Set 210 2 2 5 Reference Data for a Selected Area 211 2 3 Saving to the Library 212 2 4 Export to Excel 213 3 ANALYSING DEPRIVATION DATA 214 3 1 Crea
120. Syrtun West 2704 The Wokts 2704 Thureneston ZOA Wreake Villages 1773 Billesdosn 1723 Bosworth 1723 Broughton Asthey Astley 1773 Broughton Astey 1723 Broughton Astay 1723 Broughton Astley Sutton TI Dumon 1773 Flectne Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 227 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 12 5Summed The summed feature when checked on adds up all of the information in the base data and uses the total as part of the comparison equation e g Sum of all selected wards Comparison Figures cand E E nak AAR i Count Sum of selected Wards 486394 Acock s Green 1739 siCiA 1 Sum of selected Wards 486394 Eton 1295 Tt Therefore when it is checked off the core data dragged from the temporary card stack is used as a whole e g Sum of individual ward N B The summed feature is set to off by default oa 1295 N B This feature can only be used when viewing the statistics in show over base mode not counts Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 228 of 389 February 2015 bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE 12 6 Comparing Two Data Sets For example if we intend to compare two sets of census data A All households where people over 65 years of age live see chapter 9 B The total number of households and look at B expressed as a percentage of A in
121. UENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 6 1 How to create an area group 6 2 Using Area Groups with Reference 6 3 Selected area counts TSM USER GUIDE PART 9 REFERENCE AREAS AND CENSUS DATA 7 INTRODUCTION 8 CENSUS CATEGORIES 8 1 Census Tables 8 2 Data Selection 8 3 Saving to the Library 8 4 Export to Excel 9 ANALYSING DEPRIVATION DATA 9 1 Creating Deprivation Maps 10 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 10 1 Run a census query and display it 10 2 Select an area 10 3 Print export compare table and key TSM USER GUIDE PART 10 COMPARISONS AND STATS 11 INTRODUCTION 11 1 Show Data card 11 2 Show Counts Only Mode 12 COMPARISON 12 1 Base Data card 12 2 Base Area Setting 12 3 Show over base Mode 12 4 Display areas by Confidential www activeinformatics com bringing Goto 203 203 203 203 204 205 206 207 208 212 213 214 214 218 218 218 218 219 221 222 223 224 224 224 225 226 Page 12 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 12 5 Summed 12 6 Comparing Two Data Sets 12 7 Statistical Banding 12 8 Turning Bands Off And On 12 9 Clear Show and Base Data Cards 12 10 Map Colours 12 11 Education Mapping 12 12 Display Statistics Button 12 13 Copy Comparison Figures Table to Clipboard 13 AUTO GRID 13 1 Creating a Hotspot Map with Auto grid 14 CONTINUOUS SURFACE MAPPING 14 1 Creating a Hotspot Map with CSM 14 2 How CSM Works 15 STEP BY
122. User Manual February 2015 2 11 Area Groups Check Box e Switch on the Area Groups layer red text at the top of the map under Reference Areas to display your new group on the map Note that when Area Groups is clicked the card stack in the top right hand side of the screen pre supposing the full extent of the Map Display is also visible has been overlaid with the Area Directory see below Just above this directory box note a pick list this has Catchment in it for example immediately to the right of a title box saying Display areas by In a typical installation the selections of Counties Districts Wards and Output areas will be possible using the LADs or DISTRICTS AND WARDS area group The Display areas by is set to the lowest level of the hierarchy by default e g Wards or Output Areas e Click the down arrow to the right and note the different methods by which Area Groups can be displayed e Left click on the OUTPUT AREAS option in the pick list e The map display will change and show output areas across each coloured separately Display areas by Output Areas Broadclyst 18UBGR0001 Broadclyst 18UBGR0002 Broadclyst 18UBGR0003 Broadclyst 18UBGR0004 Broadclyst 18UBGR0005 Broadclyst 18UBGR0006 Broadclyst 18UBGR0007 Broadclyst 18UBGR0008 Broadclyst 18UBGR0009 Broadclyst 18UBGR0010 E Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 197 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q
123. User Manual February 2015 britain dake 2 9 Copy Area Groups You can copy area groups e g DISTRICTS AND WARDS or LADs and edit them This makes it easier for you to create smaller groups of wards or output areas for analysing data at a detailed local level and will speed up use of the Compare function e Click the Copy button on the Area Group Design tab e Type anew name the default is prefixed with Copy of e Go back to the list of Available Area Groups and click on the new copy to select it e Click on the Area Group Design button to edit the copy N B Area Group colours are based on the dot colour scheme This means that you can also change the colours in the Configuration utility program making your maps distinctive and easier to read see Chapter 13 Active Configuration 2 10 Reset the Map Before proceeding go to the Map tab and reset the Map Display as follows e Make sure all the area covered by the Map Display is in view by clicking once on the Cancel Zoom tool above the map e Remove any Dot Map that is still displayed by clicking on the Activity Check box in the Map Display panel to remove the X Statistics National Grid e Turn off all Key Site symbols e Remove any displayed polygons by double clicking the Polygon tool so that the polygon name changes to lt none gt Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 196 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3
124. User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to life 14 2 3 Band Interval uses Mean Cell Value The Band Interval uses Mean Cell value option adds up all the cell values divides by the total numbers of cells and uses the result to set the interval between the bands N B If you choose not to use the mean cell value the system may create a map with a fewer hotspots similar to auto grid Right click on the text Cont Surface Map to turn this feature on or off 14 2 4 Editing the Statistical Bands The statistical banding panel shows from and to range values six or seven or bands by default with a colour for each band This is the key to the thematic map setting out the range of values which each colour represents ee a f i Seo 14 2 5 Increase the Number of Bands e To increase the number of bands thereby decreasing the interval and automatically changing the from and to value of each band click any of the numbers in squares down the left hand side 1 to 16 Click the yellow redraw pencil to refresh the display The effect of changing from 6 default bands up to 16 see example below is to reduce the number of hotspots overall while creating a more subtle shift in the colours around each hotspot that remains e Similarly to decrease the number of bands click on a lower number and redraw to refresh the display Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 246 of 38
125. User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 15Step By Step Frequently Used Functions 15 1 Setting stats band values Run an Activity data query Drag and drop the query card to the card stack the temporary store Click on the Compare tab and drag the query card from the card stack to the Show Data card Click the equals button Open up the Statistical Banding section click on the number 16 down the left hand side and redraw the map e Edit the interval value e g halve it and increase the number of bands to reveal more hotspots on the map e Edit the lower value to 1 and redraw to eliminate any areas with a zero value from the map These will not be filled with any colour e Edit the upper value and halve it to limit the number of bands and give more contrast between the colours on the map 15 2 Percentage comparisons Run an Activity data query Drag and drop the query card to the card stack the temporary store Go to the Reference Tab Select CAS Table 1 Usual Resident Population KS101EW The All categories Sex cell top left represents the total population of your region Drag and drop the query card to the card stack the temporary store Go to the Compare tab Drag and drop the Activity data query into Show Data Drag and drop the Census data query into Base Data Set the Statistics Mode to Show over base Set the Base Area to Output Areas Click the equals button t
126. VE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 2 Area Selection List e Before moving onto analyse Reference data click once on the double up arrow facing up at the extreme top right hand corner of the screen which will return the card stack to the front of the Area Group Directory In turn remove the image of the area selected although this action has not disturbed any of the settings so far made e The area selection list can be turned back on again by clicking on the double down arrow next to the word all at the extreme right hand corner of the screen 4 3 Switch All On Off Entire Area Groups can be switched on off with a simple right click action which removes the need for multiple clicks on each entry in the list Display areas by Qutput Areas All All Outpt Teel Elf unita Switch all ON 6vraA A Switch all OFF Switch all below ON Switch all below OFF Aylestone 0OGANY 0004 Aylestone OOGANYO005 Aylestone OOGANYO006 Aylestone OOGANYOOO7 Aylestone 00GANYO008 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 200 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Sj ACTIVE Tatai Sodstien Mapping Fat Aves IOI Conas Cota Serian 23037010 60123 g ae ge a ZENH euim n J O Rain Gey M Perey asis Setheverte M Tent EFi Raster amp Vector Secondary raras Ware feateren I7 Reference Aroan
127. X 57 1 1 Designing Databases 57 1 2 How should the data be formatted 57 1 2 1 File format 57 1 2 2 Double Quotes 57 1 2 3 Extra commas 58 1 2 4 Maximum number of rows per file 58 1 3 Data Cleansing 59 2 DATABASE DESIGN WIZARD 60 2 1 Stage 1 Selecting files 60 2 2 Stage 2 Naming the database 61 2 3 Stage 3 Field Definition 62 2 4 Stage 4 Selecting Search Fields 63 2 5 Previewing the Data 64 2 6 Too many unique values warning message 65 2 7 Importing Education Learner Data Example 66 2 8 Importing Ambulance Mobilisation Data Example 68 3 DATABASE IMPORT 70 3 1 Importing Data after Using the Wizard 70 3 2 Reject File 72 3 3 Database List 72 3 4 Overwriting Existing Files 73 3 5 Appending Data 73 3 6 Deleting Database Types and Files 74 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 55 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 EDITING amp CREATING DATABASE DESIGNS 75 4 1 Manual Database Designs 75 4 2 Copy a Database Type 76 4 3 Field Definition 76 4 4 Whole number fields 77 4 5 Text Fields 78 4 6 Easting and Northing Locators 78 4 7 Date Fields 79 4 8 Time fields 79 4 9 Onor After Function 80 4 10 Postcode Locator 80 5 QUERY SCREEN DESIGN 1 5 1 Range Criteria 81 5 2 Selection Lists 81 5 3 Redesign the Query Writer 83 6 IMPORTING DATA MANUALLY 34 7 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 85 7 1 Standard Data Clean Up Methods CSV files 85 7 2 Multiple Locators 85 7 3 Re
128. a esa OS S Code 11 Text Elective Waiting List Database cee Convert File Code Text 12 EsScive HOOKEUN 1313 Ejeciive Piarnnod 16 21 22 123 a4 125 128 31 J2 3g 81 Aha nomeg 82 her Satees born m Dest 83 Iher Saters Dorm on way 88 whe Quick Help Lis cl codes of selected table Program Status Type new test for thes code and cick on Update Daaba to edt code Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 319 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 2 3 Deleting Codes To delete a code click on the Table to select it Click the Delete button Click the Code you want to delete Click the Delete button again Click Update Database Click the OK button to delete the code or Cancel to quit OK to delete code F 2 2 4 Deleting Tables e To delete a table click on the Table to select it e Click on the Table Delete button Table Manipulation ____ Table Add Delete e Click on OK to delete the table or Cancel to quit OK to delete table Sex Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 320 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 Converting files using the tables 3 1 File Format The file you wish to convert MUST be COMMA separated and the first record in the file MUST contain the heading i e the names of the fields separated by commas
129. a SOA or Scottish Data zone DZ code to enable hotspot mapping in TSM If unsure leave all the options highlighted Data Tagging PN Highlight the Reference Area Sets you would like to tag the data against All existing destination databases will be overwritten Do you wish to continue 20041 Census Wards 7004 ID SOAs D s5 e Click OK to import the data into the design you created A pop up appears when TSM starts generating the new database file It is possible to quit the import process at this stage for example if lots of records are rejected as Bad Data by clicking Cancel Database import Generating new database Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 70 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Providing you accept any warning messages by clicking OK see above the data will be imported into TSM with an indication of the Current record updated by increments of 100 during the import Good Bad data and Unknown Locator e g missing incorrect Eastings and Northings or postcodes The example below shows that of the 503 965 records in the original CSV file there are e 503 852 imported records Good e 30 rejected records Bad Data including the header row for which TSM has no further use e 83 Unknown Locators TIP If you get lots of postcodes or Eastings and Northings that are good but o
130. activeinformatics com Page 326 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 Help and Exit 4 1 Quick Help amp Program Status When the mouse pointer moves over any window or control that is part of the Active application the Quick Help panel bottom left corner of the screen will display a short help message describing the object beneath the mouse pointer Quick Help Convert the selected file creating new file Program Status Finished Conversion When performing a multistage map function e g adding a new code to a table the Program Status panel below Quick Help will display help messages describing the current stage and what to do next Quick Help Select text file and Fields Program Status 5 elect Test File to Convert select Table or Add new table 4 2 Online Help Clicking the Help button launches the online help pages offering more detailed descriptions of the features of Active Alias 4 3 Exit Clicking this button closes the program down and removes the Active Alias window from the screen Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 327 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Part 16 Active NLPG ACTIVE bein cang doto Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 NLPG Data Format 1 2 Settings in the Provider ini File 2 NLPG IMPORT 3 USING THE UPRN AS A LOCATOR IN TSM Confidential www activeinformati
131. aining the word lt none gt and click the desired polygon name e Press the Delete key the keyboard e The following message appears Polygon delete ann e Click OK to delete the polygon permanently TIP You can turn a user hand drawn polygon into a boundary by right clicking on it This gives you the opportunity to use all the additional features in the Boundaries tab e g naming and colouring export activity data to excel and statistics to analyse data within the area of the polygon see chapter 11 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 140 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 7 Activity Record List The Activity Record List button enables you to drill down into the detailed records that make up a query If you have drawn or displayed a polygon on the map see above the record list will contain only records that sit within the polygon i e related to the dots you have drawn around To access the Activity Record List e Click the Activity List button top right of the Activity Toolbox e A table will appear over the top of the map showing the detailed records for the query e Use the scroll bars move left and right across the table e There are also buttons on the right hand side of the table that enable you to page up and down the list as well as go to the first or last record e The range of records e g 1 to 39 and the total for the query or polygon if o
132. ameters you originally input on the Query Writer and any Colour By theme you applied before saving it Click Execute on the Query Writer to re run the query p Description c program files act Data Census2001WARD Save Activity by IncidentType c program files act Data Census2001 WARD Load Chimney Fires 010412 c program files act Data Census2001WARD Incident data 010612 c program files act Data Census2001WARD Work in progress 101012 c program files act Data Census2001VWARD Delete G lose Show errors amp warning Now When they occur during load X Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 120 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato 2 6 Delete a query from the database library To delete a previously saved query e Click the Library button top right of the Activity Tab The Query Writer appears left e Select the relevant query from the list e Click the Delete button for example in this case Activity by Incident Type Description c program files act Data Census2001WARD Save Activity by IncidentType c program files act Data Census2001WARD Load Chimney Fires 010412 c program files act Data Census2001VWARD Incident data 010612 c program files actiData Census2001WARD Work in progress 101012 c program files act Data Census2001WARD Delete Close Show errors amp warning Now When they occur du
133. ancel commands will be also enabled 2 2 1 Add Tables and Codes Manually Click on the Table Add button to create a new table Key in the Table Name e g Sex Click on Update Database With the new table selected click on the Code Add button Key in the new Code e g 1 Key in the Text description e g Male Click on Update Database Repeat steps 4 7 with the other codes you wish to include e g 2 Female etc tO Oh I A Active Alias Hed 8d A Fiekts n File Tables AdrressionMethodCodes Eit SpecahCodes TSM Halp oe total solution mapping Table Marpulaton rahe add Delete Code Add Ede Delete Import Code 2 Text Female Select no Update Cancel File Cancel Database as 7 Seecton Convert File Fieids Total Records Converted Pan Converted No Coewersion Quick Help Test held to routed toot dexcepeon of code Program Statua Insert new Code and Tee baue chching Update Database Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 318 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato 2 2 2 Edit Table Codes e With a table selected click the Edit button to change descriptions of the individual fields in the table e Click on the code in question and change the Text description in the panel above it e Click Update Database to save and exit the table A TSM c Help total solution mapping Table Manipulation pega
134. and drop the Reference card on top of one that is already occupied this will overwrite the contents of the card and lose the data previously stored Note that Reference data appears in grey whilst activity data appears in red to help avoid confusing cards with the same title 8 2 3 Clear Cell Set e Click the Clear Set button immediately to the left of the Reference Card This will remove the green ticks which had been placed in the appropriate cell on the census table although at this stage the Card title will remain the same N B Clicking on the New button to the right of the Reference card will not only remove the cell codes and green ticks but will also change the card title to the default Reference Data 8 2 4 Select Reference Data Set e To generate the second set of Reference data return to the spreadsheet and make a series of selections by left clicking once in the cell All categories Household composition Dne person One person One family One family One family One family One family categories household household only All only only only only Household Aged 65 amp aged 65 amp Married or Married or Married or Cohabiting over same sex same sex same sex couple No civil civil civil children partnership partnership partnership couple No couple couple All children Dependent children children non dependent 56094 P5764 43292 65317 T0644 31000 There should now be a g
135. and select a symbol from the table below right Click Next The data is then imported into the database design The Key Sites can then be displayed by using the icon above the map top left corner of the map Key Site Import Wizard Stage Sof 5 Set Key Site Type Name and Allocate Symbol Please erler ihe Key Site Type Name and then select an icon torn the grid Key Site Type Mame Stations Allocate Symbol lt eK PrE Bt e t H ee qP 4 be eh iH ae lt lt Prev Next gt gt Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 151 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 3 Create Key Sites Manually To add a single key site manually e g your place of work or a headquarters 3 1 Name the database e Click the Add edit design of site Database button the green triangle and yellow ruler e Type name of the site under Site Type and click OK bottom left Site Type Site DB design Auxiliary fields E l Legend Caption Display Legend Caption Display Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 152 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Q ACTIVE bringing dato to ifa 3 2 Add a key site record e Click on Edit Site Database button 4 left at the top e Click the New button at the bottom e Type the name of the site in the box next to Name e Type the postcode of the site e g Hea
136. ange the fill colour of the object Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 290 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 2 4 4 Change the Symbol Centre Point e To change the Centre position of the symbol click on the Centre checkbox below the image in the Drawing Area and a large cross will be displayed on the symbol indicating the current position of the centre e g the base of a pin symbol or the edge of coastal key sites that touch dry land Pxzobect M Centre 917 41 49 e Click elsewhere to the required position e g somewhere within the solid rectangle at the bottom of the symbol and click The cross in the checkbox will be removed and the cross on the symbol will disappear e By clicking on the checkbox again the new position will be displayed 2 4 5 Save the new symbol Before completing the edits by saving the new symbol to a file the new symbol can be reviewed on the maps the scaling changed if required by following the instructions above To save the new symbol e Click on the FILE menu and select SAVE AS e A standard dialogue box will appear allowing the new name TESTNEW ASB to be input as the file name N B The name can have a maximum of 50 characters e Click on the Save button to save the new symbol Save site symbol as Save Ir J Symbols aa a8 Airport asb A Crossbr asb a Crossdr asb Save az type Site symbol fil
137. ange the override values N B This affects the map display only If a colour or style box is greyed out the item reverts to its individual default value see Section 4 below The box icons represent optional override values which enable colours and styles on the map to be set for all boundary items at the given level When set these override the values that are stored individually within each boundary item To reverse this option simply select the lt individual gt default values instead Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 255 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 3 Boundary Structure and Display Switches This panel contains a tree structure which shows all boundary items in the set regardless of the display settings e If the left hand icon for the boundary set at the top e g Isochrones in the example below contains three red dots this indicates that the set comprises several sub levels e g counties districts and wards e When you left click the box and redraw the red dots appear and the set will be displayed on the map Ei e The left hand icon of a lower group level e g a district has the three red dots as well indicating that it also contains sub levels e g wards but may also a blue dot to indicate that it has an outline of its own a A H 1991 Census Boundaries HEEF 1996 HA Boundaries AP ivf 1999 LA County Boundaries H EJE 1998
138. ant help page will be displayed for the current toolbox 1 3 Context Help Selecting this item causes Active to enter context sensitive help mode as described below in section 2 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 50 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato to ie 1 4 About Selecting this item launches the Active copyright window and web link bottom right N B this window must be closed with any keystroke or by left or right clicking anywhere on this window before continuing you session TSM total solution mapping www activeinformatics com Active Total Solution Mapping Version 9 1 35 Copyright 1994 2012 Active Informatics This copy of Active Total Solution Mapping is Licensed to ACTIVE CONSULTANCY SYSTEM whose unique licence number is demo Warning This computer programme is protected by copyright law Unauthorised reproduction or distribution of this program in part or in whole may result in severe civil or criminal penalty which will be prosecuted to the maximum extent under law Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 51 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 2 Context Sensitive Help Clicking the question mark button to the extreme top right causes Active to enter a point and click context sensitive helo mode that allows you to pint to any part of the screen for which you want h
139. aption Field Id Incident Type Buttons Counts Fieldid Fieldid Fieldid x x x x All the other fields should be set as selection lists in the same manner as above You can configure up to 16 range boxes on the Query Writer You can also configure up to 4 selection list fields in each of up to 16 list boxes giving you a maximum number of 64 fields available However in practice you will only be able to select one field in each box at a time when you come to write your query TIP Keep the Execute button and Colour By area clear as you will need these functions when you write queries When all the criteria selections have been made and the query template built as desired the design is saved by clicking the Save button thereby forming the Query Writer An example of a completed Query Writer is shown below You should now import some data into your completed database design see section 6 below 7 a gp ee m l a 0 Kaanan en meee Type Range Crimeia 3 z jat i Fa a La Ka kon j Atep Boundary Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 82 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 3 Redesign the Query Writer It is possible to change the size and position of the boxes on the Query Writer at any time you wish without having to re import your data This provides extra flexibility for the database design meaning that important field
140. ard Sizing mode Smooth Proportiona Standard dot size Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 122 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 3 3 Size by Geo group This function allows the size of the dots to be changed based on how many records sit at the same location on the map relative to all other dot locations To select this function Click on the Sizing button at the top of the Activity Toolbox Click on the Dot sizing drop down list at the top Select option By Geo group Move the Dot size for largest geo group scroll bar bottom right up to increase the size of the largest dot The number of records this largest dot represents is shown in brackets e The Sizing Mode defaults to Smooth Proportional meaning that the dot will grow larger automatically depending on the number of records at that location e Click OK to refresh the Map and show the new size of dots The example below shows the smallest dot representing 1 record and the largest dot representing 3279 records All the sizes in between will be configured automatically by TSM Activity dot sizing _ Sizing mode Smooth Proportional Dot size for single Dot size for largest activity geo group 3279 ae Cancel N B The smallest single dot size cannot be made larger than the largest geo group dot Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 123 of 3
141. ary 2015 10Step By Step Frequently Used Functions 10 1 Run a census query and display it Go to the Reference Tab Select CAS Table 3 Household Composition KS105EW The All People cell top left represents the total population Drag and drop the query card to the card stack the temporary store Click on the Compare tab and drag the query card from the card stack to the Show Data card Click the equals button Open up the Statistical Banding section click on the number 16 down the left hand side and redraw the map Edit the interval value e g halve it to reveal more red areas on the map e Redraw the map 10 2Select an area Run an Activity data query Drag and drop the query card to the card stack the temporary store Click on the Compare tab and drag the query card from the card stack to the Show Data card Click the equals button Open up the Statistical Banding section click on the number 16 down the left hand side and redraw the map Edit the interval value e g halve it to reveal more red areas on the map e Select using single area or multiple area picker buttons some Output Areas that are coloured Red amp Orange representing the upper end of the Statistical Banding e Click on the double arrows in the top right of the card stack to reveal the Area Directory e Right click on the text ALL Output Areas and select Switch all OFF to leave the ones you ve se
142. as been built you can use the UPRN codes as an alternative to Eastings and Northings grid references to locate data on the map as dots This may be more accurate than a traditional grid reference In future the incident locator of choice for Fire Service Regional Control will be the UPRN Adding NLPG to your TSM system means that all data will be compliant with regional control regulations e First of all your data should have a UPRN number in a separate column as per the example below e Next open TSM and go to the DB Design tab C J F S H inoden No Incident Type incicent Sud Type m Northing Date fima initial Type 2 751012 Spec Sery Emergency Spec Sery Emergency 10001239701 376394 398389 04 01 2001 14 22 56 99 SSC MISCELLANEOUS 3 74011 Spec Serv Emergercy Spec Serv Emergency 10001235703 389013 390008 22 02 2001 16 20 58 99 SSC MISCELLANEOUS 3 31344032 Spec Sery Emergency Spec Sery Eriergency 10001239721 384899 396199 23 04 2003 19 54 59 99 SSC MISCELLANEOUS 13390031 Spec Serv Emergency Spec Sery Emergency 10001239725 395485 395805 5 2003 12 07 48 17 SEWER WORKINGS 16654011 False Alarm Good intent False Alarm Good intent 10001239730 383097 385882 20 07 2001 2 15 32 558 PERSON LOCKED IN OUT EMER 49336012 False Alarm Good intent False Alarm Good Intent 10001239732 364175 411589 27 07 2001 23 20 26 F04 FIRE ALARM 14907021 Spex Serv Energerny Spex Sery Emergency 10001239733 384781 412996 24 03 2002 10 03 07 557 WATER RELATED I
143. astings 387559 to 572559 Sutton Bonington Delete Sutton Bridge Delete Northings 229671 to 414671 Sutton Cheney Sutton Coldfield Sutton Crosses Sutton in Ashfield Help Exit Sutton Lane Ends Sutt S A AAR Quick help Select from the list of names to view the details Sutton St Edmund Sutton St James Sutton under Brailes Placename Zoom Eastings 468703 Low 0 Northings 384626 High 21 Update e f you just type the first few letters of a place name and click Find then the system will find all names beginning with those letter s as in the example above With a place name selected the information of its positioning on the map Eastings and Northings and at what level of zoom the wording is visible at can also be seen and edited in the Results panel in the top right of the screen Placename Zoom Eastings 421704 Low 0 Northings 217371 High 101 Update Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 302 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato e To edit the existing Easting Northing and zoom values simply place the cursor in the any of the white boxes below the title that you want to edit You can now overtype any of the details N B Zoom values should be set 1km above the maximum map size at which you want them to appear e g if your map size is 100km set the zoom value for the placename is set to 101km e To save the changes simp
144. ata to an open Word document press NO and a new document Is created ActiveProvider E3 Do you wish to write the report in the currently active Word document ACTIVE Help doc Press YES to insert the report at the current cursor postion Press NO to open a new document for the report Press CANCEL to abadon the report Export to Microsoft Word Please wait while the report is generated lf anew document was created because Word was not already running when the OK button was pressed or you don t wish to write to a currently open document a Save File As Word dialog box will be shown to prompt you to save the file see example below Views BR New Folder Date modified Type Census2001 WARD 02 01 2013 15 07 File Folder P 1D2004 10 12 2012 16 20 File Folder L Reject 02 11 2012 16 37 File Folder Name Favorite Links d Templates Recent Places Desktop jii Computer Documents Recently Changed More Folders A b p File name Active docd Save as type Word Document docx v Authors edr Tags Add a tag F Save Thumbnail Hide Folders Tools v 1 5 7 Cancel Button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 177 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto If this button is pressed the form is removed from the screen and no further action is taken If the button is pressed while the report is being generated a war
145. ay be used to represent any type of geographic locations such as Local Authority Wards Education Catchments Health Authority Boundaries Ambulance Zones Fire Brigade Station Grounds operational areas etc 1996 HA Boundaries Display Outline Fill Stats Name Area Health SE EEL Cad Cal AMM 9G Ca Ga Gad ad District E CAs 1996 HA Boundaries m M H Angla and Oxford aj South Thames 3 South and Wrest m North and Mid Hampshire e Portsmouth and South East Hampshire e Southampton and South West Hampshire ff fag Wiltshire g Cs 1998 LA County Boundaries H A HAMPSHIRE COUNTY c F a SURREY COUNTY E m Ea WEST SUSSEX COUNTY Pog WILTSHIRE COUNTY H E 1998 LA Other Boundaries Properties MS Tetpot O Owie Offset zoom EN Min Max South and West WIM 0 0 1 0 Om 50km Area 725375943850 0 0 1 0 Om 50km gion Code 06 ME 0 0 0 0 0m 2000km Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 252 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 2 Loading Boundaries Boundaries can be loaded when required which improves the load time enabling you to start using them quickly By right clicking the blank Boundary Structure panel then select Load Boundaries you will see a list to choose from Hold down the CTRL key and left click to select several boundary sets to load if required Click OK twice to load and start using the boundary sets Right cl
146. bands of 1000s Join n to next z m Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 106 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato to ifa 3 8 Time of Week Bands Time fields can be set up so that they follow on from Date fields using On or After see Chapter 3 When you colour the query by Time and set the Banding Method to Time of Week this enables you to choose bands representing mornings and afternoons defaulting to 00 00 00 to 11 59 59 and 12 00 00 to 23 59 59 for each day of the week In the example below Call Time is linked to Call Date and we can see the default morning and afternoon Time of Week bands Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 107 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto 4 Query Result 4 1 Execute Query e Click the Execute button at the bottom right hand corner of the Query Writer e As the query is run the Percentage Completion status bar is shown at the bottom of the Query Writer e Once the query has run a list of numbers coloured dots check boxes and text descriptions will appear on the Activity Toolbox e These represent the Activity Query Set generated by the query for example a breakdown of the different items in the Incident Type list see below Poly Total Activity by d c program 3398 IX Chimney Fire 36992x False Alarm Good Intent 32290 False Alarm Malicious 1263804 FDR1 Fire 26430x Overborder
147. be quite large Some printers may require additional memory or postscript fonts to be able to handle these files 1 2 Print Set Up At the top of the Print Toolbox click on the Print Setup button to launch the standard MS Windows Print Setup dialog box Print Setup EA ES Printer Name SLODDON HP4M Properties Status Ready Type HP Lasewet 4M Where BidirectionalPrinter Plotter Comment Paper Orientation Size Ad v Portrait Source Automatically Select x Landscape 4 Network Cancel e From here select a printer or plotter from those available the paper size and orientation and any other factor that will affect the print e When selections in Print Set up have been concluded the Printer Paper and its orientation will be displayed Below this will be seen a preview of the page in the orientation selected Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 171 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 3 Print Content At the base of the Print Toolbox is the Print Content panel as shown above Control the page layout as follows e Click on the Title Check Box next to the title of you organisation name will appear and a box is seen on the page image above to show where the title will appear on the printed page This name can be edited or deleted by clicking in the text box in Print Content and typing in a new title If a
148. becomes active allowing you to select the fields to be included in the export e Hold down the CTRL key and left click to select individual fields as shown below N B If no specific fields are selected then ALL fields will be exported to MS Excel by default gt Pumpiurmber Cat leci antType leci ontTypeCode Raf Area Code amp Desc Geographic Locator Select tems tor export TIP If MS Excel is not already open it will be opened and the items selected exported to a new workbook once the records have been extracted You are invited to save the information and then exit from MS Excel if required If the items are exported to MS Excel which is already open then a new workbook is created and the items exported to this book once the records have been extracted Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 181 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 1 6 2 Export Reference Area Codes and Names Reference Area Names and Codes can also be appended to data when you export it to Excel MS Access9 7 and CSV files This enables you to identify which ward or output area a record sits within quickly thus improving ward and output area analysis Just check the box to add these columns to your output file Ref Area Code 4 Desc 1 6 3 Geographic Locators This option tags creates two additional columns in the output file containing the grid references Easting and
149. ble 1 5 16 Unwanted Columns in the Activity List More data than is needed may be included in the Activity List table Unwanted columns can be removed by first selecting the column by moving to the top of it until the mouse cursor becomes a down arrow and then pressing the left mouse button or placing the cursor in the unwanted column and selecting Select Column from the Table menu The column is deleted by selecting Delete Columns from the Table menu The table can then be resized to fit across the width of the page by selecting the Cell Height and Width command from the Table menu choosing the Column tab of the dialog box that appears and pressing the AutoF it button 1 5 16 1 Font Styles All text is written in the Normal style except the Reference Data table which is written in six point Times New Roman font Writing the Reference Data Table in this font ensures that if the table is written in the landscape mode page orientation the text in every Reference Data table appears correctly without words being split To change the font in the Reference Data table back to Normal the table should be selected by pressing Select Table on the Table menu then selecting Normal as the style on the toolbar By editing the Normal style using the Style command on the Format menu the appearance of the whole report can be changed 1 5 17 Unframed Items
150. bringing dato Click the Revert button at any time to start again from scratch At this stage if you click on another tab without completing the design the following message appears i A Database Definition appears to have been entered Do you want to save the Definition Click Yes to continue or No to abandon the design 4 2 Copy a Database Type To copy a database type e Select a type from the list of Database Definitions e Overtype the DB type Id General and Print titles e Click the Save button to the right to preserve the new database name e Import some data manually see section 6 4 3 Field Definition Field Definitions will be input in any order but the final order must follow the order of columns in the CSV or TXT file you wish to import As arule e Names and Descriptions or any other field that includes alpha characters should be set up as TEXT fields e Age Money and Number fields should be set up as whole numbers e Date and Time fields have a pre defined type see below e Postcode Easting Northing locator fields also use pre defined types Once you ve entered all the field definitions the up and down arrow buttons bottom right of the list of fields Field definitions Query Screen Design J incwentNumber AB incidentType AG CallTime can be used to move the definitions to the order required see example below To enter the field definitions e Cli
151. ck the New button to the right of the Field definitions option Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 76 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto e Field Type select the format for the first column of data in the file you wish to import by left clicking on the pick list of field format options to the right hand side see individual details below Field Id EG Field Definitio Field Type Text E OK import width ML Whole number Field Id No with tdp 9 No with 2dp 99 No with 3dp 999 Text width Postcode Locator O S Sheet Ref _Eastings metres Full name 4 4 Whole number fields Click the New button to the right of the field definitions check box If you select the type the following will then be displayed 171 Whole number field Field Definition Field Type Whole number OK Import width 0 Field id AA Full name Incident Number Fill in the rest of the boxes as follows e Import width This must be set to O zero if you are going to import a comma separated file e g CSV or TXT file You would only enter a value for character length if the file contains fixed length fields e Field Id e g AA e Fullname e g Incident Number e Click OK to save the field definition and continue TIP An Age field could be set up as a TEXT field type if you wish to run queries for sev
152. cs com 329 330 330 331 334 Page 328 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 1 Introduction ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping TSM has the ability to upload raw National Land and Property Gazetteer NLPG data The NLPG is the first definitive national address list that provides unique identification of properties across England and Wales and conforms to the British Standard BS 7666 Local government and potentially the public and private sectors can link their information systems to this high quality source of addresses and accurate geographic location This data will provide a new way of locating information and NLPG Unique Property Reference Number UPRN will appear in TSM as a new locator type in the database wizard To launch the Active NLPG utility e Click on the desktop icon if you have one see below e Alternatively use Windows Explorer to browse to c program files active e Then double click on the program name NLPGadmin exe Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 329 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Q 1 1 NLPG Data Format NLPG data is normally received or downloaded in CSV comma separated format After the initial table is built for use within TSM see NLPG Import below further updates can be loaded on a monthly basis to add new records or update the table 1 2 Settings
153. cs com Page 335 of 389 ACTIVE bein cang doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Part 17 Active Address Generator Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 337 2 MATCHING DATA WITH STREET ADDRESSES 338 3 SAVING THE FILE 340 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 336 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 Introduction The Address Generator Utility program use a file of unit postcodes e g RG21 4HG to create a list in CSV format of residential and or business addresses for marketing purposes The program uses data from the Royal Mail Postcode Address File PAF To launch the Active Address Generator utility e First click on the Tools button top left of TSM e Select the option Active Address Generator that appears in the panel on the right of TSM ACTIVE Address Generator Allows the User to generate a list of residential addresses based the posicode field as selected from the user defined CSV file e Click NEXT to continue on the pop up window that appears Address Generator This UIA program will Generate a lel of residenial odcresees Dased he posicode held as salectac trom the user detned CSV ce TXT tile Noxt gt gt Clase Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 337 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 Matching Data with Street Addresse
154. ct as below e BA Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 130 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 4 2 2 Ranges and lists When you design the database it may be prudent to express some whole number fields as lists rather than ranges particularly if you wish to select several individual items For example Age may be expressed as numbers but loading these fields into range boxes means that you can only select a sequence e g 16 to 18 as below not 16 and 18 only To overcome this issue set these fields up as lists either by selecting them as Data Type Text in stage 3 of the Wizard see Chapter 3 or by editing the fields in an existing database design as follows e Goto the DB Design Tab e Select the Database Definition and click Edit e Select Field Definitions halfway down to the left e Select the relevant field e g Age e At the bottom of the screen change its Field Type to Text e Click OK e Select Query Screen Design halfway down to the right e Select the relevant field e g Age e Atthe bottom of the screen change its Type to Selection List e Click OK e Move the new list box from the top left of the Query Writer to another place on the panel as it will almost certainly be covering up another field e Repeat the above steps for any other field you require e Click Save far ri
155. d Reference tab Contains the census or index of deprivation data depending on which you load into the system Compare tab Produce thematic and hot spot maps Print tab Print maps and export data to MS Excel MS Word Areas tab If you want to look at different geographies Key Sites tab Load POI data and assign a symbol to plot on the map e g your HQ DB design tab Load incident patient learner employer data etc in here change how the data is viewed in the Activity tab 10 Boundary tab Load and import boundaries in to the system A S pN mE a A Find Wc don a D a oo 59 375 km z 0 000 km 419736 E 36 894 mis a 0 000 mls 472431 N Site Information FA 0 000 km oe r miris iati Reference Key Sites i A DB desig Boundary Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 22 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 2 Map Display The map display in Total Solution Mapping TSM is where census data user activity data and comparisons of various combinations of these can be displayed against a geographic backdrop The size position of the map the quantity of geographic detail and the display of the various data elements is controlled mainly from the map toolbar above the map and the map toolbox the first tab to its right 2 1 Map Toolbar Below is an example of the map toolbar that sits
156. d s numerical value for example a range of numbers To select this function Click on the Sizing button at the top of the Activity Toolbox Click on the Dot sizing drop down list at the top Select option relating to the number fields in the database e g By Age or By Number Move the Dot size for largest geo group scroll bar bottom right up to increase the size of the largest dot The number of records this largest dot represents is shown in brackets initially e n this example the range field is By Response sec e Clicking on the pick list to the right of Smooth Proportional e Choose option Stepped Banded gt Bands Dot size for lowest band Det size for highest band e Default bands are set by TSM depending on the absolute range of this field e Click on the Bands button top right to set your own band values as per the Query Writer function on Colour By see chapter 4 e The example below shows 10 bands of 100 and a top band from 1000 and over e Click the OK button to show the new dot sizes based on these new bands on the map 101 to 200 201 to 299 200 to 399 1400 to 499 500 to 599 16500 to 699 700 to 799 S00 to 899 00 to 999 1000 to 101949 fot bends mox 64 11 OK Cancel Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 125 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 4 Data Query T
157. d You can save as many queries as you need so long as each has a unique name To save a query to the database Library e Click the Library button top right of the Activity Tab The Query Writer appears left e Overtype the Name if required perhaps to include a date using no more than 25 characters e The Description Box normally contains the file location of the data but can also be overtyped using no more than 40 characters e Click the Save button to finish and the function closes automatically 2 4 1 Show errors amp warning options library queries e Click the Now button to show in a pop up window any errors and warnings caused if the database design has been changed and no longer matches the format of the original file that the library query was based on e Alternatively check the box to the bottom right to show errors and warnings when you load a saved library query see below Query library Activity database querie Name Description eis eo ive ET c program files act Data Census2001WARD Save a Close Show errors amp warning Now When they occur during load x 2 5 Retrieve a query from the database library To retrieve a previously saved query e Click the Library button top right of the Activity Tab The Query Writer appears left e Select the relevant query from the list for example in this case Activity by Incident Type e Click the Load button This reinstates all the par
158. d areas text is displayed wrongly or certain items are all printed in the same colour this probably indicates a lack of Windows Resources These problems can usually be cured by closing down unnecessary applications leaving only Active Software and Word open They may have been caused by an application that has crashed if this is the case save the session and reboot the PC Increasing the resources available will also increase the number of items that can be written to the Area Key 1 5 9 3 Files in the Temporary Directory lf Word crashes large files may be left in the DOS temporary directory which is usually C TEMP and may cause the hard disk to become full The files should be deleted only when no other applications are running and once Word has run after the crash so that it can recover the file being edited during the crash if this is necessary 1 5 10 The Clipboard Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 178 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto The report uses the clipboard to pass information into Word so any data held by you in the clipboard before a report is written should be saved if it is needed later This includes parts of Word documents that have been saved using the Cut or Copy commands on the Edit menu 1 5 11 The Map Image File The map image exported to the Word document is formatted as a Windows metafile The image s
159. d latent Adece hpp asca Otty i Te ure Fapa Harm Mabcrous ansa hamaka p o rer rege Anma fheacus bonest E Caf Sign 07291 Datert Comat to Polce ja Apec Sere Emwgasty bahe it Lt Bain Officer Altentet M Vehiicio Type ore insidon lypeC or 7 EH nag A j aan JE Ba Serene eats Asna Lasas Mate j eats BA tamter tale Emery Satrage Teaner ULE TF tatr Foam lender 04 FINE ALAR wee Baid Move Lapor Dad N ty oar Mrorarte Harton AITA sa imee Connentura AUTO FA Culous E Amn sam insere Mewciee Onst tari m ftecrdeet Type TT Lager 4070 Puny var birder iDes rpms a an Lapte OVD Pnp FOI COLE STC PROPERT Cal Sign Kay Stes an aghtang beet FOS SMALL FIRE IN OPEN Vantec Trpo r an bac aden tpp te l l SAN Midte Catering Uan eat Oticer ALTO PO PERSONS REPORTER 0B cosy z Oourdary Execute l Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 89 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 2 Activity Toolbox Functions The Activity Toolbox provides tools for searching and displaying Activity databases and can be used to perform new Activity database searches queries manipulate the Activity display list access the Activity query library count Activity in predefined or random areas display and print Activity records save and merge Activity dot files oe ee 1 and 2 are described below The other functions of the Activity Toolbox are outlined in Chapter 5
160. d you to click OK in order to continue Please Note Despite this your underlying data remains intact and the field will still be shown when you display the detail of whole records after running a query During the preview a message like the one below will alert you to any field that might break this limit and therefore be disabled for searching after importing the data jenne T Warning The database definition indicates that certain text fields are to use indexed text tables This feature is suitable for fields that contain a substantial quantity of duplicated texts which will result in a relatively small table of unique values in comparison to the quantity of records imported In the 100 records sampled one or more of these fields seem to have a high quantity of unique values indicating that the field may not be suitable for indexing and that the database will not compress wery well The following ts a list of the freld s that seem to hawe a high quantity of unique values Field First Name has 90 unique values Field Surname has 94 unique values Field Email has 61 unique values Field Mob Phone has 82 unique values During the import a similar message appears simply warning you that the search box has now been disabled i The field First Name has too many unique values to be used for a criteria selection list Criteria selection First Name has been disabled Conf
161. de 204 204 3153 E Red 218 Other Roadside Unknown 204 204 153 Other Land Natural 204 255 204 Other Land Manmade 204 204 153 Green 245 4 Other Land Unknown 204 204 204 Other Rail 150 150 150 Other Grasstand 204 255 204 Blue 178 Underneath the colour palette click on the value next to Red and a scroll bar will appear allowing the Red colour value to be changed e Click within the scroll bar and drag it to the left changing the Red value to 0 noticing the colour change to teal green e Click on the Upd update button e To remove all changes and revert to the colour set present when you loaded the configuration program press Prev e To return to the default colour set press the Def button then Upd Upd Prev Def Help Exit Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 300 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 4 Setting Compare Colours Click on the Compare colours button to list the values within your system 4th of the 4 icons top right e Click on the last line 15 to highlight the whole line including the Red Green and Blue colour values Colour Configuration Map layers Map features Colour values Red Green Blue es 0o O 0 163 02 O 0 190 Colour settings 03 458 0 230 04 81 73 255 05 115 147 255 06 160 202 255 07 200 225 255 O88 255 255 255 09 255 200 220 255 153 163 11 255 113 1
162. dential www activeinformatics com Page 284 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 2 Creating and Editing Symbols To create a symbol follow these instructions 2 1 Create a new symbol 1 Move the pointer to the Colour Palette and to the second to bottom row second column from the left dark blue 2 Left Click on this colour and watch the Left rectangle at the top of the panel change to this outside line colour 3 With the cursor still on the colour palette dark blue right click and the Right rectangle at the top of the panel will change to the same fill colour 4 Click on the solid ellipse button 2 row 3 left 5 Move pointer to the top left of the Drawing Area positioning the crosshair pointer at 40 40 using the position indicator at the bottom right of the drawing area and click the left mouse button Pick object Centre 0 0 40 40 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 285 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 britain dake 6 Move the mouse noticing the outline of the ellipse to the bottom right of the Drawing Area at 40 40 and click the left mouse button The solid ellipse is drawn with the colours selected Solid elipse Centre 0 0 TIP To UNDO a line or shape right click at any point in the process Keep right clicking to completely remove the line or shape you are drawing 7 R
163. ding style amp options graph settings e The entire contents of the card stack e The episode card and all data required to recreate the query that generated the card Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 34 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto e he census card and current census display mode e The Boundaries which are currently set to be displayed 2 10 2 Session name Default This box shows the current session name and gives access to the session inventory When Active is launched the session name is set to Default if chosen or a temporary session that is date and time stamped You may choose to save and restore session data to from different named sessions as described above Clicking on the session name box will pop up a list or inventory of existing named sessions 2 10 3 Session restore button Clicking this button restores a previously saved working session The session data is restored from the default or named session The current working session data is discarded Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 35 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 2 11 Tools Launch Button R At the top left of the map display is a button enabling you to launch the Active utility programs tools that are provided as part of the software package N B These buttons will only launch the utilities if the relevant utility
164. directly above your map The following sections will describe the different functions in detail Redraw the map Pan around the Select activity Zoom In nap Previous Zoom Full extent Ward Area selection on amp off Save and open Sessions Le gaa 0000 07082012 4 62 137 mls _ C Raster Grey Activity x Primary routes xX Settlements x Text x Fill 2 ee amp Vector Statistics M Secondary routes Water features Reference Areas National Grid Streets Other features Area groups o l S o Map features turn on to see on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 23 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ifs 2 2 Vector Layers Because the default digital mapping is in vector format points lines curves and shapes or polygons the Map Display can be divided into layers to enable either a basic or very rich background image on to which to plot your data dae g end gw 10102011 0 Hee 137 mls C Raster Grey T at 5 Primary routes X Settlements X Text X Fill a i f Raster amp Vector Statistics Secondary routes Water features Reference Areas pl Vect iii National Grid Streets Other features Area groups Note An example of the layers can be found above in blue text The FILL check box is a shading facility that only affects the layers Settlements Water Features and Other Features e g woodland
165. doto to ife 2 Alternative Area Selection Methods e Select a Locality from the Area Definitions list to highlight it e f you already know the names on the output areas you want to pick go to the Unused Areas list and double click an output area to move it into the area definition selected e To select multiple Unused areas hold down the CTRL key and pick several areas with left click to highlight them e Right click and choose option to Add to current group Unused areas Aggborough and S p Add to current group Show area codes pemes oor otri Aggborough and Spennells ATUGFUOO06 Aggborough and Spennells 47UGFUO007 Aggborough and Spennells 47UGFU0008 TIP If you pick the wrong area by mistake use the single pick tool to de select the output area and it drops back into Unused Areas N B Right clicking in Unsaved Areas allows you to Show Area Codes associated with each output area as above should you wish to select areas by their codes instead of the names 2 8 Saving Area Definitions Once you have given your Area Definition a name the system will warn you if you click on another tab without saving your work e Click YES to continue e Click OK button bottom right to save the Area Definition i New Area Definition appears to have been entered Do you want to save the Definition Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 195 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3
166. dquarters in the Locator box e Click the Append button left of the New button below Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 153 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 banging doto 3 3 Assign a symbol Click on the Symbol amp button allocation button 2 left A _ G e Click on the Site Type e g Headquarters in the list of Defined Site Types below Drag a symbol up to the Symbol box to the left of Defined Site Types Drag the symbol up to the Buttons section above Defined Site Types Ei A H e e Buttons ell E A E E S SSS Symbol Defined site types Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 154 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 4 Display the key site on the map e A button also appears top left of the map Click on this button and the same symbol appears on the map e g at your work location 3 7 312 km wJ 4543 mls _ S Raster Grey Activity x Primary routes X Settlements X Text x Fill coe SEED Statistics x Secondary routes Water features Reference Areas National Grid Streets C Other features Area groups Anlaby Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 155 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 Edit Key Site Details 4 1 Edit records The data imported to the n
167. ds These clusters can form catchments territories or neighbourhoods to enable you to analyse data at a higher level For example you may only wish to study census data for a city rather than the wards outside or work out the population density for a catchment area Before analysing Reference data it would be useful to have an understanding of Area Groups In addition to the digital mapping and the Local Authority boundaries contained within the specified Map Display Atomic areas e g Wards or Output Areas have also been included that cover your map area The Atomic areas are the basic geographical building blocks brought together as an Area Group and given a meaningful title The Areas tab can be found by clicking the 7 tab down The first thing you will see is a list of all the Area definitions available in your system In the box below this list you will see the Structure of Area Hierarchy which shows how each group is constructed Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 188 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 2 Creating Area Groups Area Groups can be created using the following steps 2 1 Select a definition e Click on the Areas tab button and a list of defined areas will be displayed e Select Generic Definition group from the upper text box e Then click on the Area Definition Design Button as shown below rea Hectares Basic areas Area Definiti
168. e Asb Confidential Crossby asb Crossdb asb Crossde asb Crossdg asb a Crossdm asb an Crossdy asb Datum asb edshosp 4sb a Factory asb Firetend asb B Gpp asb Helipad as a Hivalt asb sa Hosp bb Hosp bk ee www activeinformatics com Page 291 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Goto 2 4 6 Delete all objects entire symbol e lf the Delete All Objects button below extreme right is pressed Edit Symbol FIG Lx M e the following window will be displayed SITEEDIT OF to delete all objects e Click on the OK button and the entire symbol all objects will be deleted Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 292 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 Importing BMP GIF and JPEG files It is possible to import Bitmap JPEG and GIF format image files into this utility e Click the Import Image button row 2 fourth right e Select the image file Bmp Gif or Jog you wish to import e Click Open e Click File BOCE i AEB EJ A a d ei Buttons odgo E o A Symbol Defined site types none Stations Symbols Available tie Se a A a A A AAEE EE OF Click Save As and choose a save name for the file Once you save the image as an ACTIVE Site Symbol File ASB the next time you view the Site Edit tab in TSM it w
169. e Container 3778140 3953360 09 07 2004 10 44 06 Unknown Locator 24894041 Secondary Fire Refuse Container 3919502 4054282 12 06 2004 20 45 23 unknown Locator 24594041 Secondary Fire Refuse Container 3919402 4054262 12 06 2004 20 45 23 Unknown Locator 20396042 Secondary Fire Refuse Container 3811990 3955170 20 07 2004 17 17 48 unknown Locator 20396042 Secondary Fire Refuse Conmtainer 3811990 3955170 7 2004 17 17 44 Unknown Locator 20310042 Secondary Fire Refuse container 38625460 3965070 2004 09 44 42 AK Mobt letine 53500012 Secondary Fire Refuse Container 369901 407 216 0 08 2001 yt ks gS eee 5 ren Locator 9323041 Secondary Fire Skip 3805230 4082940 18 04 2004 18 13 00 18 04 2004 AK Mobi letine 53039012 Spec serv Emergency Serv mot read Good Intent 387750 390750 05 08 2001 3 3 Database List As you import various files into the Database Type a list of databases is created based on the names of the import files Simply double click on the database name in the Databases Available panel to select a file before running a query on it Database Types AA AAD Business data AB ASDILAR Data IPC PCD Posicodes IPS PSO Postcodes SSi Databases Available renyon q
170. e Overtype the Name if required perhaps to include a date using no more than 25 characters e The Description Box normally contains the file location of the data but can also be overtyped using no more than 40 characters e Click the Save button to finish and the function closes automatically Activity by Incidentlype c program files actiData Census7001WARD Chimney Fires 010412 cc program files act Data Census 7001WARD Incident data 010612 c program files actiData Census 7001WARD Work in progress 101012 c program files actiData Census7001WARD Show errors amp warning Now ixen they occur during load a a E Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 129 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to 1e 4 2 Education Data Queries 4 2 1 Change the size of the boxes Query boxes that are located in parts of the Query Writer in a way that makes them hard to read as below can be edited using the Query Screen Design option e Click on DB Design tab to re organise the tables in the Query Writer e Select the database e Click on the Edit button e Toggle to Query Screen Design e Move the tables around by dragging and dropping you can place them on top of each other if needed and make the boxes longer and wider as required e Take care NOT to cover up the Colour by box e Click Save far right then OK e Return to the Activity Tab to see the effe
171. e Select option view delete tables of data Select the Reference Area Set e g 2001 Census OAs The table s you delete will have only been accessible when you chose this set when you started Active TSM Click Next and the first data table is displayed Click Delete to remove the table Click Yes to permanently delete the table Click Exit to quit Answer Yes to the question Do you want to process another file to continue or No to quit the program 1 7 Using the Data with TSM e The Reference Table you have created will be accessible through the Reference tab in TSM when you open the program using the 2001 Census OAs reference areas option at the start e In the Reference Tab look for the User defined Data section at the bottom right teal coloured panel and your new table should be found there e Double click the table to open it e Tick the box containing the value and drag the Reference Data card up to the card stack e Use the Compare tab to display the data as per Census Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 314 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Part 15 Active Alias ACTIVE bringing Goto Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 2 SETTING UP THE CONVERSION TABLES 2 1 Importing Data into Tables 2 2 Creating Tables Manually 2 2 1 Add Tables and Codes Manually 2 2 2 Edit Table Codes 2 2 3 Deleting Codes 2 2 4 Deleting Tables 3 CONVERTING FILES USING THE TABLES
172. e button Position the crosshair pointer at 5 30 and click the left mouse button Position the crosshair pointer at 5 30 and click the left mouse button Position the crosshair pointer at 5 45 and click the left mouse button Position the crosshair pointer at 5 45 and click the left mouse button noticing the pointer changing to a vertical arrow and click the left mouse button The object polygon will be drawn with the colours selected 2 4 2 Increase the Object Size To increase the size of the Solid Rectangle then select the rectangle from the Object List Box and the rectangle will be identified by a small square at the two corners that formed the rectangle e Move to the Drawing Area close to the left side of the rectangle and click and hold down the left mouse button The pointer will change to a Green cross and jump to the corner of the rectangle e Now continuing to hold down the left mouse button move the pointer to the desired position e g 15 45 and then release the left mouse button The rectangle will be enlarged e Click on the Move to Background button twice and this will place the rectangle behind the Solid Ellipse Circle e Click on the Solid Rectangle object within the Object List box to deselect it 2 4 3 Change an Object s Colour Select an object from the list e g the Solid Ellipse Go to the colour palette and choose a new colour Left click to change the outline colour of the object Right click to ch
173. e hee ie Ld etal RA Fi N r Man a Se NY Gees ct fre Reet i aeons ee ane if Sea tte i Cabelas E TA r ma HF i T art Ly oe a Ea rE SPIRE aaa ae F F ae as pt ts E erin a i zA her m p ats NGO eal WEE Nie ie we a a eae g me og J G jm a fiaa ae I m F fia a Oi roo Hi an T chal H v pa ie pal a ys A Gara a eG fe TT He ees A EEN Brg a Se rE rr ay Se be ai Da a da eta a 7 ae a M pr ie p ye i CL bc i ae Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 381 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 10 Drivetime Trackback In order for this option to work e Existing isochrone sets tab must be selected left click on it e Here you will see the name of the rules used to create the isochrones top left e Any level within the Ilsochrone set must be highlighted Drivetime tools Drivetime tools Existing isochrone sets pasa See SSN Core file ACTIVE speeds Variance file ACTIVE rush hr Override file ACTIVE congestion fi prop erties for r ew isoch fone sets E New Group E Bedford College O 5 minute isochrone fe E minute isochrone E f minute ochrone O a minute isochrone e When Isochrones have been created it is then possible to determine the quickest route from the centre of the Isochrone to one of two options 10 1 Selected pin isochrone set Y
174. e individual road selection tool red line with the cursor top e right of map e Save the rule file floppy disc to right of Drivetime Rules 14 2Next Set Up the Parameters e Click on the Drivetime Tools Panel e Select a Core File to set Core Speed parameters e Select the Closures Override File e Click on New Isochrone Set box the box is lit up in pale yellow e Set target day date time min speed in the Properties for new Isochrone sets e panel left if appropriate e Set the number of Isochrones to build ticking up to 4 boxes in the panel below e Select travel times for each Isochrone clicking and dragging the mouse up to e increase the time in minutes e g bands of 10 minutes or just one of 10 mins e Select roads and outline colours clicking on the coloured boxes to display the e palette e Right Click under the list of Existing Isochrone Sets on the right e Choose the Create New Group option e Rename the group Give the group of lsochrones a meaningful name e g e Evesham e Press Enter after typing 14 3 Then Build the Isochrones e Right click on the map to draw a pin e Select the New pin option e Choose the locator e g Easting and Northing road name or nearest key site from e the pop up list e Right click on the pin e Select the Pin option e Select the Generate Isochrone option the Ilsochrones are built in descending e order of time 14 4Final
175. each selected area and the count of A and B in each area To do this e Copy b by positioning the cursor above the appropriate card stack title and drag and drop it on the upper of the two blank title positions entitled show data Census 2011 Output Area statistics Copy a by positioning the default pointer above the card stack title which contains the data for a and click amp hold Drag the file to the compare toolbox and the lower of the two blank title positions entitled base data and drop the file The data is now loaded as base data while also remaining in the card stack for future use e To set the base area to the installed areas click once on the dropdown list to the right of the base area to see a list of the area groups available Select the last title e g wards with a single click and this will appear as the selected base area e To generate statistics click on the Equals button top left A key to the bands and colours used in the compare toolbox appears bottom right and the wards on the map are shaded in depending on which band they fall into e N B The Equals button remains grey until you make a change to the formula for the calculation e g Change the base area value band interval or drop another card into show or base data A Auto grid Cont Surface Map Census 2011 Output Area statistics Base data All households Census 2011 Output Area statistics Base area Output Areas v summed
176. ect a field to colour by TSM will pick a colour for each category and show us the number of records associated with each one For example e Go to the Colour By panel at the bottom right of the Query Writer This lists all the Field Names available within the various search boxes above e Select a field name from the Colour box e g Incident Type as per the example below e Click the Execute button below Colour By to run the query Selected ltems Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 100 of 389 February 2015 bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE The effect will be seen on the Activity Toolbox as per the example below Each item selected in the Incident Type box will be represented by a coloured dot and a number of records to the left of each item The coloured dots will also appear on the map based on where the activities took place when you click the pencil at the top of the Activity Toolbox a Sizing me Fixed Standard LEE Poly Total Activity by New Library c program 33948 Chimney Fire 3699201x False Alarm Intent 32290x False Alarm Malicious 126380 FDR1 Fire 20430x Overborder Attended 936201 Secondary Fire 11809 Spate Civil Disturb Condt 53352x Spec Serv Emergency 1579188 UwF S FADA Tae n a n e TIP Not more than 64 list items may be selected under the Field Name by that the answer is to be coloured by This is because the human
177. ed on the print content selections you have chosen e f you can t fit everything on one page either export to Word if available OR a Print the map first i e page 1 b Remove the Map and keys by un checking the boxes c Add in the remaining keys criteria and notes you wish to display and press the print page button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 173 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ifs 1 5 MS Word Report Writer The Word Report Writer is accessed by clicking on the Word button which is located on the Print toolbox 1 5 1 Data Format Tab When this tab is selected the dialog box changes to display the formatting options for the records to be exported and the census reference data figures like this Export to Microsoft Word Export Content Data Format Options that affect the way some items are exported Activity List Census Data List Table amp Counts by selected areas C O Columns per table 15 Counts by all areas Preview Data Use Colour v Landscape mode 1 5 2 Data Format Tab Fields This section describes the data formatting options available when exporting on the Options Tab shown below List Each Activity record is written into a separate Word table Table Each Activity record is written into a row of a single table that holds all the Activity records This is the default Columns Per Table If t
178. eed Limits YW anlanice file Rush Hour Road Works on MEZ Road Works on 461 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 377 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 9 4 Set lsochrones Times e Move to the lower panel and tick how many Isochrones to create e This can be done in Quad mode up to 4 in a single operation in minutes seconds or a combination of the two metho Quad minutes SERER eens Peary EOCTIOMnes Mes off road speed 2 0 mph to road speed In the example above 4 Isochrones of 5 6 7 and 8 minutes have been selected To change the figures click up down buttons to the right of the values or drag up or down and the number will be increased or decreased e Set the colours of the Isochrone Roads by clicking the coloured square to the right and the colour palette will appear This has now locked the mouse pointer until a colour is selected minutes amp seconds aos OUMINES e lsochrone Outline colours can be changed in a similar manner to the Isochrone Road colours e Alternatively this can be done in Range mode between a start and finish time with an increment in minutes seconds or a combination of the two comments O method Range minutes amp seconda ez roads H outlin es otf road speed 2 0 mph bork bie i to road speed In the example above 1
179. efined colours rrn te t tants E ie tow i omes Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 236 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe 12 11 2 Market Share Maps These maps show your learners as a proportion of all learners in further education using the ILR data within the system This gives an indication of a college s catchment area so you can see if your market share decreases around other colleges The maps can be used to identify those areas in which to target more learners Please note Due to data protection and data licensing restrictions associated with the supply of ILR data in your TSM system it is not allowable to identify individual learners or those of specific competitors Use of your own learner data allows the comparison with the ILR data in order to create the market share maps To create a Market Share map e Select your learner data and the ILR data using in 2 queries using the Query Writer See Chapter 4 Graphical Query Writer e Make sure to select only those age groups you want to analyse e Drag both queries to the card stack e To display the data click on the Compare Tab e Drag the learner data into the Show data e Drag the ILR data into the Base data e In Statistics Mode click Show over Base e Change the Base area to Wards e Click the equals button e Senik to approprare Seine Sr ey A EA gaiz m
180. efinition Design button Click on the word lt new gt in the box under Area Definition Name and type a new name Under Structure of Area Hierarchy click on All Output Areas Click on the Insert New Level button this creates level 1 below All Output Areas Click on the box below Text edit to rename level 1 to CATCHMENT then click Set Text Under Area definitions click on All Output Areas Click on the Insert New Level button this creates a CATCHMENT below All Output Areas Click on the Insert New Level button again a second CATCHMENT is created below All Output Areas Click on the top CATCHMENT to highlight it and rename it in Text Edit Click on the second CATCHMENT to highlight it and rename it in Text Edit Use the Output Area picking tools to select the appropriate Output Areas for the first CATCHMENT Click on the 2nd CATCHMENT to highlight it and select the Output Areas for it Click on OK to preserve your new area group 6 2 Using Area Groups with Reference Select the Area Group you created above Go to the Reference Tab Select CAS Table 1 Age by Sex and Resident Type The All People cell top left represents the total population On the right hand side of the Reference Tab select Display counts by selected areas The All People cell top left now represents the population of the Area Group 6 3
181. elete Insert new level Rename Delete level Rename level 5 2 Rename Level e Right click on the Cell in the top panel containing the level to be renamed e g Top Level click on Rename and type in the new name required e g County 5 3 Create New Level e Right click on a Cell in the Column under Display in the Top Panel and a Pop up Window will appear as above e Click on Append new level to add a new level at the end or Insert Level to insert a new level before the existing one e A window asking for a name to be input will be displayed and when this is typed in the new level will be created e g District Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 262 of 389 ACTIVE brin gang doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 4 Create a Boundary Group e Right click with the mouse on the Boundary Set name in the Middle Panel e Hover over the word New then click on Boundary group beneath current and another level will be added to the tree structure of this new Set The Top Level in the Top Panel now represents this Top Level Group New Boundary group beneath current Delete Boundary beneath current group Rename Create outline 5 5 Create a Boundary Beneath the Current Group e Right click on the New Level Group and the window will appear left New Delete Boundary group beneath current Sagan Boundary beneath current group Create group outline
182. elp When in context sensitive help mode the pointer is displayed as an arrow and a question mark To use context sensitive help e Press this button to select context sensitive helo mode The mouse pointer changes to the help pointer Cursor and question mark e Move the mouse pointer to the screen element you want help on while you do this the quick help panel see section 3 continues to display descriptions of the objects beneath the pointer e Clicking the left mouse button launches the Active help system at a topic relevant to the object in question e Right click or press the escape key to cancel the operation Assets ae ts b Bwerin peen thet Crnassti be Giss GQ ACTIVE peal Wap agiey Aao DaPey a whee raan Cle wow eCdvty Ode wed COreee tet of vataad Cortina of hake Cah De Gapapa Oper d pened Selene repeater oe mas fe partt of gapping ditsi aod ibe hagsy c t s vernir Sots israris p coetcied marty fer the top eed searr Pieese Mote s duat DIe A cee pii te na Tew Getter Mappi of a meres feemebers eg 1785 Gy TEE an aanrem Lapaj oo tere feESCeeTE OF erje moria A lee capgleree tary Barnie can Se accessed us a papag ets ot tesrdbed bein A arios d ihe wep napisy 6 Were beta Agng sorte of Ibe femises are ete Ay nee y 7 Surey Heat pH Ay ep Vere Car be poowwpeed Pe i rq wT the he wae wiae oy fhe rap The apona amapis it Ihe rere wi Chenge acconteg ho whe avert ro tes we on he map
183. em in the system but there can only be up to 10 Key Site buttons displayable at any one time in the map detail panel at the top of the map display Symbols Available he Sei a ne eeeeeee e TIP There are 76 pre defined symbols for you to use You can also design your own symbols bitmap jpeg or gif files using ACTIVE Site Symbol Design utility Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 148 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 Key Site Import 2 1 Typical data fields The following example will create a site with the following details by importing the data from an ASCII comma delimited file TXT or CSV format e Name mandatory field e Address 1 default field e Address 2 default field e Address 3 default field e Address 4 default field e Locator grid ref or postcode mandatory field e User Definable Fields Up to 12 e g Telephone number Fax number resources etc 2 2 Key Sites Import Wizard e To create a site click on the Wizard Button e Stage 1 Click on the Key Sites Tab then click on the Wizard button third from the left This will allow you to select a CSV file below left Click Next when you have done this Key Site import Wizard Stage 1 0f5 Select csv file which contains the new key site information to be loaded Select File iv First row is header Selected Fite Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 149 of
184. ence in the panel to the right Note the change in numbers in the Easting and Northing indicators as you move the mouse around You can use this feature to quickly discover the grid reference of for example a key site Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 43 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 9 Longitude Latitude It is possible to view Longitude Latitude cursor position on all UK maps in addition to the Easting and Northing National Grid co ordinates e Click on the Long Lat radio button top right corner of the Map tab e Move the cursor over the map e The Long Lat indicator displays the location of the tip of the cursor Long Lat Nat Gnd 00 54997 Long 55 22900 Lat 3 10 Key Site Database Display To access the database record that each Key Site symbol represents e Click the Key Site Information tool which will stay pressed in and as the cursor returns to the Map Display note that it is now an information cursor e Point to any of the displayed symbols and click There is no need to be precise in the positioning of the cursor as it will detect which is the nearest symbol See displayed on the Map Toolbox the database record that is represented by the symbol selected TIP Once you have labelled one Key Site right click and label site you can label the next Key Site nearest to your cursor by hitting F8 and Enter o
185. epeat 1 2 and 3 above but selecting the White colour square 8 Click on the Polygon button from the tools panel 2 row 1 left 9 Move to the Drawing Area positioning the crosshair pointer at 20 20 and click the left mouse button 10 Position the crosshair pointer at 11 Position the crosshair pointer at 12 Position the crosshair pointer at 13 Position the crosshair pointer at 14 Position the crosshair pointer at 15 Position the crosshair pointer at 16 Position the crosshair pointer at 17 Position the crosshair pointer at 20 20 and click the left mouse button 10 20 and click the left mouse button 10 5 and click the left mouse button 10 5 and click the left mouse button 10 20 and click the left mouse button 20 20 and click the left mouse button 20 20 and click the left mouse button 10 20 and click the left mouse button 18 Position the crosshair pointer at 10 5 and click the left mouse button 19 Position the crosshair pointer at 10 5 and click the left mouse button 20 Position the crosshair pointer at 10 20 and click the left mouse button 21 Position the crosshair pointer at 20 20 and click the left mouse button 22 Position the crosshair pointer at 20 20 noticing the pointer changing to a vertical arrow T and click the left mouse button The object polygon will be drawn with the colours selected ee AN ee A A ee A ee ee Am 23 Click on the Polyline button
186. er Basa C towe i E Show counts only interval 202 Defaults u Shading Style mel pakoe hiia O Shades of one colcur E O19 201 Using the Show counts only option ignores any card in Base Data and runs a simple count of the information in Show Data for each ward Statistics Mode Opie coor Gare W a Show counts only ie Oe ee C Shades of one colour BE hada fom ene t plow f Shemdud be ttach amp Colour spectrum C Dheink fo M Wands Lia first M ncam The banding above shows counts of data and by clicking on the redraw tool the thematic map will be up dated accordingly see example below These maps let you know where the concentrations of your learners are located The red areas equal areas of high concentration and the blue areas equal low areas of concentration Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 223 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 12 Comparison The compare toolbox allows two basic sorts of calculations and displays to be performed either a display of pure counts as in section 1 2 above or a display of a percentage calculation When a comparison is performed the calculation is done as a percentage in the form Show Base x 100 Result Show and Base data may be either identical or different data sets but it makes sense for them to be linked in some way e g
187. er banding method Day of Week etc from the drop down list top left N B You can create up to 64 bands in total Execute the query Redraw to show the dots on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 112 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 3 Sorting colour by query e Selecta field from the colour by list above the Execute button e N B If this field is a Selection List i e descriptions you must pick from 1 to 64 entries from the list to colour the query by e Execute the query e Right click on the descriptions on the Activity toolbox e Select the sort option e g Sort Layers Descending this will sort the query based on the records per description e N B If a polygon is displayed on the map the query will be sorted using the data under the polygon as a priority e Redraw to show the dots on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 113 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 beinaing doto TSM User Guide Part 5 Map Design Contents 1 DATA AND DISPLAY ANALYSIS 116 1 1 Introduction 116 1 2 Select which dots to display 116 1 3 Remove all dots 117 1 4 Show all dots 117 1 5 Toggle the dot map on or off 117 Z SAVE QUERIES 118 2 1 Edit query card details 118 2 2 Save queries to the card stack 118 2 3 Delete query cards 119 2 4 Save queries to the database library 120 2 4 1 Show errors amp warning o
188. er the example below N B Only one polygon may be displayed on the map at any one time Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 137 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 When a polygon is displayed on the map the right hand number represents the Total number of records in the query To the left of this is another column Poly of numbers that represents the number of records and total that are now enclosed by the polygon e g Loc_02 In the example below 339 False Alarm Good Intent records sit within the area covered by the polygon out of a total of 36992 N B When you colour the yeaa mA Poly Total Activity by 9224 c program nnan 36992 False Alarm Good Intent dots by a field and draw a polygon around a cluster then sort them the order is now prioritised based on what s under the polygon which is a more logical way of displaying the sorted data 6 2 Inverting a Polygon You can also right click and Invert poly so it is easy to count the activity that is outside the polygon You can do the same with single isochrones see the Travel Time Boundaries Chapter 6 3 Naming the polygon Every polygon that is completed is saved in the system see above Now that the polygon is complete note the default name e g Loc_02 in the text box to the right of the Irregular Polygon tool To change the polygon name e left click the text e g Loc_02 e Type
189. eral specific non sequential ages e g 16 and 18 but not 17 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 77 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 4 5 Text Fields Click the New button to the right of the field definitions check box If you select the Text field type the following will then be displayed Field Definition Field Type Text OK import width 0 E Field id AB Full name Incident Type Text width 25 Fill in the rest of the boxes as follows e Import width This must be set to O zero see above e Field Id e g AB e Full name e g Incident Type e Text Width e g 25 the column width in characters e Click OK to save the field definition and continue TIP Field Types lt Text gt or lt DUMMY FIELD gt are used to ignore fields in the import file e g if the field contains a record number and does not need importing 4 6 Easting and Northing Locators The data you are importing must have either a postcode see section 4 10 below or columns for both Eastings and Northings national grid references in order to plot data in the correct location on the map Click the New button to the right of the field definitions check box If you select either Eastings metres or Northings metres field types the following will then be displayed Field Definition Field Type Eastings metres Import width b Field
190. es headings e g Incident Number Date of Call Time of Call Easting Northing etc The rest of the file should contain the records to which you wish to add Lifestyle data Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 348 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 3 5 Locator Field This section allows the type of locator to be selected The three types of locator that can be used are 1 POSTCODE full postcode to unit level e g RG21 4HG 2 NATIONAL GRID REFERENCE 2 fields Easting 6 digits amp Northing 6 digits and then Grid Search is available 3 SHEET REF GRID REF 3 fields Sheet Ref two letters Easting 5 digits amp Northing 5 digits and then Grid Search is available To select the locator relevant to the file you wish to match click on the field s in the Selection Fields box Then click the appropriate locator description below the list This example above has National Grid Reference option selected and requires 2 fields Easting and Northing to be highlighted in the list Select Locator Field s AS seo me MobdeDate Natonal Grd Ref Sheet Rel Gee Reference is marard will match Liestyte dats to each record in the chosen actly dalasat The Litatyle deta can mso be lt lt Previous Next gt gt e Click Next to proceed N B There is no check in this version to see if the field selected is a postcode field or a grid reference The
191. es from Circles You can also generate Boundaries from the any set of concentric circles on the map Two types of boundary may be created e solid circles e g between 0 to 1 mile 0 to 2 miles radius etc and e annular rings e g between 1 and 2 miles 2 to 3 miles etc This provides an extra vehicle for data analysis though the Calculation and Thematic function within the Boundaries Tab e By clicking the Map Scale button which is a toggle on off button we can see the scale of the map The map will have the scale indicator at the bottom right hand side of the map This will show the scale as xKm xMiles or xM xYd metres and yards represented by alternate black and white rectangles and is shown above right e When you zoom in and out of the map you should be able to see the difference in the scale indicator Depending on the original size of you map the scale reduces in steps from 5km down to as little as 10 metres when you zoom in Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 40 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing Goto 3 4 North Point The North Point symbol is placed in the Map Display in any one of four positions depending on the corner of the button clicked e For example click on the top left part of the button and the symbol will be displayed in the top left corner of the Map Display e By clicking the tool again the symbol will be removed from the Map Dis
192. es the image as an ASB file within TSM Click File and Exit to quit the ACTIVE Site Edit program Go to the Site Edit tab on TSM Click on the first button Symbol and Button Allocation top left to see your new symbol in the list in the bottom panel alphabetically by file name Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 168 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Goto TSM User Guide Part 7 Print and Export Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Print Toolbox 1 2 Print Set Up 1 3 Print Content 1 4 Print page 1 5 MS Word Report Writer 1 5 1 Data Format Tab 1 5 2 Data Format Tab Fields 1 5 3 Export Content Tab 1 5 4 Export Content Tab Fields 1 5 6 OK Button 1 5 7 Cancel Button 1 5 8 Errors 1 5 9 Other Information 1 5 10 The Clipboard 1 5 11 The Map Image File 1 5 12 Section Breaks 1 5 13 Page Orientation 1 5 14 Formatting 1 5 15 Frames 1 5 16 Unwanted Columns in the Activity List 1 5 17 Unframed Items 1 5 18 Colour 1 5 19 Greyed Out Fields 1 6 MS Excel Export 1 6 1 Options 1 6 2 Export Reference Area Codes and Names 1 6 3 Geographic Locators 1 7 Export to CSV File 1 8 Export Eastings amp Northings 1 9 Printing from other parts of TSM Confidential www activeinformatics com 171 171 171 172 173 174 174 174 175 176 177 177 178 178 178 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 180 180 180 181 182 182 183 183 184 Page 169 of 389
193. ew site database can be examined by selecting the List edit site information button Now overlaying the map is a similar panel to the import but this time it shows a list of records in your database This data can be edited as desired by Updating Adding new or Deleting records e Click on the Site Type e g Headquarters in the list of Defined Site Types e Click on Edit Site Database button 4 left at the top Select the record you wish to edit Overtype the details to edit them e g change the name Click Update to save the changes Alternatively if you wish to remove the record click Delete then OK Headquarters Database Site Data Name OT Address Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 156 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 2 Change a Key Site Icon You can change the symbol which represents any collection of key sites easily at any time To do this e Click on the Symbol and button allocation button e Click on the Site Type e Click and drag a new symbol up to the symbol box to the left of the site types If you had already configured one of the 10 display buttons above this will change to the new symbol automatically as will the display button top left of the map ANIE Buttons fe o e E S E A Symbol Defined site types none Colleges Headquarters Confidential www activeinformatic
194. example Area Key and Census Table etc if these elements of TSM have not been used to generate the map or used previously in this work session The OK button will also be greyed out if nothing is selected as above Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 175 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 5 4 Export Content Tab Fields This section describes the fields available for selection when exporting on the Data Tab shown below Map Activity Key Activity Criteria Activity Notes Show Data Key Show Data Criteria Show Data Notes Base Data Criteria Base Data Notes Area Key Site Key Compare Table Compare Stats Banding Key Census Table Activity List Boundary Banding Key The map will be written to the report containing exactly the same detail as on the PC screen A list of all the Activity colour bys displayed on the current map See the Activity toolbox Writes the criteria selections used to filter the Activity from the database Writes the notes on the card used to generate the Data These notes are edited on cards using the right mouse button A key to the statistical banding colours See the Compare toolbox Writes the criteria used to filter the show data from the Activity Data or reference data Writes the notes on the card used to generate the show data These notes are edited on cards u
195. eye finds it difficult to distinguish between more than 64 different colours at the same time Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 101 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 3 2 When No Selections are Made If you wish to colour the answer by a particular Selection List you MUST choose one or more items from that list If you don t select anything from the list you wish to colour by the system will display the warning message below i You have elected to Colour by IncidentType but have not made any selections from the IncidentType list Please select between 1 and 9 items Simply click OK to continue and select one or more items in the list 3 3 Setting Range Field Bands If you want to break the query down using a range field such as a date or time then there are various ways that the coloured dots can be allocated this depends part on the type of field chosen and on the user selecting the method of colour allocation TIP There is no need to select or change the values in a range field in order to use Colour By 3 4 Date Bandings e Select a date field to colour by e g Call Date e Inthe Colour By box the button next to the caption By now becomes enabled with the word Date as shown below AssignDate AssignTime MobileDate Mobile Time Bri ate e Click on the Date button and choose the Banding Method from t
196. f the rectangle to position at 10 30 and click the left mouse button The Solid rectangle is drawn with the colours selected 37 The symbol can now be saved to a file by selecting the FILE menu and then SAVE AS which will open the standard window defaulting to the SYMBOLS directory under the ACTIVE directory 38 Type the new file name as TEST ASB and then click the OK button The symbol is now saved to this directory with this name The symbol has now been created like the one below Fick object Centre 0 0 47 15 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 287 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 2 Review a Symbol To review the symbol on the map previews which show approximately a quarter of the TSM map area and the same area zoomed to 12 5km simply click on the Review Symbol button in the panel above the TSM logo see below left O Review Symbol Scale m M The application will draw 5 symbols diagonally across both maps to show the difference in scale The top map panel will also contain 5 other instances of the symbol drawn randomly e To remove the symbol from the map previews just click on the review button again 2 3 Re scale a symbol The symbol can also be re scaled by for example editing the percentage value to 50 which will halve the size of the symbol Alternatively double the size of a sy
197. fidential www activeinformatics com Page 14 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 9 1 Export Activity Data to a CSV File 9 2 Export Boundaries To Mid Mif Files 9 3 Import a Mid Mif Boundary File 10 BOUNDARY GRID SET 11 CONVERT BOUNDARIES INTO REFERENCE AREAS 12 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 12 1 Turning boundaries on off 12 2 Export data through boundaries 12 3 Calculation and Thematic 12 4 Import MID MIF 12 5 Create new boundary 12 6 Create new Reference Area from a boundary TSM USER GUIDE PART 12 SITE SYMBOL DESIGN 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Guide to the Panels Z CREATING AND EDITING SYMBOLS 2 1 Create a new symbol 2 2 Review a Symbol 2 3 Re scale a symbol 2 4 Edit a Symbol 3 IMPORTING BMP GIF AND JPEG FILES 4 FILE MENU 5 HELP MENU TSM USER GUIDE PART 13 ACTIVE CONFIGURATION 1 INTRODUCTION Confidential www activeinformatics com ACTIVE bringing Goto 274 274 275 276 277 278 278 278 278 279 279 279 280 281 282 285 285 288 288 289 293 294 295 296 297 Page 15 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Z COLOUR CONFIGURATION 2 1 Setting Dot Colours 2 2 Setting Map Line Colours 2 3 Setting Map Fill Colours 2 4 Setting Compare Colours 3 PLACENAME CONFIGURATION 3 1 Adding Placenames 3 2 Deleting Placenames 4 POSTCODE CONFIGURATION 4 1 Adding Postcodes TSM USER GUIDE PART 14 ACTIVE I
198. from the tools panel 24 Move to the Drawing Area positioning the crosshair pointer at 5 45 25 click the left mouse button noticing the pointer turning to a vertical arrow This will change back to a crosshair pointer when the mouse is moved 26 Position the crosshair pointer at 5 30 and click the left mouse button 27 Position the crosshair pointer at 5 30 and click the left mouse button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 286 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 britain doto 28 Position the crosshair pointer at 5 45 and double click the left mouse button 29 position the crosshair pointer at 5 45 and click the left mouse button noticing the pointer turning to a vertical arrow The object Polyline will be drawn with the colour selected 30 Move the pointer to the Colour Palette and to the top row column on the right black 31 Click on the left mouse button and the left rectangle at the top of the panel will change to this colour 32 Move the pointer to the second top row second column from the left red 33 Now click on the right mouse button and the right rectangle at the top of the panel will change to this colour 34 Click on the solid rectangle button in the tools panel 2 row 2 left 35 Move the pointer to the Drawing Area positioning the crosshair pointer at 10 40 and click the left mouse button 36 Move the pointer noticing the outline o
199. g False Alarm Good Intent e TSM adds the extension AEP2 to the file name e clicking Save to finish Save activity point file Oe Ji ACT gt Data Census2001WARD 4 Sear Filename False Alarm Good Intent Save as type Activity point files ver2 AEP2 v Browse Folders Cancel 5 2 Merging the dot image To retrieve a previously saved data image preferably from a different database file e Click the Merge Activity dot file right hand button on the Activity Toolbox e Click once on the file name to highlight it e Click the Open button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 134 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Amessage appears to ask if you want to size the merged dots by Geo group see below You can choose to force all these activity to be fully sorted or leave them unsorted or partially sorted The activity will still be usable whether sorted or not Do you wish to force these merged activity to be sorted Note If you change your mind merge the activity again e f you answer Yes and had previously used Geo group to resize the dots on the query you are merging the dots into TSM will go back into the dot sizing function so that the merged dots can be resized as well This is so that all the dots from original query and the merged ones can be resized consistently based on the number of activities at each locati
200. ged 65 amp Married or Married or Married or Cohabiting omposition over same sex same sex same sex couple No civil civil civil children partnership partnership partnership couple No couple couple All children Dependent children children 462636 55094 f5 754 43292 65317 0644 e For instance click the second table 3 Household Composition KS105EW and see that a new screen will appear over the top of the map containing the statistics table Some tables that are opened may be wider or taller than the space available on the screen in which case traditional Windows scroll bars will be placed on the table to allow movement up down and across the spreadsheet e Note from the open table that down the left hand side each row has a title e g Tota e Across the top of this table note column heading headings e g One person household Aged 65 amp over TIP The Back to List button top right enables you to return to the list quickly so that you can view a different table Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 207 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 8 2 Data Selection The following example will lead to a relatively straightforward analysis of Reference data in order to analyse the gender age profile of the population in a certain age range First select the total population in an age range and
201. ght then OK e Goto the Database Tab and re import the data manually see Chapter 3 You must do this because you have made a significant change to one or more of the database fields The resulting field boxes see below now contain entries than can be selected individually if required Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 131 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to ifa Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 2 3 Colour by If we want to break the query down into categories we can select a field to colour by TSM will pick a colour for each category and show us the number of records associated with each one For example e Make one or more selections from the list you wish to colour the query by e g Mode e Go to the Colour By panel at the bottom right of the Query Writer This lists all the Field Names available within the various search boxes above e Select a field name from the Colour by box e g Mode as per the example below e Click the Execute button below Colour By to run the query The effect will be seen on the Activity Toolbox as per the example below TSM creates a series of bands based on the selections you made from the list of Modes Each Mode is represented by a coloured dot and a number of records to the left The coloured dots will also appear on the map based on where the activities took place when you click the pencil at the top of the Activity Toolb
202. gn see above 3 5 Appending Data There is an append button on the import screen This enables you to add records to existing databases e g append a new month s or year s worth of data to a larger annual database e Click Select to choose the input file as above e Click Append then choose the database file listed in the Databases Available panel on the Database Tab you wish to add the data to e Click OK to start the append process Append To Database Highlight the Database in which the data is to be appended Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 73 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato TIP If you accidentally append the same file twice you may duplicate some records If this happens simply re import the original file again to overwrite the database and append any other files applied afterwards 3 6 Deleting Database Types and Files To delete one file that has been imported into a Database Type Go to the Database tab Right click on a file name in the Databases Available panel The system asks if you wish to delete the database Click OK to delete it To delete the whole Database Type and all imported files associated with it Go to the DB Design tab Left click to select a Database Type Click the Delete button to the right of this panel The system asks if you wish to delete the database definition type a
203. h will only appear when clicking on user defined colours option Lal Bo to422 9r S Lal 423 to 845 97 Lal Bei to 1268 9 Lal Bili269 to 1691 97 Lal 692 to 2114 97 L l fle115 and over e Shrink to fit bands right will give you a range of colours from the default set over a small number of bandings i e in this example every third colour from the set has been used Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 233 of 389 February 2015 Twigg doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE K La Bb to 140 9r aM iii to 2819 i Lal lbs to 427 91 all 423 to 563 94 al lied to 704 94 all 705 to 845 91 12 10 2 Use first N Colours e When you use first n colours left this option picks up to the first 16 default colours set up using active colour configuration depending on how far you open out the banding from 1 16 Practise by selecting the various options and clicking on the redraw button to see the effect on the map display 12 10 3 Invert Map Colours Button It is possible to invert the Statistical Banding Colours using the up and down arrows button top left of the bands e g red for low numbers instead of blue for Indices of Deprivation data Statistics Mode Gi atistical banding eo Show over Base Yo F er 000 0 00 show counts only Interval 6 66 Upper Shading Style pper 99 90 4100 00 Shades of one colour Lil iilo 00 to 6 6591
204. hange the Symbol Centre Point 291 2 4 5 Save the new symbol 291 2 4 6 Delete all objects entire symbol 292 3 IMPORTING BMP GIF AND JPEG FILES 293 4 FILE MENU 294 5 HELP MENU 295 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 280 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 1 Introduction This application allows you to design new key site symbols or edit existing symbols The Appendix at the back of this chapter gives more detail on the Menu Options This example will take you through designing a new symbol and then editing it When the Active Key Sites is selected from the Tools menu a new window is opened which is divided into 6 panels ke Site Symbol Design helipad asb File Help DEE oe oa es g valo nnn Ny y ttti ttit tt ttt ttt tt ttt ttt titti Pick obiect Centre 0 0 46 23 Quarter scale map centred around Datum ra Object List Edit Symbol 0 Solid ellipse 500KM 1 Polygon 2 Solid Rectangle v pa Review Symbol Scale 100 a Ko TSM total solution mapping 12 5Km Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 281 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 1 Guide to the Panels 1 1 1 Drawing Tools and Drawing Area Where individual objects of the symbol are drawn and edited top left Fick object Centre 0 0 46 23 Quarter scale ma
205. he table option is selected the table may be split into several tables each of which holds different columns of Activity so Data will be split over several tables Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 174 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato Census Data Options that change the way data is written into the report when you have selected the Census Table option on the Data Format Tab see below Counts by selected areas Only Selected areas are used to calculate the value of each cell in the reference data Table Counts by all areas All areas are used to calculate the value of each cell in the reference data Table Use Colour Activity List tables reference data tables and Comparison tables will be formatted in colour if they are written out Landscape Mode The page orientation normally defaults to Portrait but when you select this option the Activity table will be written in landscape mode The reasons for fields being greyed out are described in the Greyed Out Fields section 1 5 19 see below 1 5 3 Export Content Tab A dialog box like the one below appears containing the components that can be exported to MS Word in blue text Export to Microsoft Word Data Format Select items to be exported Map Activity key Activity criteria Activity notes E a a E Activity list N B Some options are greyed out in this
206. he Experian Mosaic folder that housed the CD for more detail The number of Households for each Postcode Grid Reference is added to the export file automatically and this is why it is shown but not available to select If one of the Check Boxes has a tick in it then this data will be added to the export file They will be inserted into the export file in the order as they appear on the screen that is e Lifestyle Group amp Type combined e Group e Type e Households e Postcode e f Group or Type is not checked as below then a blank field will be added to the export file also the Lifestyle field will be blank e Click Next to start adding Lifestyle data to your file Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 351 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Goto The number of Households is always output Four fields are inserted at end of the file if you choose Group and Type Lifestyle Group and Type combined Group Type Household Count Postcode if selected ge 2 1 N B If either Group or Type do not have a tick in the check box then the Lifestyle field will be blank also 3 8 Processing the Data e When the NEXT button is clicked then the input file is read line by line and when the nearest postcode is found the Lifestyle data requested is inserted at the end of each line Process Data Tos fecon ny Added fae No Nei E 7 Uniagen sca Pliesse
207. he following options Date Month of Year Day of Week Week of Year a a Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 102 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to ifa Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Date bands break the data down depending on the range of dates available into calendar years months or weeks The bands can be edited before you click Execute to create up to 64 separate bands In the example below we can see four bands of whole years because the data contains that many whole year s worth of data from 2001 to 2004 It also shows a No Data band to separate out blank dates should they appear in the records Banding Cali IMIE Join 0 previows Jointonest e Month of year bands i e one coloured dot for each month begin with January and look like the example below Spit brie tw Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 103 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe e Day of week bands i e one coloured dot for each weekday start with Sunday and look like the example below o ET vointo next e Week of Year bands example below as the name suggests create one coloured dot for each week of the year They start with the week containing January 1 which is called Week 1 This is especially useful to those who need to map data over the course of the year in weekly bands j
208. he input file MUST be comma separated in TXT format and the first record in the file MUST be the header row containing the names of the fields separated by commas e g Patient Nr AdmissionMethod PatientClassification Postcode Specialty CEPIEndDate Sex Age RegGP Practice Specialty Provider 7068197 11 1 CM22 7BX 11000 04 02 01 2 52 F81004 T amp O Surgery RANOO 7070175 11 1 CM24 8LB 11000 06 07 01 2 72 F81053 T amp O Surgery RANOO 2067 11 1 CM6 1QD 11000 06 08 01 1 78 F81118 T amp O Surgery RQ800 3 2 What Will Be Added ACTIVE Lifestyle Match allows the User to input from a database the Group Type and Household count of Lifestyles for the selected area within the map and add these to the input file as extra fields at the end of each record There are four extra fields Lifestyle Group and Type together Group Type Household Count a ON gt If Group or Type are not required then either will be replaced by an empty field in the data file that is created Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 346 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 3 3 Starting the Matching Process e Launch the program from the list of Tools in TSM as above e Select option Perform data lifestyle matching and click Next e At any time in the process the CANCEL button can be clicked and the software will be reset even during reading of the input file Lifestyle Match Pe
209. hould not be edited in MS Drawing by double clicking on it This is because MS Drawing may redisplay the metafile in the Word document differently and it will allow the map to be resized without keeping the x axis to y axis ratio correct 1 5 12 Section Breaks section breaks are placed around Reference Data Tables and Activity List Tables when they are written in landscape mode so that the whole document is not changed to landscape mode This means a page break is added which may not always be appropriate 1 5 13 Page Orientation The report writer assumes that the Word document is in portrait mode when it starts to write to it as there is no way of ascertaining the page orientation If it is actually in landscape mode sections intended to be in portrait mode will be written in landscape mode and vice versa 1 5 14 Formatting Formatting is not applied by defining and using styles because styles cannot be applied to individual table cells The Normal style is used and formatting is applied to individual characters 1 5 15 Frames Frames do not have borders because if a frame encloses a table that has text above or below it in the frame the border will be applied to each paragraph of the table too this is a bug in Word Borders can be applied to frames in Word after the report has been written using the Borders and Shading option on the Format menu or more easily by having the Borders toolbar visi
210. hows the results see below However if any of the items in the Activity Query is checked off box un checked then the individual count for that entry is deducted from the total i e the total number of records In the example below Chimney Fire has been deselected so the 339 records relating to Chimney Fires are not included in the total 503513 above left of the list If the list remains in this state when you click the pencil button to draw the map the Chimney Fire records will not appear as dots on the map ose l Sizing bo _ rr bs UER af L Fed Standard mi fy Poly Total Activity by New Library 5 55513 e pragrarn PW Chinmay Fire 3639200 False Alarm Good Intaet 322900 False Alarm Malicious 1P5390 R FORI Fire 7324908 Overborder Attended SWIG Secondary Fire 100S Spate Civil Disturb Condt 5335282 Spec Serv Emergency 1S7o19 Uwt SAFADA Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 116 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 1 3 Remove all dots If you wish to display some but not all of the dot colours left click on the Clear All button see below middle this will remove the crosses from all individual entries on the Activity Toolbox This is more noticeable when you run a Colour By query to break the data down into categories see chapter 4 This will enable you to select one or more of the entries by left clicking specific check boxe
211. ick on a date field box Select a sequence of days by dragging the cursor over the days of the week Alternatively loop the cursor around the top of the box to select Saturday and Sunday Add a sequence of months by dragging the cursor over the months of the year Alternatively loop the cursor around the side of the box to select December and January Click the OK button bottom left Colour the query by selecting the Date field from the colour by list above the Execute button optional Execute the query e Redraw to show the dots on the map 5 1 2 Time Click on the binoculars button top right to access the Query Writer Right click on a time field box Select a sequence of hours by dragging the cursor over the hours of the day Alternatively loop the cursor around the side of the box to select hours around midnight Click the OK button bottom left Colour the query by selecting the Date field from the colour by list above the Execute button optional Execute the query e Redraw to show the dots on the map 5 2 Setting bands Select a range field date time whole number from the colour by list above the Execute button Click the value button that appears above Execute Date Time etc Click on a band to alter it Use the buttons to alter the values up and down to set a range for this band Click Join to Next to add this band to the next one Click Split in Two to halve this band Alternatively choose anoth
212. ick the boundary name e g 2012 Local Government Boundaries Select option Set All Below On Redraw the map pencil TIP Make a copy of the files in the Boundaries folder c program files active boundaries using Windows Explorer Doing this means that you can experiment with the boundary settings but can go back to a default set if necessary Boundary structure Calculation amp thematic Right Click To Load Boundaries Load Boundaries l Highlight the Boundaries that pou wish to load Select Multiple items by holding the Chl key dow test ond ser Polygons Lircles 2003 Local Government Bounda Circles 2 10km Grid Set 2 km Grid Set Temp 10km Grid Set Temp 20km Grid Set Do vou wish to continue Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 253 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 3 Default Properties The Boundaries Toolbox provides many facilities for creating modifying displaying and performing analysis upon various structured area definitions These area definitions may be used to represent any type of geographic areas such as PCT Boundaries Ambulance Zones Fire Brigade Station Grounds operational areas etc 3 1 Current Boundary Set This drop down list at the very top see example below contains all loaded boundary sets Choosing from this list allows you to specify the current boundary set 1391 Census Boundaries
213. idential www activeinformatics com Page 65 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 2 7 7 Importing Education Learner Data Example The following steps take you through importing a typical set of learner data in order to produce some learner analysis subsequently see Chapter 4 e Click on the DB design tab e Click the Wizard button e Stage 1 Select the CSV or TXT file that you want to load into TSM e Click on Next e Stage 2 Under General Title give the database a name e g Learners e This automatically fills the Print Title e Click on Next e Stage 3 The postcode data field needs to be Data Type Postcode locator e Data fields that contain just numbers area Data Type Whole Number e Data fields that contain just text are Data Type Text e Data fields that contain numbers and text are Data Type Text e Click on Next Hame Total Sounion Mappng 110 Fet Fet Area 2001 Census TOI Cerasus Wares Wares esson 70820 070824012103537 g ma g aala aa sree 2 P Tiat aia C Rawr Guy M cisty W Pinay nam N Seieren Kln Fe Raster amp Vector Gumiwses T Sbeeedary routaa Ware feanuwe I Rekrence Areas l Mioi Gi 1 Spesis Dfe mre Ap gap a Database Design Wizard Stage 3 Set Meld Oefinmons erian EE Fieis fishi Uata lype est Sample x D With Oste vie Peatcode locat v AB dus s Mare ae bo At hu aD ews et
214. ill simply add the word Total for you e Click Next Select the field whech contains the cow titles if appropnate for Crosst type data if none selected thsi wil defaut to the text Total aros oe Se Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 311 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato to ife e Enter a name for the table in the Heading box e Enter extra text in the optional Sub Heading box e Enter further detail the optional Table Description box e Click Next Set descriptions for the Reference Data table e Click Next to process the data Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 312 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to 70 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e The table is then displayed in the format it will appear in TSM i e in rows and totals for the data columns e Click Accept to save the data Summary of the data processed and to be loaded to the table E the data looks acceptable click Accept to save the data To Ee EC e Click Next Table or Prev Table to look at data that has been loaded previously e Click Exit to quit e Finally when you click the Exit button the program gives you the option to process another file Yes or quit the program No Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 313 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing Goto 1 6 Deleting Data
215. ill be available to you when assigning icons to Key Site Databases Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 293 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 The FILE menu has the following options NEW If the drawing area is clear will create a new area for drawing If the area is not clear the application will display If OK drawing area is cleared and new file created If Cancel ignore initial command OPEN Opens an existing file containing a Symbol by opening the standard file open dialogue If the drawing area is not clear then the above question is asked Site Symbol Design Panda asb BA OK to abort current edits LOK Cancel SAVE Saves the existing symbol drawing to the opened file SAVE AS Opens the standard SAVE AS dialogue box to allow the symbol to be saved EXIT Exit the program if the symbol has been changed but not saved the above question is asked Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 294 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bein cang doto The HELP menu has the following options CONTENTS When selected will display the full List of Contents and from here the User can select the item required SEARCH Allows the User to search for help on a particular subject ABOUT Displays a window giving information about the application Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 295 of 389
216. in a session name Then press the ENTER key on the keyboard e An existing session may be deleted by highlighting it and pressing the delete key you are prompted before the delete is executed e Press ESC or click elsewhere to cancel and or dismiss the list Please Note e Changing the current session name does nothing except just that data is not automatically restored nor saved you must explicitly use the session restore or session save buttons for anything to happen with the new session e Sessions exist as subdirectories in the file system and as such the names are limited to 150 characters in length No filename extension or spaces are permitted use underscores _ instead of spaces e You may not delete a session if it is the currently active one Neither may you delete the session named Default within the program because Active expects this session to exist at all times while the program is running 2 10 1 Session Save Button Clicking this button saves the current session s working data to the default or named session relating to the Reference Area Set you are using e g Census 2001 OAs session variables that are saved e Map settings includes zoom history map layers selected key site toggle states filters picked areas concentric circles and labels e Area settings includes area definition in use area selections e Compare settings includes Show amp Base levels Show amp Base cards statistical bands sha
217. in the Provider ini File The initialisation file Provider INI needs to refer to the NLPG data in order that TSM can use it to plot data on the map using the UPRN Provider INI is normally found in c program files active and can be edited using Notepad The top section USRDEF needs to contain a line referring to the location of the NLPG database see example below USRDEF mapdir C Program Files Active Map datadir C Program Files Active Data rejectdir C Program Files Active Data Reject sessionsdir C Program Files Active Sessions liodir C Program Files Active Library symdir C Program Files Active Symbols polydir C Program Files Active Polygons BoundaryDir C Program Files Active Boundaries aslfile C Program Files Active ABCdef asl sasfile C Program Files Active ABCsas asl liotile C Program Files Active Library ABClib asl nlpgfile C Program Files Active ABCnIpg ASL Where ABC is your system code short for Abbey Business Consultancy for example Please see the line above in the USRDEF section for your 3 letter system code Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 330 of 389 February 2015 bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE 2 NLPG Import The NLPG Import Wizard NLPGadmin exe can be found in the c program files active folder This extracts record types 21 Basic Land and Property Unit from the CSV file and creates a new table in TSM that includes the UPRN and its Easting and
218. inished searching click Close to turn off the Find function TT Chapel Street B4540 509088 220984 Chapel Viaduct A505 509025 221045 To measure the straight line distance between one point the Datum and a variety of other points you can set a new datum location with the co ordinates 0 0 This effectively becomes the centre of the map 3 6 1 Seta New Datum Click on the Set Datum tool and it will remain pressed in and when the cursor is returned to the Map Display note it has changed to the position cursor e Position the cross anywhere in the Map Display and click Note the Distance to Datum Indicator adjacent to the Set Datum tool has changed to 0 000 e Move the cursor around the Map Display and as it moves note the Distance to Datum Indicator varies to suit the relative straight line distance that the cursor is at any one point from the newly set datum point Reset datum as many times as is necessary in any work session Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 42 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 3 6 2 Distance To Datum Adjacent to the Information tool is the Distance to Datum Indicator that displays a different distance for each record in both kms Kilometres and mls miles This is the straight line distance between the current Datum Point defined later and the position of the current Key Site record After making enq
219. int anywhere in area that has yet to be selected which is not to be included and click to see a light mesh hatching added to that area hal hal e Click on the double arrows in the top right of the card stack to reveal the Area Directory e Right click and Switch ALL OFF to leave the ones you ve selected filled with hatching e Click the Plus button to add in the Output Areas selected hatched Display areas by Output Areas E W All Output Areas Catchment 4 N B You can also use the area picking tools to trap with a polygon and analyse dot data in the Activity tab e g for one or more Output Areas TIP Return to Area Groups and use the Area Group tools at any stage from now on to Re define the extent of the area selected or the extent of the area in which to display Reference data For best use of the Compare Toolbox later it is suggested there are no more than 30 Output Areas selected at this stage Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 198 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto 4 Area Directory e To see those areas which have been selected in the Area Directory click on the words All Output areas and see the first directory level containing a list of the LA Districts the Area Group that were the first visible group Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Catchment 4 Broadclyst 12UBGROO01 Broadclyst 18UBGR0002 Broadclyst 18UBGROO03 Broadclyst 18UBGRO0O4 C eroadelyst 18UB
220. ion to Add the entered postcode is made available e Click Find again to display the default Easting and Northing values e f you chose to Add a postcode it is automatically given the extreme left and bottom of the map as its Easting and Northing Values Therefore these will need to be edited so that the new place name is in the correct position and comes on at the appropriate zoom level e Press Exit to quit N B It is not possible to delete postcodes using this utility Active send updates to the Postcode File on your system on a disk as part of the annual upgrade of TSM These updates will overwrite any manual settings you have made to the Easting and Northing locations of postcodes with the official Royal Mail locations Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 304 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Part 14 Active Indices Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 306 1 1 Import a New File or View Data 306 1 2 View Existing Data Tables 306 1 3 File Format 308 1 4 Data Restrictions 308 1 5 Importing New Data 309 1 6 Deleting Data 314 1 7 Using the Data with TSM 314 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 305 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 1 Introduction Active Indices accessible via the Tools option allows you to build data tables containing up to 99 rows and up to 99 columns of data
221. ips 4 1 Fire Data Queries 4 1 1 Change the size of the boxes Query boxes that are located in parts of the Query Writer in a way that makes them hard to read as below can be edited using the Query Screen Design option pis bas tes or mui Ga Ha mM timo iie _ oani LJE LAS r e Click on DB Design tab to re organise the tables in the Query Writer e Select the database e Click on the Edit button e Toggle to Query Screen Design e Move the tables around by dragging and dropping you can place them on top of each other if needed and make the boxes longer and wider as required e Take care NOT to cover up the Colour by box e Click Save far right then OK e Return to the Activity Tab to see the effect as below il E ii a eat mee mine a hie mere mule on we e Ka we enie TOA ma bea aso En wrt at ad aa oe uy wee uv le we we use HHH ranged Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 126 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 1 2 Ranges and lists When you design the database it may be prudent to express some whole number fields as lists rather than ranges particularly if you wish to select several individual items For example Response Codes and Incident Types may be expressed as numbers but loading these fields into range boxes means that you can only select a sequence e g 1 to 3 as belo
222. items from some or all of the lists in order to build up a very specific and complex query N B Exclamation marks in the list boxes for example the first entry in the Incident Description field above represent records where the field was blank in the data 2 3 Count Box Each selection list contains a Count Box in the top right corner which has two numbers either side of a forward slash The left hand number represents the number of items selected from the list The right hand number represents the total number of list items that are available for selection In the example below none of the listed nine items have been selected yet incidentlype Chimney Fire 2 4 Select All Button e Below the Count Box are two buttons The left hand blue one click will select all list items when clicked In the example below the Count Box that all nine available list items are selected Incidentlype Chimney Fire False Alarm Good Intent False Alarm Malicious FDR1 Fire Overborder Attended Secondary Fire Spate Civil Disturb Condt Spec Serv Emergency UwF S FADA Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 92 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 5 Clear All Button e The right hand grey button has the opposite effect and when this is clicked all of the list items for this field is cleared and the Count Box value returns to zero selected incident T
223. ke all the years appear as 4 digits before importing 4 10 Postcode Locator Click the New button to the right of the field definitions check box By clicking on Postcode Locator the following will then be displayed Field Definition Field Type Postcode Locator z import width 0 Field Id PC Full name Postcode e Import width This must be set to O zero see above e Field Id PC is displayed automatically but can be overwritten if required e Full name Postcode is displayed automatically but can be overwritten if required Field Definition i Field Type hh mm ss 24h l OK import width p Field id AD a Full name Call Time On or after AC Call Date e Click OK to save the field definition and continue Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 80 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 Query Screen Design Now all the fields are defined we can design a series of search boxes known as a Query Writer to enable us to ask questions of the data and map the results e Click on the Query Screen Design option e Click on the New button and then the down arrow to the right of the Type box listing the options which are 1 Selection List Descriptions etc 2 Range criteria Date Time Number etc 5 1 Range Criteria To create the Incident Number Call Date and Call Time ra
224. lay are one or more symbols of the same design Each symbol depicts the geographic position of a Key Site e To remove the Key Site symbols from the map click each button in the Key Site Panel so that they are seen to pop out TIP After each Key Site is clicked or off the Map Display auto redraws for convenience 2 4 Refresh Map Button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 25 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Click the map Refresh button yellow pencil above the map that will for example redraw the Map Display without the Key Site symbols being displayed Alternatively hit the F5 key on your keyboard 2 5 Motorway Junctions and Railway Stations Motorway Junctions and Railway Stations are normally displayed on the vector maps y default although you may need to zoom in to see them in detail For example a map size of 5km will enable you to see a particular motorway junction number If you need to turn the nodes off to prevent the map from becoming too cluttered ensure that the line in c program files active provider ini in the Settings section is set to the option to Display_Nodes 0 or Display_Nodes false making it clearer for example in a large city where there may be many railway stations as per the map of London below To turn the nodes back ON set it option to Display_Nodes 1 or Display_Nodes true When you next open Active the node will
225. le next to target date click the drop down list or drag the mouse up the screen the month will increase Drag the mouse down to decrease the month value e The next rectangle will default to a day by doing the same as the date the day can be changed e The target time can be set up in a similar manner e The min speed can also be set up in this way but if this value is set higher than the Core Speeds of some roads then these roads will not be used in the Isochrone being created e The last three items in this panel are filled in from the PIN used when generating the Isochrone The place name can then be changed if required e The middle panel allows you to allocate comments to the new Isochrone set to give a brief description of what they represent as well as setting the times and colours of the Isochrone sets The outlines of the lsochrones can also be switched on or off in this panel e The bottom panel Drivetime Trackback allows you to view the quickest shortest route between two points within an Isochrone set Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 376 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 9 3 Creating Isochrones e Click on Drivetime Tools e Click on New Isochrone Set e Inthe Road Speed file selection panel select the Core Variance and Override files required to produce the correct Isochrone Road speed tle selection Core file Heaps Sp
226. lected filled with hatching e Click the Plus button to add in the Output Areas selected e Click the equals button again e Click on the Graph button top right of the toolbox to reveal a table of figures 10 3 Print export compare table and key Go to the Print tab Click on the Excel button Select the Compare Table option Click OK to create a spreadsheet Click on the Word button Select the Compare Stats Banding Key option Click and drag the mouse to highlight the image of the key in the Word document Right click and copy the key to clipboard Go to the spreadsheet created earlier Right click and paste the key into Excel Right click on the map in TSM Go to the spreadsheet created earlier Right click and paste the map into Excel Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 218 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato TSM User Guide Part 10 Comparisons and Stats Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 221 1 1 Show Data card 222 1 1 1 Loading the Show Data Card 222 1 1 2 Renaming the Show Data Card 222 1 2 Show Counts Only Mode 223 Z COMPARISON 224 2 1 Base Data card 224 2 2 Base Area Setting 224 2 3 Show over base Mode 225 2 4 Display areas by 226 2 5 Summed 228 2 6 Comparing Two Data Sets 229 2 7 Statistical Banding 230 2 7 1 Increase the Number of Bands 230 2 7 2 Turn the Histogram On or Off 230 2 7 3 Setting the Number of Decimals 231 2 7 4 Changing the Interval
227. les KOTEW Indeery KSROGEW industry maes x SAEN ingen ou Net KS JEW NSSeC KSETIEW NSSel males KSENEW NSSeaC imas Ail usual pecedectts All usual renetervts Ail hiusehoidi All househnids All ususi residentia All households Al ususi renetonts Ail househoics Al commana ectab chirrects AF used tooderts n communa ectabhenmerts All usual rendomte aged 15 and over Ail ususi rescos aged 15 to TS All mate usoa resents aged 35 to 74 Ail emait usua rescierts aged gt E to 74 Al usual cemdonts aged 16 to 74 in employment The woot belye the comsus Ail maie usus rescierts aged to 4 p enpioymert the weet before Me census Ati female usani resderts aged 14 to 4 on employment the week before the census Ail ususi resstentes aged 10 to 7 All mate usus repaterts aged 16 to f4 Alli fomai vocal remderts aged 14 to 74 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 206 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 8 1 Census Tables Each of the Census Area Statistics CAS tables is in the form of a spreadsheet Double clicking on any description or row in the table on the left hand side can launch these spreadsheets _to List One person One family One family One family One family One family categories household household only All only only only only Household Aged 65 amp a
228. lick on the Reference tab this takes you to the census data Click on table called Index of Deprivation England 2010 Rank You need to select the Rank of IMD Score cell in order to look at overall deprivation Select the Rank of IMD Score cell place the tick against the total This gets automatically loaded on the card Rename the card if you want to and drag it up on to the card stack 2j WALO ALT TOUTA TONI NA SOM IEPRNVATIOI SKELS to MD AND CERETTA DISASLITY TRANNY ann SORE come SEES 2 ee SS lO Display Courts Of All Arosa Selected Amas Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 214 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 9 1 2 Displaying the data on the Map To display the data click on Compare Drag the deprivation data into Show Data In statistics Mode click Show counts only Click equals Change to appropriate bandings Reverse the colour banding to show red for low ranks areas that are more deprived 7 N tories Siemen Nh FO F Seterdery aiea Wine aues M Hotere Aos Mavens Ged T Sitets l heraa O Ares groupe enta meene Disia a E in D Base aroa SeperOetperttonieltinimliones curese Stem ever Base T Sten casta arty C F Sahe d ase oy W state ton whee je tea F Sesteds iiae Colour specturt Pesi odtis C User defined colours Deere te i haeta EUes fol hi irs
229. lipboard 7 2 Print activity records 8 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 8 1 Re size dots 8 2 Set dot size bands 8 3 Draw a polygon to select records 8 4 Merging activity dot queries TSM USER GUIDE PART 6 KEY SITES 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Key Sites Toolbox 2 KEY SITE IMPORT 2 1 Typical data fields 2 2 Key Sites Import Wizard 3 CREATE KEY SITES MANUALLY 3 1 Name the database 3 2 Add a key site record 3 3 Assign a symbol 3 4 Display the key site on the map 4 EDIT KEY SITE DETAILS 4 1 Edit records 4 2 Change a Key Site Icon Confidential www activeinformatics com bringing Goto 139 140 140 140 141 142 142 143 143 143 143 144 145 147 147 149 149 149 152 152 153 154 156 156 157 Page 9 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 3 Remove a Key Site Button 4 4 Export Key Site Data 4 5 Refresh Database with new data 5 KEY SITE FILTER 5 1 Filtering sites on the display 5 2 Disable a filter 5 3 Clear a filter 6 KEY SITE PIE CHARTS 6 1 Displaying values as pie charts 6 2 Hide pie charts 6 3 Remove pie charts 7 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 7 1 Add a new record 7 2 Filtering 7 3 Creating pie charts 7 4 Import BMP JPEG or transparent GIF TSM USER GUIDE PART 7 PRINT AND EXPORT 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Print Toolbox 1 2 Print Set Up 1 3 Print Content 1 4 Print page 1 5 MS Word Report Writer 1 6 M
230. lue of that cell is shown in the cell value display These maps let you know where the concentration of your data is located The red areas equal areas of high concentration and the blue areas equal low areas of concentration Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 13 1 Creating a Hotspot Map with Auto grid To use auto grid Create an Activity dot query and store it in the Card Stack Go to the Compare tab Drag and drop the Activity data card into the Show Data panel tick the Auto grid feature Select a Grid Cell Size from the drop down list top right e g 500 metres Click equals top left Please Note you must click equals after each grid cell change a A W Auto grid Grid cell size 500 metre a C afface Map cell value Show data LUDA c program files active Data Census20010 Base data pa Base area Output Areas summed Statistics Mode Statistical banding Show over Base C Lower 0 0 show counts only Interval 49 U r 43 Shading Style ee a C Shades of one colour 1 meee a lho to 97 91 x Shade from white to aM B8 to 146 97 Ai H47 to 195 9r Colour belel i oou A Gr Choe to 20a Shaded to black Lal P45 to 293 9r 7 294 to 342 9 Colour spectrum am B43 and over C Vivid shades Pastel shades User defined colours f Shrink to fit bands O Use first N colours alelEISISIE Shel Confidential www activeinformatics com Page
231. lution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e In the Database tab select the Postcodes database this gives you all the postcodes in your map area e Inthe Activity Tab click on Execute this selects all the postcodes e Next draw them on the map using the pencil button e The two numbers that appear in the right hand panel represent the total number of postcodes in the file the Total number and the number of postcodes within the hashed areas the Poly number oe 6 Se eS ee re Mie s merit nesem f _4AgMiow 2 Rates oy fe Actanty N Perey metsa W Setfomarts Teni MFU C Rater Bert t agimtes f Batendory rotasi Water kunes M Rokona Ansas f Nions Ged F Sree Other baoe M Aree qe mi G A EEA E die ee PEI a ee n r E e a aves b Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 239 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe e Next in the Print Tab click on the Excel button export to Excel e Select Activity List e Just select the Postcode e Click on OK e Save the spreadsheet as a csv file called Postcodes Compare table Consus inbi All aimee C Geintted aimee lt t I Ret Area Code amp Otse l Geograph Locators e Click on the Utilities button circled in red e Click on ACTIVE Address Generator to begin the extract process See Chapter 17 for further details jiis
232. ly Export the Travel Time Boundaries Into TSM e Left click an Isochrone group name which is then highlighted e g Evesham e Right click on the Ilsochrone Group e Choose the Export option then To Total Solution Mapping Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 388 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Export set or group to A new boundary set with the same name as your Isochrone group e g Evesham e Click Export and the Isochrones are copied as boundaries to Active TSM e Open the Active TSM program e Go to the Boundary tab e Right click and load the Isochrones as the current boundary set e N B the correct light bulbs and items will need to be switched on 2 outline and 3 fill on the lsochrone row in the light bulb panel above e Turn on the Isochrone boundaries right click the name and Set all below on e Refresh the map and the Isochrones will be displayed Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 389 of 389
233. ly click hit the Update button below and Place Name successfully Updated will appear in the Quick Help panel on the right e To reverse any changes select the placename from the list or Find it as above make the necessary changes and click Update e Press Exit to quit TIP To change the actual name of a place e g to change from Sutton to Sutton Surrey it will be necessary to delete it and add it again It may help to take a screen print or write down the coordinates in the Results panel before you delete the entry 3 1 Adding Placenames e lf however no matches are made by the system when you click Find then the option to Add the entered place name is made available e f you chose to Add a place name it is automatically given the extreme left and bottom of the map as its Easting and Northing Values and 0 low 25 high as its minimum and maximum zoom Therefore these will need to be edited so that the new place name is in the correct position and comes on at the appropriate zoom level e Press Exit to quit 3 2 Deleting Placenames e If a place name or a range of place names is matched then once one is highlighted the option to Delete the selected place name is available e f you click on the Delete button the following window is displayed as a prompt e Clicking Yes will remove the selected name from the system If you delete something by mistake you ca
234. mbers it so that you can import it immediately if you wish The system enables you to look at samples of 100 records at a time then move backwards lt lt and forwards gt gt through the file The example below shows the first 100 records of the Test CSV file File Information Sample of source file IncidentNumber incident Type IncidentNumber IncidentType 751012 Spec Ser Emergency T4011 Spec Ser Emergency 31344032 Spec Serv Emergency 13390031 3390031 13390031 Spec Sern Emergency Spec Serv Emergency Spec Serv Emergency 14654011 False Alarm Good Intent False Alarm Good Intent False Alarm Good Intent 49336012 False Alarm Good Intent 14907021 Spec Serv Emergency 14907021 Spec Serv Emergency 14907021 Spec Serv Emergency 14907021 Spec Ser Emergency 14907021 Spec Serv Emergency lal Destination File Status Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 64 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 2 6 Too many unique values warning message If a field such as lists of email addresses first names or first lines of street addresses has too many unique values associated to it i e over 1 024 you will not be able to use it to search when running a query If it is not practical to use this field to create a list and therefore the system will disable its box on the Query Writer and display a warning message on the preview see below and also during the import which both nee
235. mbol by editing the percentage value to 200 e Clicking on the Symbol Scaling button can reveal the size difference on the previews Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 288 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 2 4 Edit a Symbol The following instructions show you how to make a number of changes to the symbol drawn previously for example Delete the Polyline and create a polygon with thicker outline Increase the size of the rectangle and move it to the background Change the Centre point used to position symbol on the map of the symbol Save the new symbol as TESTNEW ASB eS 2 4 1 Delete the Polyline To delete an object from a symbol select the Polyline in the Object List Box and then click on the Delete Object Button Object List olid ellipse 0olid ellipse Solid ellipse Solid ellipse olid ellipse 0olid ellipse Solid ellipse Polygon 50lid Rectangle 1 2 3 4 5 7 r The following dialogue box will appear SITEEDIT e Click on the OK button and the selected object will be deleted Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 289 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato e Now click on the line width 2 button below m left before clicking on the Polygon button EEEE E Move to the Drawing Area positioning crosshair pointer at 5 45 and click the left mous
236. me stamped 12 3 Calculation and Thematic e Run an Activity Query for a selection of records your data e Rename it and save it to the card stack e Click New e Click Execute to run a query for all the records your data e Rename it and save it to the card stack e Go to the Boundary tab e Right click in the Boundary Structure tab e Select Load Boundaries e Click a boundary set from the pop up list e Click Load then OK e Select the Calculation amp Thematic tab e Drop the Activity query into the Dataset 1 box e Select the area in which to calculate e g Ward Isochrone etc from the drop down list e In Result Formula select Dataset1 Dataset2 from the drop down list e Click the equals button to see the colour bands appear e Click the Stats lightbulb to turn it on e Select the Stats band colours and style and click Redraw e Click the Display hide results sheet button bottom right to toggle between the map and a table of percentages Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 278 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 12 4Iimport MID MIF e Right click in the Boundary Structure tab e Select Import MID MIF Boundary File Please note both files must be in the same folder e Click the Select File button e Click Yes e Click and highlight the column heading that contains the boundary Names e Enter a name for the
237. more detailed map will be shown based on the longest side of the zoom box You have now zoomed into an area of the entire mapping available The horizontal and vertical distance across the mapping in the Map Display is now displayed in the Map Size Indicator in both km and mls Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 27 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 Alternatively it is also possible to zoom in and out in by 50 percent or out by 200 percent of the current map size using the scroll bar underneath the set of zoom buttons TIP Active will allow you to zoom down to a map size of 500x500 metres Please Note The Zoom In tool and the position cursor remain activated until cancelled right click thereby allowing a repeat of the above operation If the mapping now displayed is satisfactory then click the Zoom In button or right click the map to cancel the instruction and return the cursor to the default cursor 2 6 2 Previous Zoom To reverse the zooming in process click the Previous Zoom tool and the mapping in the Map Display will be redrawn as it was before the last zoom Active will remember the last 20 zooms pans in the order in which the Map Display is zoomed in and or panned By repeatedly clicking the Previous Zoom tool the Map Display will return to the entire original mapping TIP Please note that the zoom box can be commenced anywhere within the current Map Di
238. n C Placename Configuration C Postcode Configuration Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 297 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 Colour Configuration Left click on Colour Configuration to select it and click on the Execute button underneath 2 1 Setting Dot Colours This is the default selection when the program is started up or click on the Dot Colours icon 1 of the 4 icons top right e To select the merged points then click on number 01 which will highlight the whole line including the Red Green and Blue colour values see below Colour Configuration Map layers Map features Colour values Red Green Blue 0 0 255 255 0 Colour settings 255 0 0 EBEE EEEN 255 ma 0 0 Ea EEE mE Red 255 Green o Bue o Upd Prev Def bj m ba La ba Co laa Go e Now click on the second Green rectangle within the Colour Palette and notice that the highlighted line has changed to represent this Green colour e Underneath the colour palette click on any of the values next to Red Green or Blue and a scroll bar will appear e Move the scroll bar left or right to change the intensity of the dot colour relating to the hue you have chosen e All the changes are purely within this program and to change the colours for Active TSM then click on the Upd update button The colour list will
239. n 9 2 10 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 205 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 8 Census Categories In the middle of the Reference Toolbox there is a list containing three Section Headings and these are the main sections into which the 2011 Census Area Statistic CAS tables are grouped Only three main Sections headings are shown as the fourth is a user definable one detailed in ACTIVE Indices chapter There is a button at the top of the toolbox third right that launches the Indices Utility e The full click able list of census or reference tables appears immediately when you click on the Reference tab e Above the list is a new Search Engine that allows you to choose a keyword or phrase from a drop down list e g Car or Ethnic or key in your own alternative Only tables relating to your chosen word or phrase are then displayed making it easier to find the data you need to study TIP Triple click the Display Table Descriptions button circled at any time to return to the list or use the Show all tables option Age Structere KEtO2E Household Carnpeariane Aree pl oye mg teen healh isso 4 Gsadity Erne group KS201EW i Hourehole langeage heath amp proves of unpad core KSOOTEW lenpe KSSQZEW Communal estab sh mets A adeng KEW Quattcanors 4 students SAS IEW Ecosom actrty EcoeorM activty males KSC Ww Ecosomec arctrtty lma
240. n activity dots key sites or hotspot maps and redraw to overlay these on top of the raster image The opacity of dots can be altered using the slider from 0 solid to 100 transparent overlaid on top of the map below middle e Click the Raster amp Vector radio button switch on boundaries and redraw to overlay these on top of the raster e Click the Grey radio button to display the raster map in greyscale thus fading out the background and also highlighting the dots key sites or hotspot maps e Examples of TSM are displayed below showing OS 1 250 000 scale raster 1 left and 1 10 000 scale raster maps 2 left e Active also support OS MasterMap Topography layers in TSM see example below right me LENS Cr PA yet Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 37 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato 3 Map Toolbox Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 The Map Toolbox provides extra tools related to the map display The toolbox can be used to select some map display components find map locations take measurements and check information relating to key sites f a 17 ej amie 7U Longi La az ma we Fina Mat Geet is 4 ERTE SS oe eae Saas piens miss Ue O00 mia OANA N Se Seem o Site Information Fi 0 020 hum e OO oe catty peneana 2 Sn om 3 1 Measurement Tools FA bongy tat ur Find Nat God Mani eel tis ie B a
241. n always add it in as a new placename again see above e Press Exit to quit Actcontg Are you sure you Want Delete the Highlighted Placename Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 303 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 4 Postcode Configuration Exit from Placename Configuration Click on Postcode Configuration to select it and click on the Execute button underneath Type in the postcode you wish to amend edit or delete and click Find If you just type the first few characters of a postcode and click Find then the system will find all postcodes beginning with those letter s and numbers e To edit the existing Easting Northing and zoom values simply place the cursor in the any of the white rectangles below the title that you want to edit You can now overtype any details Postcode Eastings 464600 agate Northings 152500 152500 e To save the changes simply click the Update button and Postcode successfully updated will appear in the Quick Help bar on the right of the screen e Press Exit to quit N B There aren t any zoom values associated with postcodes This is because postcodes are not displayed as a layer on the map owing to the amount within each system Use Postcode labelling instead right click on the map 4 1 Adding Postcodes e lf however no matches are made by the system when you click Find then the opt
242. n key J e Now click on the save session button lt 1 e Anoption appears to save the current boundary settings as well In some larger systems e g the whole of the UK it may take a few minutes to save all the settings A Save Boundary settings For larger systems there may be a delay when saving ee e All the settings selections queries polygons and analysis undertaken in the current session will be saved to the hard disk e Consequently when you restore a session an option appears allowing you to restore the boundary settings that were saved Restore Boundary settings For larger systems there may be a delay when restoring Any number of sessions may be saved in this manner giving each a new name Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 273 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 9 Exports and Boundary Sets 9 1 Export Activity Data to a CSV File The program has the ability to export Activity dot data through any boundary set of your choice to a date and time stamped CSV file This will give you a detailed soreadsheet of each record and in which boundary it sits giving your more flexibility in the way you can output data from your ACTIVE system e Simply run an Activity query e Load the appropriate boundary set and display it e Then right click on the Boundary Structure and select Export Activity Data 9 2 Export Bounda
243. n the keyboard The title of the source databases from which the particular record has been extracted will be displayed i e Hospital Stations etc Below this will be the record that will show at least Name Address and Postcode these being the fixed fields in each database record and may show up to 12 other fields of data if they have been configured Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 44 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato e Now if you click another symbol in the Map Display you will see the database record change If the next Key Site symbol selected is of a different Site Type to the last then when the relevant record is displayed the source database will change automatically e Right click the map to turn off the tool e lf more than 2 symbols occupy the same postcode or locator you can cycle through them using the left and right arrow buttons above the Name and Address Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 45 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 Step By Step Frequently Used Functions 4 1 Zoom Click on the zoom tool first button above the Activity and Statistics layers Left click and hold the mouse on the map to the North West of the location you want to zoom in on Drag the cursor down to the bottom right of the location you want to zoom in on Let go of the mouse and the map is
244. ncel Motorway Junction point use right click to cancel Select the type of point required and move to the map where the mouse pointer will change to a vertical arrow Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 362 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Click with the mouse on the position of the map where the new point is to be added and the following window will appear below fOqS99e1e 4527 72h Un named minor road Ald Other specify e Select where to place the new Point Locate by Postcode ie E Sheet Easting Northing Sheet amp grid reference C E National grid reference C I E Cancel ae lf Other is selected the following window is displayed right allowing the position of the point to be determined by a Full Postcode Sheet and Grid Reference relative to the Sheet Co ordinates normally up to 4 digits Easting and 4 digits Northing or by full National Grid Reference 6 digits Easting and 6 digits Northing e Click OK when the relevant field has been filled in e Click the Save button to finish the operation and draw the point on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 363 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 6 3 Road Filter e The default selection is All Roads but by clicking the down arrow any of the options can be chosen When a selection i
245. nd all its files Click OK to delete them ActiveProvider Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 74 of 389 bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 fe 4 Editing amp Creating Database Designs 4 1 Manual Database Designs It is possible to create database types manually and or edit the field properties of existing types To create a new database type manually e Click the DB design tab the database types available will be listed e Click on the New button to the right and the following panels are displayed below Database Definitions AB ILR Data PC Postcodes PS Postcodes S5U AC Training Database DB type Id Field definitions Query Screen Design F Elgizls T S T S S D ah 0 E Field Id Field Definition Field Type DB Type Id Key in a 2 digit code for the database e g IN short for incidents This must be unique and cannot appear in the list of Database Definitions above General title Key in a name for the database type e g Incidents This can contain anything you like but it should be meaningful and relevant to the data you wish to import There is no need to enter a Print title as the system defaults to the same value as the General title but can be overwritten if necessary Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 75 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015
246. ndby locations before actually deploying staff or appliances there Configure different rule sets to see the effects of blue lights rush hours extreme weather conditions e Reveal pockets of the population you serve that are not covered within a certain isochrone especially risk groups such as under 5s those on benefit or low income and the elderly Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 356 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 5 Map Detail Panel 5 1 Features Pressing these buttons displays map layers relating to left to right below Primary routes Secondary routes Railways Urban Outlines Motorway Junctions Roundabouts and Railway Stations AO om oem e Motorway Junctions Roundabouts and Railway Stations are displayed as points e The Urban Areas are just outlines not filled with a colour 5 2 County and District Borders Pressing these buttons displays map layers relating to left to right below Counties Districts Map Text place names road and point labels CD abe e The County borders are displayed in purple lines and the District boundaries in green lines TIP It is not recommended to have the Motorway Junctions button and the Map Text button on when at full extent of the map At this level of zoom the map will be too detailed to determine these features visually Ideally you should zoom in and then switch them on Confidential ww
247. ne is displayed are shown underneath the table like the example below incidents ciprogram Mesiaci Oats Census200 TWARDO Test ind Vetectefeatabte ire Cal Sgn Wi Type Hecpermepec becident ypac cee 2026 J0 sr eeu Sh Fal LOT YLE 4 Ver ste eE AAR wan im Emery Swego Taniej Brits FIEF A ARU 3 i5 g teow wo eee INE ALANI sm moe Maksas Ptatoen OCE HH FIRT A ARN we re 525 ewe We bee FRE ALARI 128201 i Prp 2PM FNE ANANN Fireed nage rio IFD CORNER LAL PHOPENTY 442M z Vere 44 7001 ALAM 510 Nedeesbe Pltheen IPSE FIRT ALARN 23 Lreety Sabwage Trde PEAS HRE AL Ane wir 5 ttpdoasbe Pathan MIFH tt AAR benti l hHiphsabe Purtir ye fas FIRE ALLAR 52 Creerg Seteage Torit IFM tet ALARN 1ta ba liesu Mee FRF A AR AISA J wz erp 444104 IRE LANN ttn 5 Htpteaebe Pistaan TAn Fa Fr MARU 5 treaty Scteege ario ED COMME aL PROPERTY 1282 5e Pury MIPMIRE MAR Hyeteew ty Purtir ba COMMER UL PROPERTY fice STNO 325 47 COMMERCIAL PROPENTY Pasw Ahi Fa COMMERCIAL PROPTRTY fers 7414 COMINL CIAL PROPENTY Porm 776 Fa COMMER PROPTRTY Herny 409 Fa HRE ALARA Htpdewebc Mariom GUF IRE AARU Paste 2 Fa COMMER LAL PROPERTY Officer ADO EFSF TSE ALAR a8 08 Pery TIS Peete A ARN Htreb eetr Hih HIED IRE SL Are wan ges Verw IMIR MAR wv liphest Pibes Saa Faa FIRE 2 ARN Tinu 5 Emerg Salvage Teoder Tl Pe FEE AAP 4607 5 Ofm Ate Aa Fa FRE A ARA teser 9 arg SJ M IGE ALANY hea na worp Sateage aris O77 Fee FIr ALARN 14908 erg wares tet ALAM 8430 11 5 Pery F
248. ne or two classed as Unknown Locator this may be caused by a typo a brand new postcode or one sits outside the borders of your map Please see section 3 2 on the Reject File below e Click on the Activity Tab once you have imported the data You can still edit the Database Design once you have created it e g to move and re size the boxes see below Please Note If you add to or remove any fields from the database design manually you will need to re import the data see section 6 Importing Data Manually If the file is completely different from anything you ve imported before it may be quicker to use the Wizard again from the beginning Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 71 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ie 3 2 Reject File A reject file will be created containing any lines that the import cannot process This will be created in the Reject folder e g C PROGRAM FILES ACTIVE DATA CENSUS2001WARD REJECT with the extension R e g TEST ACR This lists the problem lines in the data e g Unknown Locator These will need correcting if possible in the original data file before you attempt to re import the whole data file again In the example below several of the lines in the CSV file include Be Ea fan Fama Wew Heip 1 aa Incidentnumber Incidentaumber Incidenttype Inctdentoescription Easting Northing calloa
249. new boundary set e Click Process e Click the left hand box next to the Boundary Set name in Boundary Structure to toggle the whole set on three red dots will appear e Redraw the map to display the new boundaries 12 5Create new boundary e Right click in a blank space inside the Boundary Structure e Hover over the word New that appears then left click on Boundary Set e Go to the light bulb panel and right click rename Top Level as County and press return e Right click under County to append a new level call it Catchment and click OK e Right click New Boundary Set in the Boundary Structure e Hover over the word New that appears then left click on Boundary group beneath current e Right click New County Group e Hover over the word New that appears then left click on Boundary beneath current group 2nd option e Right click New County Group again e Hover over the word New that appears then left click on Boundary beneath current group 2nd option e Right click to highlight each Catchment level and rename them Catchment A and Catchment B press return e Right click on Catchment A select New then Create Boundary Outline e Go to the map and draw the outline as if drawing a polygon e Right click and select Close Outline finish e Switch on the Catchment display lightbulb pl
250. nformatics com Page 24 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 The settlement Text layer can be configured to have a white halo around the place names To do this simply Right click on the Text layer above the map and select Settlement Text Halo The example below shows the place name Basingstoke in capitals with a white halo around the letters to make is stand out against the dark blue background of a shaded statistical map 2 3 Key Sites Key site records sometimes known as Point of Interest e g colleges hospitals stations public buildings etc must include a postcode or grid reference that falls within the full map area In the Map Display panel you can display up to 10 Key Site buttons each with different symbols which represent different databases Key Site types A maximum of ten groups of symbols can be shown at any one time however many more databases can be created and stored These Key Site buttons will display icons on the map representing the individual locations of the records within the Key Site databases Five of the ten available buttons have been configured in the example below meaning that five different databases can be represented on the map e f you click on the one or more Key Site symbol buttons a selection of different symbols will be displayed in the Map Display Note that the button stays pressed in and that revealed in the Map Disp
251. ng Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 185 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Goto TSM User Guide Part 8 Area Groups Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 What are Area Groups 2 CREATING AREA GROUPS 2 1 Select a definition 2 2 Area Definition Name 2 3 Structure of Area Hierarchy 2 4 Area Definitions 2 5 Rename Definitions 2 6 Define the Area 2 7 Alternative Area Selection Methods 2 8 Saving Area Definitions 2 9 Copy Area Groups 2 10 Reset the Map 2 11 Area Groups Check Box 3 AREA SELECTION TOOLS 4 AREA DIRECTORY 4 1 Atomic Area 4 2 Area Selection List 4 3 Switch All On Off 5 DISTRICTS AND WARDS AREA GROUP Confidential www activeinformatics com 188 188 189 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 195 196 196 197 198 199 199 200 200 202 Page 186 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 6 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 203 6 1 How to create an area group 203 6 2 Using Area Groups with Reference 203 6 3 Selected area counts 203 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 187 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto 1 Introduction Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 1 What are Area Groups Area Groups are clusters of Census Output Areas around 125 households or Lower Super Output areas an average of 625 househol
252. ng the point where the pin joins the label to be moved 2 6 Hide Label e f you RIGHT click on the label containing the Key Site and select the Hide Label option the label will automatically be removed from the map but it is still present within the list 2 7 7 Label List e To access the full list of labels RIGHT click on a label as above and select the Label list option e The following panel is displayed at the top right of the screen Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 32 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ifa 2 7 8 Select Multiple Labels e To allow manipulation of several labels at the same time click on the first one holding down the mouse button and drag down to highlight all labels within the list or hold down the CTRL key and left click to select e The buttons at the bottom of the panel will become available e Click on the Delete button and the window below will be displayed and clicking OK will refresh the map with the label s removed Delete label X i OK to delete labels TIP The last option in the pop up panel label list will only appear when labels already exist Labels can also be saved with a session for frequent use 2 9 Label Nearest Postcode Disclaimer x i This function finds the nearest Postcode Centroid gt ite When you right click on the map the Label Nearest Postcode option appears
253. ng the relevant radio button In the example below Classification has been selected in preference to Class Code and therefore the list items Primary and Secondary appear as clickable selections instead of the codes that will appear if the other radio button is pressed Classification Cs ole SECONDARY 2 8 Range Boxes In addition to the Selection List boxes there are a number of Range boxes such as Response sec in the example below These do fundamentally the same job as the selection lists in that they enable you to set parameters but show the range of list items in the format of minimum to maximum number or earliest to latest dates in those fields which have numbers dates or times It is possible to set parameters in some or all of the range boxes in order to build up a very specific and complex query e Left clicking on the number in the box next to From or To buttons appear to enable you to change the values for units tens hundreds etc In the Response sec range box below for instance the range has been set to go from 1 to 480 seconds e Once a value has been edited the background will turn dark grey and the switches will remain until the values have been returned to the defaults e To return any edited value in a Range box back to its default simply double click in the rectangular box the dark grey background disappears TIP The From value cannot be made highe
254. nge boxes e Click on the New button e Select Range Criteria from the pick list e Field Id Type the 2 character field code e g AA and this fills in the caption and the field title as per the example below e Click OK to complete this field e A query box will appear in the top left hand corner of the Query Writer e Drag and drop the box on to an appropriate location on the Query Writer if required Query Screen Design Type Range Criteria a Caption Field Id Incident Number 5 2 Selection Lists To create the Incident Type and Call Sign List boxes e Click on the New button e Select Selection List from the pick list e Field Id Type the 2 character field code e g AB and this fills in the caption and the field title as per the example below e Buttons and Counts check boxes are checked on by default e Click OK to complete this field This operation combines the fields into one box and it is possible to combine up to four preferably related Selection List fields in this way e g codes and descriptions that mean the same thing e A query box will appear in the top left hand corner of the Query Writer e Drag and drop the box on to an appropriate location on the Query Writer if required Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 81 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to ifa Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Query Screen Design Type Selection List C
255. ning message appears because part or all of the report will have been written into the Word Document see below 1 5 8 Errors If an error occurs while the MS Word Report is being generated a message box with the message shown below will be displayed An unrecoverable error has occurred while writing to MS Word The word document may be partially written An error of this kind will generally leave Word in an unstable state and may need to be closed down It may also mean that MS Word has run out of internal resources and will display a message as well as stating that it has run out of memory 1 5 9 Other Information 1 5 9 1 Area Key Too Long The Area Key may be too long to write entirely to the report due to system resource limitations If this is the case the error message below will be displayed Due to Windows resources limits not all the Area Key items have been written to the report To complete the area key you should select just the missing areas in Active Software and then run the report again with the Area Key checkbox selected The new table can then be combined with the first table in Word by moving it to be directly after the first If the Area Key table was framed this would further limit the number of items that could be written to the table so no frame is added by the report you should add it if required 1 5 9 2 Resources If parts of the map are missing particularly parts of fille
256. nt is drawn in proportion to the highest value for this field b Total each pie segment is drawn in proportion to the total of all the values added together Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 164 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to ifa Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Click the OK button e Left click the Key Site button again to redraw the map and reveal all the Key Site symbols Use the Key Site Information Tool on the Map Tab to display those fields represented by the pie segments and coloured appropriately as a key below right a Geb gs eae 2 t p t PE conch Bon M Acthaty S Primary routes W Seattiemants PE Tet E FA Mesna Vector Statistics T Secondary routes Water features Reference Areas I Nationa Gid T Steets Other features Aree qrougn al se Sf Ifa Lo SS e he ren nar HA Colega 1 308 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 165 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 6 2 Hide pie charts To disable pie charts temporarily e Right click on a Key Site symbol button above the map e Select Hide Pies e Left click the Key Site button again to redraw the map and reveal all the Key Site symbols 6 3 Remove pie charts To clear pie charts completely Right click on a Key Site symbol button above the map Select the Site display properties option The properties panel
257. ntly used functions 7 1 Standard Data Clean Up Methods CSV files Open up the CSV file in Excel Highlight the whole file by left clicking on the grey cell top left On the Edit menu click Replace or hit CTRL H on the keyboard Leave Find what blank In Replace with type a space Click Replace all Highlight a few consecutive blank columns after the data by dragging and dropping then delete these columns Highlight a few consecutive blank rows under the data and delete them too e Save and close the CSV file before importing it into TSM via the wizard on DB Design 7 2 Multiple Locators e When using the wizard on DB Design Stage 3 may identify more than one locator in the data e g Home and Delivery postcodes e Goto the Data Type column for the locator you want to ignore e Use the drop down list to change the type to Text Second option from the top e Click Next to continue to Stage 4 and the message about multiple locators will now not appear 7 3 Resize And Move Boxes On The Query Writer e Take ascreen shot of the original layout of the Query Writer boxes paste it into a Word document and print it out Go to the DB Design tab 2nd tab from the bottom Click on the Query Screen Design option in the middle this displays a blank template To move the boxes grab the titles and drag and drop the box to a new location To re size the boxes click on the edge of the box preferably the corner and drag and
258. ny 395465 193005 J0 2003 12 97 2003123111 32 39 23 43573 30 95 2003 526 13390900M spec Sery Cerergerncy 393483 393805 30 2003 12 07 2003 327540123 36 2111142 30 05 7003 12 47 C Sery beer 295485 393805 10 05 2003 12 0 2003 52 11 37 30 t2 13 52 30 14654031 F4 se Alare Irt ent 153007 SASHES 20 07 7901 20 7 2003 20 17 0 70 2 9 38 03 20 49230017 false Alare Good Intent 364579 211 389 27 07 2001 23 2004 29521530 727 FEITLER TES 9136012 False Alare Good tment 1160012 False Alare Good tretent kry Exergercy Sery Leeroy Sery ceerQenxy i Seer gerny Emergency teer gery Eber gery n Eper gewy Dry Ser Sery Sary nt Spec Sery teergex 6330022 spec Serw anernenty 1080907 Sery Emer gercy 26417 5 511380 27 364275 411 588 270 4 RL AU 299828 FB47EL 412996 24 284782 412906 24 ABATE 41200624 s 04781 12996 24 f 364781 412996 28 36478 21700624 rare ares 28 00 72 10 9 oh 3 06 2007 13 44 00 13 04 2002 13744530 33 08 2002 4374773 2001 23 211 2002 23 21 30 2 200 50 08 37 4 2002 10 08 21 24 2002 20 08 21 24 200 30 08 273 24 2002 10 08 21 M 2002 30 09 2002 10 03 41 1 2007 ETE 08 ser 30 27 it 1 2002 23122142 27 211394136 27 30 10 73 24 2002 10 09752 26 2002 10 09142 2403 2007 10 08 36 24 J 2007 10 09 44 24 2002 10 10 44 24 2002 10 20 55 24 33 24 90 ag at
259. o options of where to create the boundary set from the Isochrones either to an existing boundary set or a new one which can be named Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 385 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Oks 12 1 Export To A New Boundary Set e When you choose this option the whole group of Travel Time Boundaries is exported to the Active TSM program the default boundary set name is Isochrones e You may wish to copy the current name of the isochrone set top left in the this group with all its Sets and their Ilsochrones and paste the name over the destination name at the top right in the Where to Export panel What amp how to export Where to export to Group colleges 5 mins an Isochrome f this Group with all its Sets and their lsochrones 48 Group amp Sets amp lsochrones called colleges 5 mins at Sete amp lsochrones a2 Set amp lsochrones called Pe as lzochrones as lzachrone called Export f A new Boundary set called colleges 5 mind Hierarchy Level names B Boundary Set m Group Set L lzochrone 0 An existing boundary set OOOO Destination Cancel 12 2 Export to An Existing Boundary Set e The whole group a sub set or single Travel Time Boundaries are exported to an existing set of boundaries within the Active TSM program selected from a drop down list e O
260. o show the proportion for each output area as hotspots on the map Reds for high percentages and Blues for low percentages 15 3 Hot spots Continuous Surface Mapping Run an Activity data query Drag and drop the query card to the card stack the temporary store Go to the Compare tab Drag and drop the Activity data query into Show Data Select the Continuous Surface Mapping feature above Show Data Set the Grid Cell Size e g to 1km Click equals Note you must click equals after each grid cell change Change the Grid Cell Size Click Equals to show the change on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 248 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 15 4 Working out Population Density Open TSM using the 2004 ID SOAs DZs option Click on the Areas Tab Select the Generic Definitions Area Group that gives us access to the SOAs Drag and drop the Area Data card to the Card Stack Now click on the Reference Tab In this example we re going to use the Mid 2008 Population Estimates data from ONS Click the heading to access the census table of the same name Tick the box for All Ages Drag the Reference Data card to the Card Stack Next click on the Compare Tab Drag and drop the Reference Data card on to Show Data Drag and drop the Area Data card on to Base Data Set the Base Area to Super Output Areas the bottom option The Statistics Mode should be se
261. of the Key Site will be inserted in a label and displayed on the map with the same Label Properties window as above displayed over the Area List in the top right of the screen e Click on the OK button to accept the label or the CANCEL button to remove both label and Label Properties window 2 7 3 Label Properties To view the properties of a label click RIGHT click on a label and the following pop up appears Refesh map New labels to be like this Label properties Move label Hide label Delete label Label ist If you select option label properties the following properties can be set the font font size font colour and font style of the label text the background colour of the label and pin the pin style to use the label outline can be turned on or off display the label with solid or transparent backgrounds or with a white halo around the text the minimum and maximum zoom values at which the label will appear Dactproune i Pie tyte Ten td oe Font urecetou Lebel Orsttine Sold Trartaguat end Malo Label tent tionumert 4008 L200 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 30 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing date to ife For example click on the Background Colour button and then on the coloured square from the palette that is required e g Green as highlighted below CEET E mE pran Come T
262. om Page 374 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato 9 Drivetime Tools 9 1 Drivetime Tools Panel Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Use this panel below to set the parameters prior to creating new Isochrones or to examine existing Isochrones Map features Drivetime tools Drivetime rules Drivetime tools New isochrone set Existing isochrone sets Distances generator ae Core file ACTIVE speeds a congestion w flooded Variance file ACTIVE rush hr Y mj emergency Override file ACTIVE congestion PPO Rete S as for new isochrone sets target date October h12 2011 target day H wednesday target time 0830 H eat fi I 1 a a atrio Quad minutes a Conner t a I l l d I a oa Es pu fF road Spee i ti 1 fd zegg 15 a Fane a Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 375 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 9 2 New Isochrone Set Panel parameters created 12 October 2011 at 10 08 target date October x12 2011 target day j Wednesday _minspeed H 0 0 mph ts e When creating new Isochrones the New Isochrone Set tab must be selected This panel allows a Target Date and Time to be set e Todo this put the mouse pointer on the white rectang
263. ombine a day filter with a month filter select drag the mouse across one or more months of the year down the left or right side In the example below we ve added a filter for April May and June Therefore the results will only relate to activities that happen on Monday Tuesday and Wednesday in April May and June and no others Filter CallDate Date field Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sab Jan i a Select a range of months and or a range of weekdays _ Sun ton Tue Hed Thu Fri Sat From April Monday To June Wednesday Clear e Click on the OK button bottom left to accept the ranges and apply a filter e N B Time fields may also be filtered by Hour of Day in a similar manner described above if you right click on any time field In the example below a filter for 08 00 00 to 11 59 59 hours has been set Therefore the results will only relate to activities that happen between 08 00 00 to 11 59 59 hours and no others Filter CallTime Time field Select a time period for any day ina 00 01 02 04 05 08 08 EE 10 i1 EE E 15 16 EE EEJ EJ 22 ai er poof Ch ep pop o C ee i Cra 08 09 10 Eta re CE rs ed o re Cea Hal i Hoo o C C C C PF of Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 98 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 2 13 Clearing a Filter e To clear down any selections made simply click on
264. on Selection Area definitions available Generic definition New for definition design Structure of area hierarchy Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 189 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ifa 2 2 Area Definition Name e Click anywhere within the Area Definition Name panel and the text lt new gt will be highlighted e Type in Test Area as the name and hit the Enter key Area Definition Design Area definition name Text Edit All Output Areas Set text Structure of area hierarchy All Output Areas ai Output Areas ia Area Definition Design Area definition name Text Edit Structure of area hierarchy All Output Areas Output Areas Area definitions All Output Areas Unused areas Abbey 4fUDFMO00 Abbey 4fUDFMOO00 Abbey 47UDFMO002 Abbey 47UDFMO0004 Abbey 47UDFMO0005 Abbey 47UDFMO0006 Abbey 47UDFMOO07 Abbey 4fUDFMO008 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 190 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 banging doto 2 3 Structure of Area Hierarchy To define a new area the different levels in the Hierarchy will be defined first Click on All Output Areas within this panel and it will be highlighted Now click on the Insert Level button and a new level is inserted below All Output Areas called Level_1 as shown below e When inserted Level_1 will be highlighted therefore right click to
265. on on the map e Click OK when you ve finished setting the dot sizes on Geo group e The merged dots appear on the Activity Toolbox as a black dot layer that can be checked on and off to displayed the dots on the map Similarly its count is carried forward to other analysis and included in the Count Total box in the top boarder of the Activity Toolbox The example below shows the Activity Toolbox with a query from one database False Alarm Malicious represented by the red dots and record count at the top A query from another database False Alarm Good Intent has been merged as an image This is represented by the black dots and record count at the bottom When we redraw the map using the pencil the black dots False Alarm Good Intent are drawn first Poly Total Activity by c program 3229048 False Alarm Malicious rk followed by the red dots False Alarm Malicious You will need to bear in mind the order in which TSM Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 135 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 draws the merged dots when deciding what data you intend to merge with another query In the example below there are large numbers of False Alarm Good Intent records in a single location the large black dot in the centre of the image whereas the False Alarm Malicious records seem to be lots of isolated incidents Please Note Dots which ha
266. options are available sum subtract multiply or divide Which option you choose to use and whether that choice makes any sense will depend on the content of the 2 datasets e g you may wish to divide the smaller dataset by the larger total dataset to obtain a percentage for each ward 6 4 Calculate Pressing the Equals button causes the calculation or recalculation of data within the boundary set using the current settings z Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 268 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 6 5 Displaying the Stats on the Map Turn on the Stats light bulb 4 left and redraw to colour the map according to the statistical banding Bands can also be turned on or off using the check boxes to the left of each one This will change the associated colours on the map when you redraw it 6 6 Band Values After a calculation is performed the lower and upper limits of the results are examined and used to generate a set of bands which encompass the spread of values Each band range is allocated a colour or shade according to the colour selected for the appropriate stats fill setting in the ight bulb panel This is the colour used to shade the map Banding Lower 1 Interval 10 Upper 100 Bands 10 Ea _ 0 00 0 10 999 _ Cam O 1100 in 20 999 __ am E 2100 in 30 999 am 3100 in 40999 aM 4100 in 50 999 em 5100 t 60 999
267. orways no change A Roads plus 25 B Roads plus 50 Streets minor roads plus 75 Override Rules Road Congestion Level 1 Standalone hamlets and small villages no change Level 2 Close groups of small large villages and small towns minus 33 Level 3 Outer Close groups of large villages and small large towns minus 33 Level 3 Inner Central areas of large villages and small large towns minus 50 Level 4 Outer Outer Cities and Metropolitan areas minus 25 Level 4 Inner Inner areas of Cities and Metropolitan areas minus 33 Level 4 City Centre Centres of Cities and Metropolitan areas minus 80 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 387 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 14Step By Step Frequently Used Functions 14 1 First Set Up a Closed Road Rule e In Travel Time Boundaries go to Drivetime Rules and select Override rules e Click the New file button to create new override parameter file e Name the file e g Closures in the File Properties box e Click New Rule Set button to create a new rule set e Name the rule set e g Evesham in Rule Set Properties box below e Click on New Rule button to create a new rule e Name the rule e g Abbey Bridge in Rule Properties box below e Select the adjustment type to Impassable e Select road s using th
268. ox ATGA Tie Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 132 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 sa bringing doto 4 2 4 Save queries to the library To save the resulting query to the database Library so that you can retrieve and replay it in future e Click the Library button top right of the Activity Tab The Query Writer appears left e Overtype the Name if required perhaps to include a date using no more than 25 characters e The Description Box normally contains the file location of the data but can also be overtyped using no more than 40 characters e Click the Save button to finish and the function closes automatically Query library Activity database queries Name Description c program files act Data Census2001WARD Save Delete Show errors amp warning Now ien they occur during load f Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 133 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 59 Merge Dot Maps 5 1 Saving the dot image Saving a set of dots from a database query will enable you to compare it visually with data from another database for example comparing two related types of activity but where the data comes from two separate database files To save a dot map as an image e Click on the Save Activity dot file left hand button on the Activity Toolbox e Type a meaningful name for the file e
269. p centred around Oatur 1 1 2 Quick Help For hints and guidance on the program features top left below the Drawing Area Pick object Centre 0 0 42 49 List of objects in Key Site Symbol Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 282 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 1 1 3 Symbol Objects List A list of the individual objects components from a maximum of 16 that could make up a whole symbol This panel appears in the middle extreme left Object List O0 Solid ellipse 1 Polygon 2 501lid Rectangle 1 1 4 Edit symbol tools Buttons below left enable you to move up and down the list of objects Buttons below right enable you to delete a single object or all objects This panel appears in the middle 2 left 1 1 5 Review symbol tools The button below left enable turns the symbols off the preview maps The scale below right enables you to re size the symbol and the changes can be viewed by pressing the button to the bottom right This panel appears in the middle below the Edit Symbol panel Review Symbol Scale 100 e Pi fs Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 283 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to ifa 1 1 6 Preview Maps The preview enables you to see what the symbols will look like on the map in TSM These panels occupy the right hand side of the screen Confi
270. pen up the item properties in the bottom panel of the toolbox There are several standard properties such as Properies HS Textplot a Outline Mes Ofset zoom o OAIE EN Min Max Name Colwyn ME 0 0 1 0 Om 25km strict Code SF e colour and style for the boundary Outline and Fill along with e colour and style font and size for Name and Area etc Other properties vary between boundary sets Some properties can have their actual values changed e g the text of a property as opposed to the presentation of the property value The value alongside Area is expressed in square hectares A minus sign as above means that the boundary was drawn anti clockwise No minus sign means that it was drawn clockwise Drawing your own boundary clockwise see Section 5 below allows you to create a hole or island within when you right click on the boundary item e g to represent a city centre If the hole is drawn anti clockwise the system correctly calculates the area of the outer boundary in hectares minus the area of the inner island As well as colour and style all text plot properties have further values which allow you to adjust the text position relative to the centroid see 5 6 below and appearance of the text at differing map zoom scales Text position is controlled by the offset values and is measured in character heights which may vary according to the font used The text display can be controlled by specif
271. pen up the tree structure and select the group into which the isochrone s are to be copied e This will be the group level in the tree e g Aquinas College above the individual isochrones in TSM e g 5 minute isochrone etc what amp how to export Group colleges 5 mins 00 Set Aquinas College Isochrone 5 minute isochrone C this Group with all ts Sets and their lsachrones as Group amp Sets amp lsochrones 200000 called o f just this Group s Sets and their lsochrones az Sets amp lsochrones 0000 f this Set and all its lsochrones as Set amp leochrones 0 called o f just this Set s lsochrones ae lzachrones f this lsochrone only aE lzachrone called 10 minute izochrone Export Confidential Where to export to f A new Boundary set called Hierarchy Level names B Boundary Set Ei Group 4 Set L gochrone f An existing boundary set FE F ming Select destination Set El WE FE 5 ming e 5 ming aj shton under Lyne Sith Form College Barnsley College H Beauchamp College m Ea Dadin Callana TT Cancel www activeinformatics com Page 386 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 13Road Speed Guide Core Road Speeds Motorways 70 mph A Roads 50 mph B Roads 35 mph Streets minor roads 20 mph Blue Light Rules for Emergency Vehicles Mot
272. play e Try placing the symbol in each of the 4 corners by repeating the above Five different North Point styles are available N N N N To set a particular style simply right click the North Point button and select one of five see above 3 5 Advanced search find When you click the Find button on the Map Tab or right click and select Find you can search for Easting Northing Postcode Reference Area text or code Place name Street road name or number Key Site Where the search generates multiple results each result may be viewed in turn When a search result is viewed the map shows the exact location highlighted temporarily with a red circle This means that you can now locate any map feature you wish with ease There is also a zoom to feature function which is optional This will automatically zoom in to a map size of 5 km unless you turn it off using the tick box under the search values you have entered Zoom in and return to Find once you ve found what you re looking for The program keeps the search values you ve entered until you close the function In the example below a search has been performed for road names containing the word chapel One of the resulting roads has been selected and highlighted with a red circle on the zoomed in map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 41 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe When you have f
273. point undo this function can be repeated until all points are removed e To complete the Boundary then click on Close outline finish and a line from the last point input to the first point will be created to close the outline Refresh map Copy Point align mode Close outline finish Previous point undo Cancel outline Label area Label site Add text label Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 265 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato When Point align mode is clicked another Pop Up Window is displayed below Refresh map Copy Point align mode y No align Close outline finish l l Align near boundary line Previous point undo l Align near boundary node Cancel outline The default is to have no alignment but as can be seen from the graphic it is possible to align near an existing Boundary line or node When using Align near boundary node a small red square will appear when the mouse pointer comes near the node By releasing the mouse button then the point will snap to the node on the adjacent boundary N B The other options in the Pop up Window will function normally even in the middle of constructing a boundary Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 266 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 6 Calculation and Thematic The toolbox has two property pages this is the Calc
274. ptions library queries 120 2 5 Retrieve a query from the database library 120 2 6 Delete a query from the database library 121 3 DOT SIZE AND SORTING 122 3 1 Why change the dot size 122 3 2 Fixed Standard Size 122 3 3 Size by Geo group 123 3 4 Label record counts 124 3 5 Size by value 125 4 DATA QUERY TIPS 126 4 1 Fire Data Queries 126 4 1 1 Change the size of the boxes 126 4 1 2 Ranges and lists 127 4 1 3 Colour by 128 4 1 4 Save queries to the library 129 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 114 of 389 Total So lution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 5 M 5 1 5 2 Education Data Queries Change the size of the boxes Ranges and lists Colour by Save queries to the library ERGE DOT MAPS Saving the dot image Merging the dot image 6 SELECTING DATA 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 Irregular polygon Inverting a Polygon Naming the polygon Create a sub set of the original data Removing the polygon from the map Display a saved polygon Delete a polygon 7 ACTIVITY RECORD LIST 7 1 7 2 Copy activity record list to clipboard Print activity records 8 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 8 1 Re size dots 8 2 Set dot size bands 8 3 Draw a polygon to select records 8 4 Merging activity dot queries Confidential www activeinformatics com Q bringang Goto 130 130 131 132 133 134 134 134 137 137 138 138 139 140
275. put File Format 346 3 2 What Will Be Added 346 3 3 Starting the Matching Process 347 3 4 Selecting the Input File 348 3 5 Locator Field 349 3 6 Grid Search Tolerance 350 3 7 Lifestyle Data Selection 351 3 8 Processing the Data 352 3 9 Saving the Extract File 353 3 10 Viewing the Reject File 353 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 341 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 1 Introduction The Active Lifestyle Match program enables you to match data locations to lifestyles as well as maintain the background lifestyle database To launch the Active Address Generator utility e First click on the Tools button top left of TSM e Select the option Active Lifestyle Match that appears in the panel on the right of TSM ACTIVE Lifestyle Match Allows the User to match Lifestyle data to each record in the chosen file based on postcode or closest easting northing Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 342 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 Updating the Lifestyle Database Lifestyle data is normally updated by the vendor on an annual basis Therefore it will be necessary to update your lifestyle database annually in order to match your own data with the most up to date lifestyles To do this e Launch the program from the list of Tools in TSM as above e Select option
276. r than the To when setting the outside parameters of the range For example if you set the To value to 5 TSM will not let you set the From value any higher than 5 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 95 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 2 9 Setting Date Ranges By left clicking on the number in the box next to From or To buttons appear to enable you to change the values for day month and year In the Call Date range box below for instance the date range has been set to run from 01 04 2011 to 31 03 2002 CallDate x Include Blanks From 01 04 7001 ae e e To 31 03 2002 3 2 10 Setting Time Ranges By left clicking on the number in the box next to From or To buttons appear to enable you to change the values for hours minutes and seconds In the Call Time range box below for instance the time range has been set to run from 08 00 00 to 11 59 59 CallTime 11 59 59 2 11 Include Blanks Blank dates and times where present in the data are included in the query by default but can be eliminated by un checking the Include Blanks box on the relevant fields If blank dates or times are included when you execute your query coloured by date or time a separate dot colour will be created to represent blank entries see section 3 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 96 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v
277. r to work out the proportions for each area on the map Auto grid l Cont Surface Map Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Show dataj c program files active Data Census20010 Base data Whole Database c program files active Data Census20010 Base area Output Areas summed Statistics Mode Statistical banding show over Base Lower 0 0 0 0 Show counts only C Interval 0 1 Defaults U F p Fi Shading Style aii BE Shades of one colour a p1to019 Shade from white to 3M p 2to0 29 ae 3 to 0 398 Shaded to black e 0 5 to 0 59r i a 10 6 to 0 69r _ Colour spectrum gi Hb 7andover_ O Vivid shades 6 Pastel shades C User defined colours Shrink to fit bands O Use first N colours BIEEEREIES Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 221 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 11 1 Show Data card If some statistical results have been generated using the Compare Toolbox these results will be displayed on the map and shown in listed results broken down by what is termed the Show Level The Show Level refers to the area hierarchy level at which the results are to be calculated and displayed and controls the granularity of the results For example results could be displayed on the map for each and every Reference data unit or they could be calculated and di
278. ram lesoch Data Census 200 WARD e Alternatively click on the Activity Tab once you have imported the data You can still edit the Database Design once you have created it e g to move and re size the boxes on the Graphical Query Writer see section 5 3 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 72 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato N B Databases are linked to the Library File within TSM This means that databases can be kept on a central server and shared between several users if required Please contact the Active Helpdesk if you want help setting up network sharing of TSM files and folders 3 4 Overwriting Existing Files If you select a file with the same name as an existing database listed in the Databases Available panel on the Database Tab the data will be overwritten if you allow it A pop up will appear below warning you of this Active WARNING Message gt The destination Database already exists Do you wish to overwrite the Database gt Existing data will be lost e Answer Yes to proceed with the import and overwrite the data For example you may have made corrections to the original file or added more rows of data and wish to completely refresh the database If you answer No the function will quit leaving the original data intact If in doubt use the Wizard on the DB Design tab to import the file into a new database desi
279. ravel potential of people from and to each other whether this is emergency services to incidents patients proximity to health services customers convenience to retail outlets or the logistics of collection and delivery This easy to use system generates highly detailed and accurate travel time boundaries also known as isochrones and draws these on to digital maps where relationships between travel time service demand organisational activity and demographics can be analysed and modelled For example compare the coverage achieved in 15 minute and 30 minute travel time isochrones around different locations such as ambulance or fire stations healthcare facilities retail outlets distribution centres etc and study the effects on these boundaries of making the journey at different times of the day Here are just a few examples of the uses and benefits of using Travel Time Boundaries e Model the impact of facilities opening and closing Identify areas of geography that cannot access a hospital within a certain isochrone and analyse the populations and activity in these areas Reduce access inequalities Better understand practice and hospital populations down to street level Understand availability of public transport Count incidents into isochrones based on stations or standby locations Create Risk Management Plans to better position resources at different times of the week Measure the success of potential station and sta
280. raw button on the Activity tab Move the slider up down to change the overall size of the dots larger smaller Change the Dot Sizing option to Bt Geo Group to size the dots by location Move the slider up down to change the size of the largest dot i e the most data in a single location e Alternatively if you have whole number fields size the dots by changing the Dot Sizing option to a number field e Click OK e Redraw to show the dots on the map 8 2 Set dot size bands Click the Sizing button right of redraw button on the Activity tab Change the Dot Sizing option to a number field Change the Sizing Mode to Stepped Banded Click the Bands button top right Click on a band to alter it Use the buttons to alter the values up and down to set a range for this band Click Join to Next to add this band to the next one Click Split in Two to halve this band Alternatively choose another banding method Day of Week etc from the drop down list top left N B You can create up to 64 bands in total e Click OK twice e Redraw to show the dots on the map 8 3 Draw a polygon to select records Click on the Irregular Polygon tool above the map to the right of the redraw button Go to the map and move the cursor to a place near a cluster of dots Click with the left hand mouse button and keep clicking to encircle the cluster of dots When you get back to your start position hover over this location and an upward doting
281. re concentric circles to be placed in different positions e When sufficient concentric circles are displayed either return to the Draw Circles tool and click to turn it off or alternatively right click to achieve the same result TIP Only 10 sets of concentric circles may be displayed at any one time If the 1 1 set is displayed the first set of circles that were put in the Map Display are automatically removed 3 2 2 Edit Circle Properties Users can edit individual set of concentric circles by right clicking on any set and change the following properties thus providing extra flexibility number of circles radii colour line thickness 3 2 3 Erase Circles e Click the Erase Circles tool and when the cursor returns to the Map Display note again the position cursor e Point at the approximate centre of any set of concentric circles and when close enough note that the cursor changes to the information cursor upward arrow Tt Left Click and the set of circles will be removed from the Map Display e When the last set of circles has been removed from the Map Display the Erase Circles tool will automatically pop out and the cursor will reset itself to the default cursor S If sets of circles remain in the Map Display then a right click will also turn off the tool Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 39 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ife 3 2 4 Creating Boundari
282. reen Se SSaaaae om Cond Click on the OK button and the label will now have a black text on a green background as below Tha n a porter lot The clocest matching Windows NT font val be used en you scrmen TIP The thickness of the label s pin can be changed by clicking on the pick list beside the Pin style text box shown above If no pin is selected then the label will be placed on the centre of the symbol closest to the cursor when initially clicked on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 31 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing Goto e Click on OK for the changes made to take place take place or CANCEL for the previous settings to be reinstated 2 7 4 Label Min And Max Zoom Levels By adjusting the zoom levels you can specify at which level of zoom at which you want the label to appear on Label is only visible between o Km and f20 Km map zoom values the map e g between zero and 20km 2 7 5 Move Label e lf you RIGHT click on a label as above and select the Move label option e Click the label with the left mouse and drag it to the desired position on the map e Right click to refresh the map PLEASE NOTE the cursor will not be allowed out of the map area until this last action is carried out TIP Ifthe cursor is located at the square indicating the join of the Pin to the Label the cursor will change to a black cross enabli
283. reen tick in the selected cell and a reference for the cell will also appear on the Reference Card on the right e When all cells have been selected click the right mouse button whilst over the Reference Card and access the Card Edit dialog box and e Type in a suitable Title e g All Households Description and any Notes necessary e Thereafter clicking OK and e Drag the revised Reference Card to the card stacks as previously described Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 210 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 8 2 5 Reference Data for a Selected Area lt is possible to select an area on the map and analyse the Reference data for that particular location in isolation To do this we must specify what we are going to Display areas by First select the area group to be analysed as shown in the Area Groups guide See Chapter 8 Click on the double arrows in the top right of the card stack to reveal the Area Directory Right click and Switch ALL the Output Areas off to leave the ones you ve selected filled with hatching Click the Plus button to add in the Output Areas selected hatched Click on the Reference toolbox tab and select the table you want to analyse from the tree Click on Selected Area and notice the change to the data You should see the numbers change in the table on the left of the screen This displays the data for your selected area ONLY You can s
284. represent Chimney Fires rm Sizing sew Fixed Standard ify Poly Total Activity by 203852 c program 3308 X Chimney Fire 36992x False Alarm Good Intent 32290x False Alarm Malicious 1263804 FDR1 Fire 2843X Overborder Attended 93620x Secondary Fire 1180 Spate Civil Disturb Condt 533524 Spec Serv Emergency 1579188 UwF S FADA Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 110 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing Goto In the second image below the list has been sorted but the red dot is still associated with Chimney Fires but it appears lower down the list rather than alphabetically as before Activity by 503854 c program 1579188 UwF S FADA 1263804 FDR1 Fire 93620I Secondary Fire 53352x Spec Serv Emergency 3699201x False Alarm Good Intent 32290x False Alarm Malicious 20430x Overborder Attended 339x Chimney Fire 11848 Spate Civil Disturb Condt 4 4 New query button The New button top right of the Activity Toolbox when clicked clears all selections from all selection and range boxes so that you can write a brand new query Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 111 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 Step By Step Frequently Used Functions 5 1 Date time filters s i Date Click on the binoculars button top right to access the Query Writer Right cl
285. reserve the matched data in CSV format The default location is your Data folder in TSM C Program Files ACTIVE Data Total mariai ol recorda lo procsses 2825 Records processed Records matched Records unmatched Emal ACTIVE te farther samstance Processe1g competed please save the sddisss dota e The program asks you if you want to process another file e Click YES to match some more data or NO to quit the program e The resulting CSV file can now be used for mail merge purposes e Filtering the Category field in MSExcel for a particular type of address e g R Residential may be useful when targeting your marketing A Rocki fe Para Murweorth Place mo County Ourfiam D Shegrerd Constructor Lid Sre Crtice Hurwortr Place rgtor County Durham i The Surgery Rochatie Covi hutwoarth Place nator County Durham 1 Rockivtte Cowt Hurworth Place D gtor County Durh n 2 Reckiette Cort Hurworth Place iP County Durham 3 Rockietfe owt Purworth Place j County Ouiham Rori e Cot Murwoetr Place mgtor County Duth ham 5 Rackietle Cort uiworth Place rator County Durham Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 340 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato TSM User Guide Part 18 Active Lifestyle Data Contents TSM USER GUIDE PART 18 ACTIVE LIFESTYLE DATA 341 1 INTRODUCTION 342 2 UPDATING THE LIFESTYLE DATABASE 343 3 TAGGING YOUR OWN DATA 346 3 1 In
286. rformed by day of week then the colour by banding is reduced to 3 bands one each for Mon Tues amp Wed Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 105 of 389 February 2015 bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE 3 6 Time bandings Time fields act in a similar manner to dates the results can be banded by day of week time of day or time of week see section 3 7 below by clicking the Time of Day button The example below shows times joined together into three hourly bands Banding method Current Band ir fdan Join to previous Join to next O into two Default bands A r 00 00 00 02 59 59 15 00 00 17 59 59 18 00 00 20 59 59 21 00 00 23 59 69 No Data of bands max 64 9 N B The default time bands are single hours e g 00 00 00 to 00 59 00 In all cases the quantity and range of the bands are modified to best fit the upper and lower limits of the range field and any filtering applied to the time field see sections 2 10 and 2 12 above 3 Number bandings For a number field the results are banded by allocating values for each band depending on the range of numbers in the data To access the number banding select a time field and click the Value button The bands are allocated at sensible intervals initially 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 50s 100s etc but can also be edited using the same tools described above In the example below we can see nine separate
287. ries To Mid Mif Files If you right click any item in the boundary structure an option appears enabling you to export it and sub boundaries e g a District and its Wards in Mid Mif format Mew Delete Rename Make User poly Set All Below On Set All Below CFF Export Boundary to MIDIMIF File The files are saved in the c Program Files Active Boundaries MID MIF Exports folder and can be imported into other mapping packages that accept this file format example below N B ONLY boundaries that have been DISPLAYED on the map will be exported If in doubt re draw the map and do a visual check before exporting Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 274 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 9 3 Import a Mid Mif Boundary File It is possible to import boundaries created in MID MIF format into your TSM system MID MIF is a common format that can be used in lots of systems like TSM meaning that you can create more of your own boundaries quickly without needing to ask us to process them for you e Right click in a white space within the Boundary Structure panel and select option Import MID MIF Boundary File Select the MIF format file Choose the column in the file that contains the Names of the boundaries Type a new name for the boundary file Load Boundary once processed is checked ON by default Click Process to start the import When finished
288. ring load X e The system displays the following message e Click the OK button to delete the library query ActiveProvider OK to delete query Activity by IncidentType c program files act Data Census2001 WARD Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 121 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 3 Dot Size And Sorting 3 1 Why change the dot size As the name suggests the dot sizing function on the Activity Tab enables us to resize the dots on a map This may simply be a case of increasing the size of a small amount of dots across the map to make their locations more obvious Alternatively you could apply a size theme to the dots based on how many records there are at each location in order to show you where larger quantities of data is clustering that is the larger the dot the more records it represents 3 2 Fixed Standard Size The simplest way of making a small number of dots appear more visible on the map is to make them a larger uniform size e Click on the Sizing button at the top of the Activity Toolbox see below _ Sizing sen Fixed Standard e Move the Dot size for single data scroll bar bottom left up or down to increase or decrease the size of all the dots e Click OK to refresh the map and show the new dot size The example below shows the dots in the process of being made uniformly larger Dot sizing Fixed Stand
289. rom data lfestyle matching Update Lifestyle retarence data This wizard will match Lifestyle dats to each record ia the chosen actwty dataset The Lietyle dete can miso te updated e Select the Match Type relevant to the level of lifestyle data your organisation has purchased e g Household or Postcode level data If you are unsure please contact the Active Helpdesk Select Match Type Haahi leet matching T Postcode level matching Please select ihe Weetyle deteset on which to perfoern the matching lt Previous Next gt gt Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 347 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Gato 3 4 Selecting the Input File This command allows the file to be selected from the select file window The default directory to find the file is C Program Files Active Data and the default file tyoes are TXT and CSV but the All Files may also be selected When the file has been selected and it is found to be the correct format as stated on the initial page of this help then the fields will be displayed in the Selection Fields box e When the Select File button is pressed a Windows Explorer pop up opens allowing you to select the data file ACITOL Total rhn Mapper C erot be Data Seebetretibet Derm eanas Date Joti Moase tet Piante sect your fie e Click Next to proceed TIP The first record needs to have the field nam
290. rounding cells see 4 2 2 below This combined value is what you see when you hover over the central cell with the mouse N B This total is only used only used to generate the image so you should use a polygon see Chapter 5 in order to capture the true number of activities within the hotspot 14 2 2 Setting the Bandwidth It is possible to adjust the CSM bandwidth enabling you to set the number of cells that CSM searches around the highest concentrations of activities on the map To set the bandwidth e Right click on the text Cont Surface Map e Select the Bandwidth e Tick the Continuous Surface Mapping feature OFF and back ON again e Click the Equals button to re calculate CSM CSM applies a distance decay weighting algorithm i e takes each cell in turn and calculates the weighted value for that cell As an example if the bandwidth was set to the default of 3 cells see below top right the weighted value for the cell consists of o 100 of the central cell value 75 of the values of cells in the next layer 50 of the values of cells in the next layer 25 of the values of cells in the next layer Radius approximation cells marked with 0 see below are ignored by CSM in order to create a rounded shape thus emphasising the gradual reduction in the weighted values as you move outwards from the central cell O O Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 245 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3
291. rt 4 Graphical Query Writer Contents 1 ACTIVITY TOOLBOX 89 1 1 Selecting a database 89 1 2 Activity Toolbox Functions 90 1 3 Binoculars Button map toggle 90 1 4 Pencil Button redraw 90 2 QUERY WRITER 91 2 1 Search Boxes 91 2 2 Selection Lists 92 2 3 Count Box 92 2 4 Select All Button 92 2 5 Clear All Button 93 2 6 Selecting List Entries 93 2 7 More than one field per list box 95 2 8 Range Boxes 95 2 9 Setting Date Ranges 96 2 10 Setting Time Ranges 96 2 11 Include Blanks 96 2 12 Filtering Dates and Times 97 2 13 Clearing a Filter 99 3 COLOUR BY 100 3 1 Applying a Colour Theme 100 3 2 When No Selections are Made 102 3 3 Setting Range Field Bands 102 3 4 Date Bandings 102 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 87 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 3 5 Editing band values 3 6 Time bandings 3 7 Number bandings 3 8 Time of Week Bands 4 QUERY RESULT 4 1 Execute Query 4 2 Changing the Order of Entries 4 3 Keeping Dot Colours Static 4 4 New query button 5 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 5 1 Date time filters 5 1 1 Date 5 1 2 Time 5 2 Setting bands 5 3 Sorting colour by query Confidential www activeinformatics com Oks 105 106 106 107 108 108 109 110 111 112 112 112 112 112 113 Page 88 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ifa 1 Activity Toolbox 1 1 Selecting a database
292. s Mame field Mame Locate by postcode Postcode Postcode Number of records in file 453 Number of mappable records a0 OF Cancel e Click OK e Repeat this process to choose the set 2 file e g the destination location s Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 383 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato e Click Generate bottom left and the output file see example below left is produced Progress is shown as a percentage in the bottom left corner of the program N B you can select the files in any order as the system will work out the times and distances between the locations in both files Name Postcode Ref AreaCode Northing Easting Miles Seconds Barnfield College LU3 4BU 09U0DGH0012 250066 505678 17 20633749 1278 Barnfield College LU3 4BU OSUDGHOO12 250155 505 749 17 05191743 1261 Barnfield College LU3 4BU OSUDGHO014 249891 505872 1 7 08073103 1283 Barnfield College LUS 4BU OSUDGHOO016 249870 505342 16 69879715 1234 Barnfield College LU3 4BU OSUDGHO016 249883 505414 16 65853292 1249 Barnfield College LU3 4BU OSUDGHO016 249940 505322 16 65905425 1357 Barnfield College LU3 4BU OS9UDGHO016 250007 505391 16 84095942 1246 Barnfield College LU3 4BU OSUDGHO016 250022 505321 16 8964255 1257 Barnfield College LU3 4BU OSUDGHO017 249912 504362 16 071515865 1226 Barnfield College LU3 4BU OS9UDGHOO1 7 249917 504412 16 66460201 1242 Confidential www ac
293. s e Click SELECT FILE to open up Windows Explorer and find the CSV file that contains the list of postcodes you wish to match with full addresses e The location of the file is displayed along with the number of records it contains that will be processed C Daco Ostupestrades tymater CSV Flisgse select the data Me comtanng the list of pestoeder to portene lt lt Previous Next gt gt e Click NEXT e Click to highlight the field containing the postcodes in the file Pissar select the poprie eid hom the abewe bet lt lt Previous Next gt gt Fea e Click NEXT Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 338 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Tick the boxes to match the postcode with one or more of the following categories R Residential L Large Businesses N Small Businesses Please oriori the types of postcode for output Pom the above lt lt Previous Next gt gt en e Click NEXT e The postcode data is processed and the screen reports on both matched and rejected records Pieose wat unii the processing has competed then choose the name aed locator ta eave the ppt sidesse fie lt lt Previous __ Next gt gt Exit Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 339 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 3 Saving the File e Click Save Data to p
294. s which can then be displayed as a dot map when you click the pencil below right 1 4 Show all dots Click once on the Check All On button see below left to select all the different dot colours from the query result thereby placing a cross in every check box which can then be displayed as a dot map when you click the pencil below right 1 5 Toggle the dot map on or off In order to turn the dots on the map on or off for example to see more of the road network underneath them click the Activity Layer check box see below in the Map Display Panel above the map A dot map will be displayed when you turn on the Activity Layer providing at least one or more of the different dot colours is also turned on as above Ix Activity Statistics National Grid Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 117 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 2 1 Edit query card details To edit the current Activity Query details e Right click once on the Card Title on the Activity tab to launch the Edit Card Details dialog box e Select and edit the text e Click the OK button In the example below e The Title describes how the query is broken down by Incident Type e The Description displays the file location of the data within TSM e The Notes contain the items selected from the Incident Type list Incidentlype Description c program file
295. s act Data Census2001WARD Notes False Alarm Good Intent False Alarm Malicious FDR1 Fire Overborder Attended Secondary Fire Spate Civil Disturb Condt Spec Serv Emergency Cancel 2 2 Save queries to the card stack To save an Activity query card for use later in the session or in other parts of TSM we can use the card stack This is a storage area above the Toolboxes on the right hand corner of TSM To use it e Left click on the Title at the top of the card you want to store and hold down the mouse button e Drag the card to any card slot on the stack and then release the left mouse button In the example below two cards have been stored on the card stack Incidents by and 231012 c program False Alarm Good Intent False Alarm Malicious FDR1 Fire Overborder Attended Secondary Fire Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 118 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato N B Saving query cards to the card stack saves not only the parameters input on the Query Writer and any Colour By theme you have applied but also the sort order dot resizing see section 3 and changes you have made to which colour dots that appear on the display see section 1 2 and 1 3 above e If the card is already occupied you could clear it first to make space for a new query However you can drag and drop a card on top of an old query When you do this TSM displays
296. s can be re positioned prominently whenever this is necessary without affecting the underlying data It also means that you can see more items in a list remove scroll bars and reveal longer field titles by changing the shapes of the boxes e Click on the DB Design tab e Click on Query Screen Design option to view the blank template e Drag and drop the field titles to move the boxes to another location on the Query Writer for example the Call Date range box below e Click and drag the sides or corners of the boxes to re size them such as the Incident Type list box below e Obsolete or unwanted fields can be hidden by other boxes such as the Incident Number range box that has been hidden by Call Date in the example below e Remember to keep the Execute button and Colour By area clear e Click the Save button right to preserve the design once you ve finished moving the boxes and re sizing them An example of an altered Query Writer is shown below TIP Take a screenshot ALT PRNTSCRN of the original Query Writer and keep that with you while you redesign it This will help you determine how big the boxes need to be when they are filled with data selections CallTine Assignilat Assign Tame W incise Alanis W ltchee Ftsaks W Include Risanka R include Bianka Fom N o RRR o A o A Ta IVD Tex ages na To sass Mrhiln Tine VstecisAvailnhiin T K incisie Penk amp inctude Bank From 0 00
297. s com Page 157 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 4 3 Remove a Key Site Button To remove a key site button from the map display completely but keep the database behind it intact e Inthe Defined site types box click on the word none e Click in the blank symbol box under the heading Symbol e Drag and drop the blank square over the button you want to remove on the row above Symbol Defined site types 1 Hospitals Schools 4 4 Export Key Site Data You can export the contents of any Key Site database to an external file in TXT format like so e Highlight the database name in the list of Defined Site Types e Click on the Export site database button 2 from the right e Type a meaningful name for the file and click Save Buttons Al E A E o A Defined site types N B When you export key sites into a TXT file Easting and Northing of the record is added as well which is especially useful if you originally used a postcode to plot your sites on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 158 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 4 5 Refresh Database with new data From time to time you may need to refresh your Key Site database with up to date information To do this e Click on the Symbol and button allocation button e Select a database name from the Defined Site Types list to
298. s made see next section within the map only roads for the chosen item will be displayed zall roads motorway 4 roads gt B roads gt mnor roads 6 4 Road Selection From left to right below Select all matching roads Select matching roads by new polygon Select matching roads by existing polygon s Existing polygons drop down list Select deselect matching roads individually Deselect all roads fe e Ber Rk OO N B Primary and or Secondary route buttons should be switched on to display the roads you want to select e select all matching roads will select the type of road from the whole map e select matching roads by new polygon allows a polygon to be drawn around an area and the values written to the Road Properties panel see later for more detail on the right of the screen N B Initially each new polygon will be prefixed with the word Untitled Right click any polygon name from the drop down list in order to rename it e select matching roads by existing polygon s allows the type of road to be selected from all the named polygons which have a tick in the check box e When select deselect matching roads individually is clicked and the mouse is moved to the map it will change to an up arrow and you will be able to select deselect a single segment and or multiple segments of road s TIP Right click anywhere on the map for the option to de select all roads Confidential
299. selected pin H ASG 4331 56E 436133N 429974E 437138N 0 00 00 ABE 00465 0 yd 0 00 00 0 yd 0 00 00 0 04 59 10 2 Mouse click isochrone set ABE 4331566 436138N 4352586 434825N 0 00 00 ABE Oy Oy iim Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 382 of 389 February 2015 bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE 11 Distances Generator The Distances Generator provides a means to calculate the time in seconds and distance in miles for the quickest route between two sets of points output file HC Frogram Files4CTIVEST ravel Time Boundaries distances csv browse change ated by change name field change located by change Generate This enables you to generate the travel distance and time between multiple sets of locations and export as a table N B You will have to create the isochrones first to use them for the distance generator See above Click browse to choose a location for the output file distances csv Click browse to choose the set 1 file e g the start location s Select a Name field from the data columns Select what to Locate by e g Postcode Select a Locator field from the data columns f n Import file AD ata Colleges 2007 _England cey Browse Preview ABINGI Oxfords O14 1 ate ceine Sandy ACCARID Lancas BBS 24 fal Adult Co Whitec Quarry LANCA LAT 35 pe A 7 a Ivf First line contains field name
300. sing Confidential www activeinformatics com bringing Goto 41 42 43 43 44 44 46 46 46 46 46 46 47 48 49 49 50 50 51 52 53 95 57 57 57 59 Page 4 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 2 DATABASE DESIGN WIZARD 2 1 Stage 1 Selecting files 2 2 Stage 2 Naming the database 2 3 Stage 3 Field Definition 2 4 Stage 4 Selecting Search Fields 2 5 Previewing the Data 2 6 Too many unique values warning message 2 7 Importing Education Learner Data Example 2 8 Importing Ambulance Mobilisation Data Example 3 DATABASE IMPORT 3 1 Importing Data after Using the Wizard 3 2 Reject File 3 3 Database List 3 4 Overwriting Existing Files 3 5 Appending Data 3 6 Deleting Database Types and Files 4 EDITING amp CREATING DATABASE DESIGNS 4 1 Manual Database Designs 4 2 Copy a Database Type 4 3 Field Definition 4 4 Whole number fields 4 5 Text Fields 4 6 Easting and Northing Locators 4 7 Date Fields 4 8 Time fields 4 9 On or After Function 4 10 Postcode Locator Confidential www activeinformatics com ACTIVE bringing Goto 60 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 68 70 70 72 72 73 73 74 75 75 76 76 77 78 78 79 79 80 80 Page 5 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 5 QUERY SCREEN DESIGN 5 1 Range Criteria 5 2 Selection Lists 5 3 Redesign the Query Writer 6 IMPORTING DATA MANUALLY 7 STEP BY STEP
301. sing the right mouse button Writes the criteria used to filter the base data from the Activity Data or reference data Writes the notes on the card used to generate the base data These notes are edited on cards using the right mouse button A list of all the areas currently selected and the colours in which they are displayed on the map is written A list of the types of sites currently displayed on the map is written with the symbol that represents the site The counts or percentages from the Compare in tabular form Statistical banding colours and associated values The current table selected in the census data table list is written A list of every Activity displayed on the map is written The first nine Activity list records are written as a test when the Preview Data button is pressed see below Statistical banding colours and values The reasons for fields being greyed out are described in the Greyed Out Fields section 1 5 19 see below Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 176 of 389 o Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto to 1 5 6 OK Button When the OK button is pressed TSM writes the selected elements to a Word document If Word is already running on the PC and has a document open you will be asked whether you wish to write the data to that document above right Press Yes to write to the open document If you do not wish to write d
302. size And Move Boxes On The Query Writer 85 7 4 Delete Database Files and DB Types 86 7 4 1 Files 86 7 4 2 Types 86 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 56 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 1 DB Design Toolbox 1 1 Designing Databases The purpose of this toolbox is to define the fields to be imported from an ASCII format file e g an Excel spreadsheet saved in CSV format or and Access table saved in TXT or CSV format and to build a query template using some or all of these fields Please Note The lower panels are hidden and they only show if editing a database definition clicking on Edit button Database Definitions Wizard ABILR Data PC Postcodes Ed t PS Posicodes SSU 1 2 How should the data be formatted 1 2 1 File format The data extracted MUST be in ASCII TXT or CSV file either comma separated preferrably or fixed length fields 1 2 2 Double Quotes If the fields are enclosed in double quotes then there can be no further quotes e g a building called Silverdale the double quotes should be changed to single quotes or removed altogether e g 1 Silverdale instead of 1 Silverdale using Find and Select then Replace in MS Excel for CSV files or Edit and Replace in Notepad for TXT files The example below shows how to replace double quotes with Find and Replace T Oe Find Replace Find
303. splay Smaller settlements names also appear the closer to the ground you go 72 240 13 219 Having obtained suitable new mapping in the Map Display please note the new Map Size Indicator readings above the top left hand side of the map 2 6 3 Pan Map Pan Map can only be used when the map display is already zoomed in ell ii 1 Todo this click on the Pan Map tool which will stay pressed in and then return the cursor to the Map The cursor changes to a hand symbol 2 Left click and hold the mouse button on the point of the map which is to be moved 3 Drag the cursor to the required position The original you clicked on is moved to this new position 4 Alternatively when you hover over the edges or corners of a zoomed in map an arrow will appear allowing you to pan in that direction by 50 of the current map size TIP When you reach the extreme edges of the map the computer will beep where a speaker is present on the PC indicating that the map cannot be panned any further in that direction Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 28 of 389 February 2015 bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE 2 6 4 Zoom Cancel Alternatively from a zoomed in Map Display you can return immediately to the full extents of the map by clicking the Zoom Cancel tool Please note This operation will also clear the Zoom Out memory 2 Labels This facility can insert labels on the map
304. splayed for each Ward giving a more general less granular display Also when area groups are displayed the setting of the show level controls whether the component areas are displayed individually or grouped by their respective area groups 11 1 1 Loading the Show Data Card The show card holds the data set to be used as the show number or top number of a statistical calculation The source of the data set can be from a census query an episode query or area data hectares from the area card The show card is loaded by dragging a card from the card stack The card may also be dragged back to the card stack in case the one on the card stack got overwritten or it can also be dragged to the base card making the show and base data sets the same 11 1 2 Renaming the Show Data Card The card s title description and notes field can be edited by right clicking Changing the text and clicking the OK button below left Tithe i Description C Program Files LTC Data Census2001WARD Notes Activity a Clear Cancel N B You can clear all card stack show base cards and datasets cards by right clicking them and hitting the Clear button above centre Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 222 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing date to life 11 2Show Counts Only Mode EPE l Cont Surface Map i f ounmumed Statistics Mode an Statistical banding Show ov
305. t e g 250 metres Click equals top left Please Note you must click a after each grid cell change mi 2 ihe aaa TEs Deiadi Aral o gt Roster w Gey T Adtiaty ti Pivents iadso E Satberverts E Tu EFA aie amp aei Ot Siis l Setonitsy mae Wain kiires Heterence Aveo p eem wes Msema God Sitects Oher hass Aves grage N B Continuous Surface Mapping works within the current map view only Please cancel the zoom to show hotspots for the entire map before clicking the equals button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 244 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 14 2How CSM Works In TSM Thematic maps have until now mainly been produced 1 using the Compare function to allocate activities to areas of an area group or 2 to allocate to a mesh of cells covering the whole map The cells may then be coloured according to user defined bands These methods have visual and analytical limitations hence the development of the Continuous Surface Mapping function 14 2 1 The Method e CSM uses the grid cell size in km or metres the minimum cell size could be as low as 50m depending on the full map extent of the system to create equal squares that cover the extent of the map that is currently visible e CSM then counts all activity into cells so that each cell has an accumulated total i e it adds the value of the central cell to the weighted values of the sur
306. t to Show Over Base Click the Equals Button Click the Compare Stats Button top right Click Yes to Continue if there are a lot of Areas represented in the stats The results are shown in table form Next click on the Print Tab Click the Excel button select the Compare Table option Click OK to export the data to a spreadsheet The Base Count column represents the area in hectares for each SOA The Show Count column represents the estimated population of each SOA The final column contains the population density e g 134 people per hectare in the first SOA Edit the formula to remove the 100 so that it reads E2 B2 Copy the formula down the whole column Right click and format the column as a number with 2 decimal places Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 249 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Part 11 Boundaries ACTIVE bringing Goto Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 2 LOADING BOUNDARIES 3 DEFAULT PROPERTIES 3 1 Current Boundary Set 3 2 Hierarchy and Display Switches Light Bulbs 3 3 Boundary Structure and Display Switches 3 4 Pop Up Menus 4 INDIVIDUAL PROPERTIES 4 1 Property Grid 4 2 To change the font 5 CREATE A NEW BOUNDARY SET 5 1 Renaming a Boundary Set 5 2 Rename Level 5 3 Create New Level 5 4 Create a Boundary Group 5 5 Create a Boundary Beneath the Current Group 5 6 The Centroid 5 7 Create Boundary Outline Draw 6 CALCULATION AND THEMATIC 6
307. te caliti 14425 unknown Locator 13636641 Secondary Fire Grass Heath Moor Rai lwa Oe 4 190 4053 edna 05 ee Da 24724 unknown Locator 27908041 Secondary Fire Tree Fence Lamp 368235 4052390 23 06 2004 15 43 02 27532 unknown Locator 34565042 Secondary Fire Tree Fence Lamp 3792450 4140270 15 09 2004 20 59 50 29271 unknown Locator 43522042 Secondary Fire Refuse Conmtainer 3890430 4027260 25 10 2004 13 15 2 unknown Locator 43522042 Secondary Fire refuse Container 3890430 4027260 25 10 2004 13 15 Unknown Locator 41175042 Secondary Fire Refuse Comtainer 3704360 4108650 14 10 2004 16 34 21 Unknown Locator 33382041 Secondary Fire Refuse Container 3696920 4077100 27 11 2004 02 08 Unknown Locator 47565042 secondary Fire refuse Container 3813940 3952590 06 11 2004 15 33 AI AssignTine 59147021 Secondary Fire Refuse Container 372459 398770 10 10 2002 23 58 37 AI ASsignTine 9147021 Secondary Fire Refuse Container 372459 394770 10 10 2002 23 58 70 9 AM vehicleavai lablerime 10138012 FORI Fire Refuse Contatner 381499 397563 14 02 2001 23 54 36 Unknown Locator 17643042 Secondary Fire Refus
308. the Print toolbox e Click the Notepad icon e Click OK to export all the records to a date and time stamped CSV file created typically in folder c program files active census20010OA e Go to the Database tab e Click the Generate new database files white button top right e Click the Select button top middle e Inthe Windows Explorer panel that appears go to the c program files active census20010OA folder e Select the date and time stamped CSV file created earlier e Click the Open button at the bottom of the Windows Explorer panel e Click the Generate button top middle e Click OK e Click the Generate new database files button again so that it pops out is turned off e Inthe Databases Available panel below double click on the new file ActivityExport_2009 This reveals the query writer screen for the new database file 2 3 Tag data with ref areas easting and northing e Run and activity query e Click Execute e Click the pencil at the top of the toolbox to draw these records as dots on the map e Goto the Print toolbox e Click the Excel icon e Click the Activity List option e Click the Ref Area Code amp Desc option e Click the Geographic Locators option e Click OK bottom right e A spreadsheet is created with extra columns at the end for Ref Area Codes e g Output Areas OA Descriptions e g Census Ward name that contains the OA and the grid reference of the record Easting and Northi
309. the following message e f you answer Yes then the new query card replaces the old one effectively deleting it Please Note The cards on the Card Stack will be available throughout the current session although the cards will be deleted once TSM is closed down unless the session has been saved see Chapter 1 beforehand 2 3 Delete query cards If you have finished using a query card and don t need it again you can delete it if you e Right click on the card title and click the Clear button see above middle e TSM then displays the following message Clear Card e Click the Yes button to remove the card permanently TIP This method works for any of the query cards in TSM on the card stack see below Activity Reference Compare and Areas Toolboxes Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 119 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 2 4 Save queries to the database library Each database file has its own Library in which to store the selections made on queries for future use The query is saved as a snapshot of the selections you made on the query writer before you clicked execute Therefore if you change the data in any way i e overwrite it with a new file you should recreate the query and re save it to the Library Saving to the Library saves any parameters input on the Query Writer and any Colour By theme you have applie
310. thereafter selecting figures which represent the total number of people of one particular gender in that age range e With table 3 Household Composition KS105EW still open e Click once the cell representing One person household Aged 65 amp over Note that a small green tick appears in the cell of the table as it is selected 462838 Wf 56094 N B If you make a mistake and select the wrong cell left click it again to remove the tick The Reference Data Card shown right displays the table row and column numbers of the cells which have been selected This one cell of data represents the total population for your region of one person households Aged 65 amp over Display Counts by All Areas gt Selected Areas Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 208 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing doto 8 2 1 Separating the Cells To show the details of several selected cells separately as opposed to a long string click on an empty cell on the Reference card then make your Reference selection with a green tick Then select another empty cell and repeat the process There are 12 cells available on the card O Selected Areas ch Reference Data New Library Census 2011 Output Area statistics 03 4030102 03 4030103 03 030104 N B Clear Set only clears the highlighted cell Use New to clear everything on the card 8 2 2 Edit Card Details
311. tial www activeinformatics com Page 127 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato to ifa 4 1 3 Colour by If we want to break the query down into categories we can select a field to colour by TSM will pick a colour for each category and show us the number of records associated with each one For example e Go to the Colour By panel at the bottom right of the Query Writer This lists all the Field Names available within the various search boxes above e Select a field name from the Colour by box e g CallDate as per the example below e Click the Execute button below Colour By to run the query The effect will be seen on the Activity Toolbox as per the example below TSM creates a series of editable date bands based on the total range of dates available Each date band is represented by a coloured dot and a number of records to the left The coloured dots will also appear on the map based on where the activities took place when you click the pencil at the top of the Activity Toolbox Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 128 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato to ifa 4 1 4 Save queries to the library To save the resulting query to the database Library so that you can retrieve and replay it in future e Click the Library button top right of the Activity Tab The Query Writer appears left
312. ting Deprivation Maps 214 3 1 1 Selecting the data 214 3 1 2 Displaying the data on the Map 215 3 1 3 Overlaying Data on Deprivation Areas 216 4 STEP BY STEP FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 218 4 1 Run a census query and display it 218 4 2 Select an area 218 4 3 Print export compare table and key 218 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 204 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 7 introduction Upon loading the ACTIVE program the option is given to select a Reference Area Set e g 2011 Census OAs or 2004 ID SOAs DZs Selecting one of these will enable you to reference data relevant to Census Tables or Indices of Multiple Deprivation using the Compare Tab Area Groups can also be constructed using wards from the current Reference Area Set as building blocks Switching on the Reference Areas layer at the top of the map and refreshing can display the outlines of these areas N B These Reference Area border lines may be coloured orange to differentiate them from the street network DO ar ing Reference Area Set Selection Active Total Solution Ma TSM total solution mapping www activeinformatics com Please select the Reference Area Set for the system to use 011 Census OAs Note that certain aspects of the system e g Sessions Imported Data Reference Data amp Libraries and Area Groups will be specific to the selected Reference Area Set Versio
313. title is not required turn off the Title by clicking the check box e Click on Map check box to turn this feature on and off If this section is switched on then the map position box will be shown on the page image above The map captured is a snapshot of what can be seen on the Map Display e In addition to the above any two of the remaining Check boxes that are not greyed out can be selected and the contents of the position box which each generates on the page image will be as configured elsewhere in the system e For instance if Activity Key the dot colours and what they represent is checked on a box appears on the preview page and the display changes to Yes in the Print Content panel beneath to indicate that the key will be included see example below Print Layout Printer gazelle HP Color LaserJet CP3505 PCL 6 Green Office on Net Paper A4 210 x 297 mm Activity Key Print Content Title x Fire amp Rescue Service Map x Key Criteria Activity x Yes No Statistics Show rT NifA N A Base T N A site N A Area F N A N B Map or Area Key can be chosen but not both This is because the 2 boxes are too large to fit on the same standard page Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 172 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 1 4 Print page e Pressing the print page button top right prints a single page bas
314. tiveinformatics com Page 384 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 12Export Travel Time Boundaries e Having created the Isochrones required they can now be exported to the Active TSM program by highlighting in the Existing Isochrone Sets panel the level of the Isochrone to be exported and then right click the mouse The following is displayed Rename set Delete set Create new group Henane giawp Pelete group Export e By clicking on the Export option the following window is displayed Export Isochrones to boundaries What amp how to esport Where to export to Group Middlemoor 1 4 Set called IsoChrones lzochrone Hierarchy Level names thie C th alites eee 5 Boundary Set this Laroup with all its sets and ther lsochrones Group as Group amp Sets amp Isachrones S Set called Middlerncor 1 4 lzochrone ust this Groups Sets and ther lsachrones f An existing boundary set a2 Sets amp lsochrones Pe Destination et and all ite lgochrones a Set amp lsochranes ealed O fae ts S0chrnones as lsochranes sochrone only as lsochrone called Export Cancel N B The options available in the What amp how to export panel will depend on the level within the Isochrone that has been highlighted before right clicking As can be seen above there are tw
315. to e Create a label for a Defined Area e g Ward Output Area etc e Create a label for a Key Site point of interest e Change the Background Colour and Foreground Colour and Font e Move one of the labels created Refresh map e Hide one of the labels created e Delete all labels created using Label List These options are available by right clicking anywhere on the map e g to label an area right click on the map and choose option Label area Please Note The Display areas by list in the top right hand corner controls the area group level and therefore also the associated label l e if this is set to Ward a ward name will appear Set Display areas by to Output Areas to label these instead Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 29 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 2 7 1 Label Area e Click the Label Area option and the Name of the Area will automatically be inserted in a label and displayed on the map At the same time the Label Properties window similar to the one right will be displayed over the Area List in the top right of the screen e Click on the OK button to accept the label or the CANCEL button to remove both label and Label Properties window 2 7 2 Label Site To label a point of interest right click on the map near the chosen Key Site symbol and then select the Label Site option The name
316. to be inserted into the empty Reference Data Tables The program also allows the existing user defined tables to be viewed and deleted The selection of the tables is automatic that is Active Indices will select the first free table To launch the Active Indices utility e First click on the Tools button top left of TSM e Select the option Active Indices that appears in the panel on the right of TSM ACTIVE Indices Allows the User to build table s containing up to 99 rows and up to 99 columns of data to be inserted into the remaining small Area Statistics Tables 1 1 Import a New File or View Data Initially you can choose to either import data from a new file or view or delete tables of data that has been imported via this program previously 1 2 View Existing Data Tables By selecting View delete existing data and clicking the Next button you can look at or remove any tables previously imported manually into the Reference Area sets e Select the Reference Area Set e g 2001 Census OAs The table s you create will only be accessible when you choose this set when you start Active TSM v Active Indices Liser DeSined Da Select Geographic Reference Area Set Select the Reference Area Set for which the data is to ba imported lt lt Previous Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 306 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe e Click
317. torciencWoremec e Use the drop down boxes to select the columns in the input file that represent o Postcode o Lifestyle Group Description o Lifestyle Type Description o Easting o Northing Please note The column headings shown below may vary in your own file Select key data fields Postcode Postcode 7 Lifestyle Group Descriptan Mosac Pubbe Sector Group Label x Liestyle Type Descnpton Mosac Pubic Sector Tyee Label kd Essting Address Pam Easting 1m accuracy 7 Nethyng AddressPoint Northing 1m accuracy This wezard wil match Lfestyle data to each record in the chosen actrety dataset The Lfestyle data can also be updmed Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 344 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual ACTIVE February 2015 bringing Gato fe e Click Next e The program archives the previous lifestyle database and a message appears telling you where the file is saved ActiveProvider The existing lifestyle database has been archived and renamed to C Program Files HWF data Mosaic_hh20120807 as e When you click OK the import process begins e When the import is completed a message appears see below e The Lifestyle data is now ready to match with your other datasets in TSM Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 345 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 3 Tagging Your Own Data 3 1 Input File Format T
318. tutira l AD TIN SIC Wise mam sE ET Yast Vde vu virs Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 66 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to ifa Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e Stage 4 Select the fields that you want to load into the system e Click on Next and TSM moves to the Database Tab automatically e Click on Generate e Select the geography level to load at if unsure do both e Status Good Number of records loaded into TSM e Status Bad You will always have one bad record your row headings anymore and you need to check the data e Status Unknown Locators Records that can t be loaded into TSM either incorrect postcode or not in your map area Debeyc j5sAn Deter m 55AT IKT ETT intwrration And Comeramenabes TINEO irt Franna kmi Preparation Fer Lite Aai Work Foundunins For Learning Awi Lite TV ETT Preparation Far Lite Ard Work Fovexdavows For Leaeeng And Lite KTS ETT Precardicn Fer Lite dent Wirk Feuseianens For Laamung And Lite KITE ATT Preparation Far Like Aod Work Preparaten Fot Lila Cert Work INSET taras ntecar K3 m Retai Arzi Cocrevercil Erisrprme Hasptairy And Cemmng CALLE D ngreerng Ant Mareecterrg leczacioges Mangecterng Techasioges kTizan Lhinra Unieewr iKTID ETT Umaras Unbaswe SEN aun Hissit And Socis Cae pona aT ict Fo Usas Krize Cahe Creates Arto And Dewge IKTE ST curvdatets For Leaning nd Lie KTT Languages Ltevstan Ase Cutere OF TI
319. tween 0 and 40km map sizes The other items are greyed out and are for information only and will be determined by the Core road speeds file Variance file and Override rules used see Drivetime Maintenance section e When all changes have been made manually they have to be saved by clicking on the SAVE button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 361 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 6 2 Point Properties This is the panel written to when the Point Selection button above is used The above example has selected a Roundabout The Roundabout name has been input manually and by selecting to be displayed the name will be displayed between 0 and 25km map sizes e When a point is selected a brown ring is drawn around the point clicked e Click in the Point Name box to edit the description e Click and drag the mouse up down to change the visible between zoom values When all changes have been made manually they have to be saved by clicking on the SAVE button x To delete a selected point just click on the delete button and click OK 6 2 1 Add A Point Ej To add a new point click on the ADD point button and the following window will appear Hew Point feature i Roundabout Choose the type of point feature you want from the optione to the C Railway Station left Click OF to continue and then left click on the map to place the Ca
320. uery to Excel Run a Reference query as described above Click on the Print tab Click on the Export to Excel button Check the box for Census Table Select either All areas or Selected area Click on OK to load an excel session and create the table containing the Reference data relating to your query Export to Microsoft Excel Items to export Activity bands l Activity list Compare table 0 records Select fields to export Selected areas select items for export Cancel ox N B to analyse our reference data we must use the compare tab see Chapter 10 Comparisons and Stats For more information on the Census see http www ons gov uk ons guide method census 201 1 index html For more information on the Indices if Deprivation see httos www gov uk government publications english indices of deprivation 2010 guidance Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 213 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 9 Analysing Deprivation Data 9 1 Creating Deprivation Maps Deprivation Analysis is about understanding where there may be local areas with a general lack of opportunities and resources Deprivation maps let you know where the concentration of deprived areas are located The red areas equal areas of high concentration and the blue areas equal low areas of concentration 9 1 1 Selecting the data Open TSM with the 2004 ID SOA DZs option C
321. uiries either go back to the Information tool and left click whereupon the tool will pop out turning it off or alternatively right click once to achieve the same result 3 Distance Between 2 Points Kia To obtain the distance between any two points use the Distance tool e Place the cursor over the Distance tool and click Return the cursor to the Map Display and note that it has changed to the position cursor e Position the cross on the Map Display Point A and click e Move the cursor to the second point B As the cursor moves note that there is a ghosted straight line across the map display e Once on the second point click to complete the enquiry e Study the Distance Indicator to read the distance recorded between the two selected points The Distance tool remains pressed in expecting a further enquiry to be undertaken by following steps 2 5 above If no further enquiries are to be made then either return the cursor to the tool and click whereupon the tool will pop out or alternatively click the right mouse button to achieve the same result 3 8 Grid Reference Easting Northing The Grid Reference feature provides at a glance the grid reference of the position of the very tip of the cursor when you move your mouse over the map C Long Lat Nat Gnd 514560 E 1 255099 N e To use this feature simply select the Map tab e Then run the mouse over the map to display the grid refer
322. ulation amp thematic page see below 6 1 Datasets Up to 2 datasets may be used for simple counts and percentage calculations using the displayed boundaries Data dots activities are summed into the various boundaries This calculation can occur at any level defined in the boundary set controlled using the drop down list beneath the dataset N B You can only use activity dot data with this function Census and deprivation data should be analysed with the Compare tab e The data is loaded by dragging a query card into a dataset panel A 2005 Local Government Boundanes bd ANtyPREgION w w District s v Ward y Y Boundary burtu Calculation amp themate Dateset _ Banding Lovrer l DOD ts 10999 Se T1100 ts 20 999 Sif i M 6100690999 91 DO te 99 999 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 267 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Activity data are summed into the various boundaries this summation can occur at any level defined in the boundary set this is selected with the first control after the data itself If the level chosen is not the lowest level defined in the boundary set e g a district that has child items wards then the options available are lt value gt values calculated for all displayed items of the same boundary level e g District
323. urn on off the horizontal bar graph The green bars indicate the proportion of all the wards on the map that fall into each band i e the longer the bar the more wards sit in that band Li ie Rbows Lal ib to 281 9 Lal 41 to 281 91 Lal ls to 422 91 Lal e82 to 422 91 Lal E23 to 563 91 al H23 to 563 91 Lal b64 to 704 91 lal h64 to 704 97 l F05 to 845 91 lal roitos4sor Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 230 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing doto 12 7 3 Setting the Number of Decimals e Right click anywhere on the bars to set the number of decimal places shown from 1 up to 4 Show 1 Decimal Place Show D P s Show 3 0 P s Show 4 D P s N B Compare banding reflects any manual edits to the Lower value in band one and also changes the map display accordingly e g if you set the Lower value to 1 any areas on the map valued lower than 1 are not filled with colour This will make maps and reports easier to understand 12 7 4 Changing the Interval Lower and Upper Values In the upper portion of a statistical banding section there is a lower and upper value given the former being the lower percentage found and the latter being the highest across the whole of the area which is populated with census not just those areas selected The difference between these two values is the total range of the values separated below TSM has calculated
324. us data Click on CAS Table 1 highlighted Age by Sex and resident type To select the 16 18 year olds as they would have been in 2001 then you need to select 5 6 and 7 year olds from Census 2001 if we are using 2012 13 learner data Select 5 7 year olds place the tick under the All People column against the relevant age This gets automatically loaded on the card Rename the card and drag it up on to the card stack Total Sotvlon Mappa ULIA et Aree 2001 Cornus Wadi Beeman 29077012 150146 D spiay C by All mir onne o SL ml e Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 235 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e To display the data click on the Compare Tab e Drag the learner data into the Show data e Drag the census data into the Base data e In Statistics Mode click Show over Base e Change the Base area to Wards or OAs if you have this option e Click the equals button e Change to appropriate bandings for example 5 equal bands quintiles pasa 2 WS T Aa Coop T Actoaty R Pamay mana W Setterants f Tent MFU fester 5 oriu E cinis Betendery rotasi Wate lemwes T Rodworce Ateas I Mion Gad F Brasi O Cite aaee M Aree gopa om pariscn tap t aso cata tefhwente Dots mpos ART Wee sonets m a S r ouma Sunistics Mode i Stew ove Dns WS govt C Veal chats Panta shein User d
325. us the bulbs for Outline and Fill e Repeat these steps to draw Catchment B s outline e Redraw the map 12 6 Create new Reference Area from a boundary e Display some boundaries on the map e Right click on a boundary set name in Boundary Structure e Select option Create new Reference Area Set e Type a description for the new reference areas e g Wards e Select a boundary level from the drop down list e g Boundaries e Leave the next box select unique boundary code blank e Enter a Boundary Level Description e g Area e Click Process e Click OK when processing is complete e Close TSM and re open it with the new Reference Area Option you created above e Switch on the Reference Areas layer and redraw to see the new areas displayed on the map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 279 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Part 12 Site Symbol Design Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 281 1 1 Guide to the Panels 282 1 1 1 Drawing Tools and Drawing Area 282 1 1 2 Quick Help 282 1 1 3 Symbol Objects List 283 1 1 4 Edit symbol tools 283 1 1 5 Review symbol tools 283 1 1 6 Preview Maps 284 2 CREATING AND EDITING SYMBOLS 285 2 1 Create a new symbol 285 2 2 Review a Symbol 288 2 3 Re scale a symbol 288 2 4 Edit a Symbol 289 2 4 1 Delete the Polyline 289 2 4 2 Increase the Object Size 290 2 4 3 Change an Object s Colour 290 2 4 4 C
326. ve been saved and retrieved are merely images and have no data attached to them therefore the Activity List see section 6 will not contain any information for these dots Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 136 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 6 Selecting Data 6 1 Irregular polygon There are several ways of capturing data in TSM Arguably the most flexible is the irregular polygon tool below left which enables you to draw a free hand shape around a dot or a cluster of dots in order to drill down into the detailed records e Click the Polygon tool which is above the map to the right of the pencil e Move the cursor to the map and left click in an obvious place near the dots you wish to capture e Move the cursor away from this first location to form the first corner of the shape and you will see a line attached to the cursor Left Click again and a line will be drawn between the two locations Move the cursor again to form another corner for the shape Left Click again and keep moving and clicking until you have drawn around the dots To Undo a dot situated incorrectly simply right click To close the polygon move the cursor back to the start position the mouse pointer will change to an upward arrow when this happens left click again and the polygon will be complete e Hatched lines are then drawn over the area encompassed by the polygon as p
327. veinformatics com Page 371 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 e The roads associated with this rule can be selected by using the appropriate tool as explained earlier and when the number is entered into the box they can be associated with this rule by clicking the sign to add them TIP To remove roads from the rule e Drawa polygon button below 2nd left around the roads or select single sections of road e Click MINUS sign on the rule box and the roads are removed from the rule e Select new roads if appropriate see above and click the PLUS sign e Click the save button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 372 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 8 3 Override rules As can be seen by the example the Override rules file can be set up in exactly the same manner as the Core road speeds file except that they can be DATE as well as Day and Time specific useful for term dates or roadworks between two dates N B The from value cannot be greater than the to value Drivetime maintenance road speed tile selection File type Override rules Mame Heaps axal OE 05 August 2002 11 50 rule sets D al x x time specific 08 301 09 29 Level 3 Outer Level 3 Inner Level 4 Outer Level 4 City Centre a list of rules in rule set click to select used by tis rue ee
328. verting a File N B If you wish you can convert several fields at once but the Fields and Table selections MUST be in the same order on the form e g Sex followed by Specialty below although they do not have to be in the same order as they appear in the file you are converting SEX x SPECIALITY opecialtyCodes When at least one Field and one Table are selected the Convert button is enabled e Click on the Convert button e The file is then converted and the progress displayed in the labels shown below e The values are updated in steps of 100 records Total Records 097 Converted 0096 Fart Converted 0 No Conversion 1 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 325 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 3 6 Saving the converted file When the file has been completely converted the following window will be displayed N B The system saves the file in TXT format L Save Coverted File As e gt idi Program Files ACTIVE Data gt SF E File name Save as type Alias file TXT 7 e The Change the file name to something more meaningful if required e Click on the Save button e When the file has been saved the program will clear all selections and results from the form N B To use the file within ACTIVE TSM simply use the DB Design Wizard See Chapter 3 to create a database design and import the newly matched data Confidential www
329. w not 1 and 3 only lime Include Blanks Response Code Incident Type To overcome this issue set these fields up as lists either by selecting them as Data Type Text in stage 3 of the Wizard see Chapter 3 or by editing the fields in an existing database design as follows e Goto the DB Design Tab e Select the Database Definition and click Edit e Select Field Definitions halfway down to the left e Select the relevant field e g Response Code e Atthe bottom of the screen change its Field Type to Text e Click OK e Select Query Screen Design halfway down to the right e Select the relevant field e g Response Code e Atthe bottom of the screen change its Type to Selection List e Click OK e Move the new list box from the top left of the Query Writer to another place on the panel as it will almost certainly be covering up another field e Repeat the above steps for any other field you require e Click Save far right then OK e Goto the Database Tab and re import the data manually see Chapter 3 You must do this because you have made a significant change to one or more of the database fields The resulting field boxes see below now contain entries than can be selected individually if required ort Tima fr E X include Blanks From 00 00 00 To 23 59 59 Response Code gyg incident Type 0 35 m m Ej PF J P 4 10 11 Confiden
330. w activeinformatics com Page 271 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 7 Make User Poly ALL boundaries can be turned into polygons in order to trap and analyse dot data as per the irregular polygon in the Map Detail panel e Right click the boundary item you wish to turn into a polygon Boundary structure Calculation amp thematic Pa ef 1991 Census Boundaries H Pale 1998 Local Government Boundaries S EJER soChrones g F a New Group FE Bedford Hosp e Select Make user poly from the pop up list e Rename the polygon if required by clicking the text below the word Polygon at the top of the map window e g Loc_01 and typing in a new name followed by the Return key J N B You can also Invert poly so it is easy to count the activity that is outside the polygon You can do the same with single isochrones Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 272 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 8 Save Boundary Settings When you save a session the boundary settings on off can also be saved e To save a work session click on the box containing the word Default or the name of the current session in the panel at the top left of the map e A new window will appear allowing the word lt new gt to be double clicked and a new name typed maximum of 50 characters followed by the Retur
331. w activeinformatics com Page 357 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 5 3 Importing Boundaries It is possible to import boundaries from TSM or any other GIS providing the files are available in MID MIF format To do this via TSM e Export a set of boundaries to MID MIF See Chapter 11 Boundaries e In Travel Time Boundaries go to the Map Features Tab e Click Import New Boundary at the bottom right e Select the MIF file using the Windows Explorer pop up that appears e Click Open a progress bar appears at this point Once the files are loaded and the progress bar disappears e Click the drop down list below this to edit the Boundary Line Thickness e g 1px pixel e N B The Border colour is set by the Travel Time Boundaries program e Click the Text label field drop down list to select a label field e g Name e Click Save to continue or Cancel to quit e Make sure that the boundary is ticked in order to display it on the map Un tick it to remove it from the display temporarily e Click edit and Delete to remove the boundary permanently from Travel Time Boundaries User Boundary Mame 2011 Local Government Boundaries a0 Edit Import fror file Number of entities 2629 Number in map area 2143 Border colour Boundary thickness Ip oF Text label field Manners Save Hame a ja
332. w and Base Data Cards You can clear all cards meaning that many queries can be used in one session e Right click on the card and hit the clear button Cancel 12 10 Map Colours There are three ways of viewing the thematic map Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 232 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 1 Shades of one colour 2 Colour spectrum 3 User defined colours Shading Style O Shades of one colour x Shade trom white to Shaded to black O Colour spectrum O Vivid shades Pastel shades User defined colours e hunk to fit bands Cy B gt rst N colours e The default colour is grey but can be changed by clicking on one of the colour buttons before clicking the redraw button to refresh the map display e By clicking on the check box for shade from white to colour the upper values will change from white to the darkest shade of the colour selected e By clicking on the check box for shaded to black the upper values will change to black rather than a dark colour e The colours range from blue for lower to red for upper values e The colour spectrum colours can be set to vivid or pastel shades 12 10 1 User defined Colour Schemes e The user defined colours are the default shades set up using active colour configuration and are the same as the default point colours There is a button to launch the Configuration utility whic
333. waiting a a a O ND Neme ma as A TT g s B 6 Vet Adder Un Se AA irom OF tone Hoyts EE be Oren Lomyuetiiie N B The maximum number of cells grid squares that can be created in this way is 2 000 Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 276 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 11 Convert Boundaries Into Reference Areas Boundaries such as Station Areas and the 2007 Local Authority Wards can also be converted into up to ten additional reference areas This enables you to create shaded maps and generate your own reference tables comprising data tagged with for example station or up to date ward codes e Firstly right click on the boundary set and select Create New Reference Area Set e Enter the Reference Area Description e g 2010 Local Government Wards e Select the Boundary Level to convert e g Ward e Select the Unique Boundary Code e g County RegionDistrictWard Code e Enter Boundary Level Description e g Ward e Select Boundaries to Process e g Only Displayed e Click Process e When the Reference Area Set has been created click Cancel to quit e You will now have a new Reference Area option when you start the program relating to the boundary set you used Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 277 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 12Step By Step Frequently Used Functions
334. what Replace with Options gt gt Replace All Replace Find All Close nothing TIP TXT and CSV files are interchangeable and therefore if you find it easier to edit a file in MS Excel you can always rename the file extension from TXT to CSV in MS Windows Explorer The CSV file will automatically open in MS Excel when you click on it but beware older versions of MS Excel pre 2007 may truncate the file as they only allow a maximum of 64 000 rows to be viewed MS Excel 2007 and above will allow 1 4 million rows to be viewed Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 57 of 389 ACTIVE bringing dato to fe Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 The examples below show the same file containing emergency incident data opened first in Notepad top then in MS Excel bottom Notepad below Tre tdentaueter ioc tcent Type Incident Descr tettor Easting warthtng Cel ibete Cal itive asst te anpi toe Mob elute Mont laTine Vehte taivar lah leGate vet 731012 Spec Serv Crergency 9376394 198389 04 01 2008 14122156 0601 2001 14 24530 0401 2001 04 01 101 Lim 33 w611 Pump 4 74011 Spec Serv Eer gency 489042 90008 2201 2001 16 20 58 ao 2001 16 22 19 32 01 eao 22 01 2001 16123 127 5211 Pusp 14 440 Spec serw Emergency 184bOd 196100 21 06 2008 19 54 2005 20257 14 21 04 2008 73 04 2003 10 58 33 5895 Hydraulic elatfors 133900 Spec Serv Ewerger
335. whole districts e Goto the Areas Tab e Select the LADs area group e Drag the specific activity query into Show Data e Drag the Total activity query into Base Data e Set the Base Area to District e Set the Display areas by to Wards e Click Equals Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 226 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato to ifs The results will be broken down into Districts with the total number of activities for the whole district in the next column followed by the ward name the count of activities for that ward and the percentage this number contributes to the district total as per the example below Comparison Figures Base Mo SHOW BY Wards 3458 Pastures 3954 Rewenhurst and Fosse 3155 Sanondale 3054 Stanton and Fiamvilie 3359 Winstankoy 27M Aniey 7704 Barrow ond Sileby West 2704 Birstall Wano 7704 Birstall Watermend 774 East Goscote 7704 Forest Bradgate 7104 Loughboroweg Asthiry 7704 Loughbaroegt Dishley antl 2 04 Loughboroegh Garendon 277M Loughborough Hastings 2704 Loughboroegt Lemyngton 77M Loughboroegh Nanpantan 2704 L oaghbotoegh Outwoods Z104 Loughborowgh Shetthorpe FD Loughborowg Southliebds 2704 Loughboroegh Storer ZTM Mountscere 2704 Quenihoroagh 7704 Quorn aed Mountsorrel 7704 Rothley and Thurceston 7 04 Shepshed Lac TTD Shepshed Wasi 2704 Siletry 2704 Syston East 2704
336. witch between All Areas and Selected Area by clicking on either title Display Counts by All Areas Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 211 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 8 3 Saving to the Library e lf the data has been selected e g All Households is data that may be required again simply click on the Library tool in the Reference Toolbox and the Query Library Panel will appear as below Query library Ref Data queries Name Description AIl Households All Households M Households Census 2011 Census 2011 Output Area statistics Area statistics ee gt o 2011 ie Area statistics Census 2011 Output Area statistics e The title and Description may be edited if necessary before clicking on the Save Button The query will be saved and may be retrieved during any future session by clicking on the Library tool highlighting the query required from the Query Library Panel Click the Load button This will open the necessary table and select the cells required for the query Save as many Reference datasets as necessary To permanently delete a query bring up the Query Library as described above Select the query to be deleted Then click on the Delete button Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 212 of 389 February 2015 bringing dato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE 8 4 Export to Excel To export a Reference q
337. ww activeinformatics com Page 379 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Goto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 Now right click the PIN that has been created and the following window is displayed Refresh Copy Deselect all oad Fin Mem pir e Select Pin and the following is displayed Pt Retresh Copy We select all iad 9 6 Generating Isochrones Manually When the Generate Isochrone option is clicked the appropriate Isochrones are created around the pin and stored in the group in the Existing Isochrone sets panel 9 7 Generating Isochrones Automatically Using Key Sites e Go to the drop down list to the right of the Key Sites button e Left click to turn on and highlight your chosen key site database e g Hospitals or Main Campuses e Right click on the key site database and select Generate Isochrones around every site e Each set of isochrones will be named after each key site location N B The Group name and sets can be changed by right clicking the mouse and choosing Rename Group or Rename Set TIP Press the Esc key on the keyboard or the CANCEL button bottom left hand corner during the isochrone creation process to stop the process Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 380 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato An example Isochrone set is shown here Te a T ale I i ate To
338. www activeinformatics com Page 364 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE February 2015 bringing dato 7 Sessions Pressing these buttons enables you to save the current set of map layers left to right below Open session Save current session Save session as Contents of Saved Sessions e When a session has to be saved for the first time use Save Session As There are only certain items saved and one of those which is not is the Map e When Save Session is clicked the software will write the information to the file of the Named session at the top of the screen If no name is present the information is written to the Default session which must exist e To open a named session just click the button and select from the list before clicking the Open button Items that are saved are 1 Units used Kilometres or Miles 2 Last set of Maintenance files used 3 Map Layers on off e Primary Routes e Secondary Routes e Railways e Urban Areas e Motorway Junctions e Roundabouts e Railway Stations e County Boundaries e District Boundaries e Text e Key Sites e Pins 4 Default settings for Isochrones 5 Pins generated and whether on or off 6 Site Types on or off Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 365 of 389 ACTIVE Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 bringing dato 8 Drivetime Rules There are three types of file 1 Core road speeds files e
339. y it on the map using the raster map background to add context e Adjust the slider to change the opacity of the dots the lower the percentage the more solid the dots will appear e Create a hotspot map e g Continuous Surface Mapping in Compare and display it on the map using the raster map background to add context e Adjust the slider to change the opacity of the hotspot map the lower the percentage the more solid the hotspots will appear Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 46 of 389 ACTIVE bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 6 Search Facility FIND Click on the Find button top right of the Map toolbox Select the item you want to search for e g Road Key in the road name or number and click the Find button below A red circle will appear if it can identify your item on the current map view The system will automatically zoom in on the red circle to a map size of 5 km Return to the Find utility to search again if required e Alternatively if it can t find what you re looking for cancel the zoom to return the map to its full extent and try the search again Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 47 of 389 ACTIVE bein cang doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 TSM User Guide Part 2 Online Help Contents 1 HELP MENU 49 1 1 Help Contents 49 1 2 Search for Help on 50 1 3 Context Help 50 1 4 About 51 2 CONTEXT SENSITIVE HELP 52
340. y of your data before importing it but also start running queries in a few clicks of the mouse e Click on the DB Design Tab then click on the Wizard button below Database Definitions LD Lifestyle Mosaic HH Data M2 Mobs 2 MO Mobs Data AACMobs Data for Training 2 1 Stage 1 Selecting files This will allow you to select a CSV OR TXT file In the example below we are using the same emergency incident data file displayed before called Test CSV Click Next Database Design Wizard Stage 1 Select CSV File on which to base the new database design lf Use ist row as header Selected File C Program Files ACT Data Test csv N B The example data used in this chapter is related to fire service incidents and certain items such as date and time may not be relevant to your system although the principles outlined below are the same for all users Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 60 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Goto 2 2 Stage 2 Naming the database Name your database by typing a General Title for it The wizard auto populates the database ID the 2 digit ID code which can still be changed by the user if required It also auto populates the print title field so leave the Print Title box blank see below Click Next Database Design Wizard Stage 2 Set Database Title amp Id Database Type Id AC General Title Tra ining
341. ying the minimum and maximum zoom values at which the text is to appear In both cases the properties may be changed by clicking in the appropriate cell and dragging up down leift right to alter the value Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 259 of 389 ACTIVE bringing Gato Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 4 2 To change the font e Click on the name style button below e Click the lt new style gt option e Select a font style and size e Click OK e Click on the new style to select it Properties S Text plot al Properties MS Tetplot O Oiee Ofset Zoom FINE N Min Max oa Name Colwyn IRE 0 0 1 0 Om 25km Areal 55781 69 MI 0 0 1 0 Om 25km strictCode 4585F __ Mm strict Code w 00l 00 N B To change an existing text style right click it to bring up the font properties box make changes and click OK to save style 1 Style 2 Style 3 Sigle F new style gt Showcard Gothic F SimSun Small Fonts Sample aBeYyza Script wester k Thiz font style iz imitated for the display The closest matching style j will be used for printing In all other cases left click is used to access the property value Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 260 of 389 Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual February 2015 ACTIVE bringing Goto 5 Create a New Boundary Set e To create a new Boundary Set right click any blank space in
342. ype Chimney Fire False Alarm Good Intent Faise Alarm Malicious 2 6 Selecting List Entries e In addition to selecting all or none of the list items left click on individual list items to select and highlight them in blue Simply click again on the Clear all button to de select it and remove the blue highlight colour Any number of list items can be selected from any Panel In the example below Chimney Fire has been selected on its own Incidentlype o Chimney Fire Overborder Attended Secondary Fire Spate Civil Disturb Condt Spec Serv Emergency UwF S FADA e Double click one item then drag the mouse down the list to select a sequence of items For very long lists you could use SHIFT and Page Down to select blocks of items In the example below the first four items have been selected Incidentlype Chimney Fire False Alarm Good Intent False Alarm Malicious FDR1 Fire Overborder Attended Secondary Fire Spate Civil Disturb Condt Spec Ser Emergency Uw S FADA Confidential www activeinformatics com Page 93 of 389 February 2015 bringing doto Total Solution Mapping v9 3 User Manual Q ACTIVE e Hold down the CTRL key and left click to select several individual entries In the example below both Chimney Fire and FDR1 Fire have been selected You can also de select items using CTRL and left click Overborder Attended Secondary Fire Spate Civil Disturb Condt Spec Serv Emergency Uw

TSM and TTB - ACTIVE Solutions Web Portal

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents